Home

MELSEC-L Ethernet Interface Module User`s Manual (Basic)

1. q OQ ll ie a H O lit Connected device Another station Connected device Web server AAAA DAS DAN Programming tool The E71 has the following basic functions e Connection with MELSOFT products and a GOT e Collection and modification of CPU module data from connected devices MC protocol communications e Communications using SLMP e Data communications using the predefined protocol predefined protocol support function e Exchange of data with connected devices communications using a fixed buffer and random access buffer e Prevention of unauthorized access through a remote password e E mail sending receiving e mail function e Data sending receiving using the Web function 19 1 Connection with MELSOFT products and a GOT In Ethernet a programming tool can create programming of a programmable controller and monitor a programmable controller MELSOFT connection and the GOT can monitor and test a programmable controller Remote operations making full use of the Ethernet capability long distance connectivity and high speed communications are achieved Programming tool E71 2 Collection and modification of CPU module data from connected devices MC protocol com
2. 54 Processing IMC ve soriana dada a 294 Programming tool o o o o oooooooo 17 QnA compatible 3E frame 85 READ so eat Gis ot Et IR ied A a ea ae et ee 189 RE ON Se eae ch Sate ate doar are Wea a Ne et 189 RESVS amada dao ah 189 Reinitialization process 305 Relevant manuals o oooooooooo T Remote password o o ooooooooooo ooo 174 Remote password check 176 Remote password setting processes unlock and lock processes 175 FE bert sae ions tates ated tan uate at ean ara eee 189 RIAS COMNECCIOM es ba os des Soa te ed A 57 Router information o ooo oo 170 Router IP address ooooooooo 172 Router relay function o 168 Sample program on the connected device side 340 Self diagnostic testS oooooo 322 Self loopback test oooooo o 65 322 SEND Lcdo See ned es de a cis 189 Send frame setting o o ooooo 66 Setting parameters required for communications 64 Shielded twisted pair cable STP 57 A A A ders ace A 17 Special functions 0 00000 eee eee 30 Specifications iaa rada aa 21 SREADA su add a e teat eee Me ob on A 189 Stant l ONG ss dia ai 65 Station Nora adas ona sue Wee a ap aioe Se 65 Stalahtcabl ia ia ridad as 57 Subnet addreSS naaa da 170 Subnet MASK Esia ram wet nt E a ee eo 17 Subne
3. H L A a J 2 bytes 2 bytes Re A Application data area Response 133 ejep uoeoddy z 9 z ewo eed OCI 134 b Subheader Because an E71 automatically adds and deletes a header the user setting is not required Command Response b7 to bO b7 to bO 0 1 1 010 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 Communications using 60H 00H EOH a binary code AS Subheader Subheader b7 to bO b7 to bO Di 110 1000 0 rt Aa 8 00 00 e y ve En O 00 Communications using 36H 30H 30H 30H 45H 30H an ASCII code Subheader Subheader c Data length setting The following are the data sizes of a text command e Communications using a binary code Maximum of 1017 words e Communications using an ASCII code Maximum of 508 words CHAPTER 12 COMMUNICATIONS USING A FIXED BUFFER d Text command The following is the format of a command response e Communications using a binary code Command format Maximum of 1017 words 60H 00H L H L H L H L H SST H Subheader Data specifying storing device for sending receiving instructions Dos Data length n setting H L ne n 2 H L Send BO receive data n setting data length H L 1 word 2 bytes e Communications using an ASCII code Command format Maximum of 1016 words gt H to L H to L H to L Ss H to L Subheader ewo eed OCI
4. 245 16 6 11 An e mailicannor be sent vidad di ceil awe aa aha a denen do 246 16 6 12 An e mail cannot be received 0 ee 247 16 6 13 Communications using data link instructions cannot be performed 248 16 EMoOrCoOdelS me tracks ais ie ah aa ha erie aad Gna ae ea ela ele lea een ae 249 16 7 1 End codes returned to a connected device during data communications 259 16 7 2 Abnormal codes returned during communications using an A compatible 1E frame 263 16 7 3 Error codes stored in the buffer memory 0000 cee eee 264 11 16 95 ElerierDIaONOSICS arca rra os risa adas iaa dias 290 16 9 Checking the Status of the E71 with the System Monitor o oo oooo 291 16 10 How to Turn Off the COM ERR LED 0 0 eens 293 APPENDICES 294 Appendix 1 Processing Menee osi0cc e83o52cesebcend eb 605c5424 caehees Get odie os 294 Appendix 2 Port Numbers Used for the E71 0 0 0c eee 299 Appendix 3 New and Improved Functions n anaana aaaea ees 300 Appendix 4 Initial Process 202 05 5244 24d Si48 85154 02445140 a bee yeus 301 Appendix 4 1 Setting the initial process 0 sanaaa ce eee teenies 301 Appendix 4 2 Reinitialization process 1 0 0 0 nents 305 Appendix 5 Line Status Checks vanos liar ideada tos si 312 APPendiXx 5 T PING AGS hsb ea eto ea ne Se Bie eR aba a 312 Abpendixs 2 Loopbachlest 224absgeiet
5. 319 c Action for abnormal end If the loopback test fails No response or an error code is displayed Displayed test Status of the Action result target E71 Initial processing normal completion IP address Normal completion status INIT LED turns on Correct the following parameter settings The initial process for the target E71 has not Basic setting been completed normally e Ethernet operation setting e Initial setting There is an error such as cable disconnection and line disconnection in the e Check the cable line connection to the target E71 The IP address of the target E71 is incorrect The class or subnet address differs from that of the E71 operation settings The same IP address has been set to No response multiple target E71 modules Perform the PING test on the No response No error Correct the set values of the Ethernet The same network number or station module When the test is completed number has been set to multiple target E71 normally correct the set values in the basic modules settings The Ethernet line is heavily loaded including a case where an error equivalent When the Ethernet line is not heavily N E ist eM OVE ORCS to the error codes CO30y and C0314 is loaded perform the test again occurring The routing parameter is not set an error j t th t val f th ti Error exists equivalent to the error code C080 is Correct the set value of the
6. Data specifying storing device for sending receiving instructions ejep uopeaiddy z 9 z ASCll binary conversion Data length setting H L Send receive data O E A Maximum of 508 words 1 word 2 bytes 135 136 e End codes An error code is stored in the end code added to a response For the error codes refer to the error code list Page 259 Section 16 7 1 End codes are stored in the complete status area in the control data of the BUFSND and BUFRCV instructions as well as the communication status storage area of the buffer memory Point If an error code related to MC protocol communications or communications using a random access buffer is stored during communications using a fixed buffer it may be caused by the following Cause Action The data length value specified in the application data of the Specify the actual text data size for the data length in the message sent from a connected device to the E71 is different application data from the actual text data size Refer to Remark in this page The subheader of the message sent from a connected Correct the subheader specified in the application data device to the E71 is incorrect remar Depending on the restrictions of the buffers of the own station and destination station data may be divided for communications Data received separately is restored reassembled by the E71 for com
7. a Execution method Execute the test using the MC protocol dedicated command Loopback test 0619 Point When the user port on the E71 side is used to perform MC protocol communications the line connection process is necessary Execute the open process for the connection used for the E71 side s yoeqdoo Z s xipueddy 199y9 sn e s U17 G xipuaddy 321 Appendix 6 Self Diagnostic Tests This section describes the self diagnostic tests to check data communications and hardware of an E71 Appendix 6 1 Self loopback test Hardware including the E71 communication circuit is checked Send the test message destined to the own station of the E71 to the line Then check whether the same message can be received over the network 1 Operating procedure Use the following procedure Network Parameter MELSECNET CC IE Ethernet Module Configuration Set network cor EEE ation setting in CC IE Field configuration window Networ Ethernet Start I O No Network No Total Station Self Loopback Test Operation Setting Initial Setting ii En NN interrupt Settings _________ ___________ cessary Setting No Setting Already Set Set if it is meeded No Setting Already Set Valid Module During Other Station Access 1 le Start I O No E Please input 16 point unit HEX to start I O No in which module is mounted A des Routing Parameters Assi
8. 260 Error wee Error description code e The number of points for a command specified by a connected device exceeds the maximum number of processing points number of processes that can be executed per communication for each process Addresses from the start address start device number and start step number to the specified number of points exceed the largest addresses device number and step number for each process The byte length of a command is not within the range defined by the specifications When data is written the set number S H of write data points is different from the specified number of points A monitor request was issued even though monitoring data is not registered For data read write in a microcomputer program an address after the last address that can be set in the parameter setting has been specified In the block number specification of the extension file register a block number exceeding the range of the corresponding memory cassette size has been specified The start address start device number and start step number of a command specified by a connected device has been set outside the range that can be specified For data read write in a microcomputer program or file register values exceeding the CPU module parameter setting range has been specified 98H e A block number specified for an e Correct the block extension file register does not exist number CHAPTER 16 TRO
9. 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual for each module Ifthe actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 211 Error code Error description COF5 y COF6 COF7 COF8 C100 C1014 2 8 System error The OS detected an error System error The OS detected an error An error has occurred in the self loopback test System error The OS detected an error System error The OS detected an error A response could not be received from the DNS client Action e Follow the procedure below 1 Check if the Ethernet module the power supply module and the CPU module are properly connected 2 Check if the operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the CPU module 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual for each module Ifthe actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Follow the procedure below 1 Check if the Ethernet module the power supply module and the CPU module are properly connected 2 Check if the operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the CPU module 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual for each module Ifthe actions above do
10. COE7 y COE8 COE9y COEAyy COEByy 2 6 An error was detected in the programmable controller CPU An error was detected in the programmable controller CPU An error was detected in the programmable controller CPU An error was detected in the programmable controller CPU An error was detected in the programmable controller CPU An error was detected in the programmable controller CPU Action e Check that the programmable controller CPU and each intelligent function module are properly connected e Check that the programmable controller CPU is not in the reset status e Check if an error exists in the programmable controller CPU If an error exists take the action required to correct it e Replace the power supply module programmable controller CPU or intelligent function module e Check that the programmable controller CPU and each intelligent function module are properly connected e Check that the programmable controller CPU is not in the reset status e Check if an error exists in the programmable controller CPU If an error exists take the action required to correct it e Replace the power supply module programmable controller CPU or intelligent function module e Check that the programmable controller CPU and each intelligent function module are properly connected e Check that the programmable controller CPU is not in the reset status e Check if an error exists in the programmabl
11. Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corp The SD and SDHC logos are either registered trademarks or trademarks of SD 3C LLC All other company names and product names used in this manual are either trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies P 368 SH NA 081105ENG D SH NA 081105ENG D 1504 MEE MODEL LJ71E71 U KI E MODEL CODE 13JZ73 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 JAPAN NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 CHOME HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPAN When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission Specifications subject to change without notice
12. Sending normal completion or reception completion OFF For fixed buffer communication of connection No 8 Detection of sending error or reception error OFF The I O signal assignment of when the start I O number of an E71 is Device A Signal name number Connection No 1 ON At sending request or reception complete confirmation signal OFF lt Connection No 2 ON At sending request or reception complete confirmation signal OFF lt Connection No 3 ON At sending request or reception complete confirmation signal OFF lt Connection No 4 ON At sending request or reception complete confirmation signal OFF lt Connection No 5 ON At sending request or reception complete confirmation signal OFF Connection No 6 ON At sending request or reception complete confirmation signal OFF Connection No 7 ON At sending request or reception complete confirmation signal OFF Connection No 8 ON At sending request or reception complete confirmation signal OFF Connection No 1 ON Open request OFF lt Connection No 2 ON Open request OFF lt o Connection No 3 ON Open request OFF 5 Connection No 4 ON Open request OFF lt Connection No 5 ON Open request OFF lt Connection No 6 ON Open request OFF lt Connection No 7 ON Open request OFF lt m Connection No 8 ON Open reque
13. Target Function f Error information to be cleared Item specification specification buffer memory S1 2 S1 3 7 e Initial error code address 694 Initial error 00004 00004 e COM ERR LED off O 0004 to 0010 0000 Open error code for a connection with the O pee i H connected device address 7Cy 86p Error log 0100y FFFFy Error log address E3y to 17414 Siusi pia 0101 FFFF Clears communication status a ESAN i address 178y to 1FF y Communication E mail receiving E mail ivi tat 0102 FFFF status EN aa das address 58714 to 5B38 E mail sending address 5B39y to 5CAOy All FFFFy FFFFy Clears all of the above E mail sending status 01034 FFFFy 220 CHAPTER 15 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS e Completion of the ERRCLR instruction can be checked with Completion device D1 0 and D1 1 Item Description Turns on at the END process of the scan where the ERRCLR instruction is completed and Completion device D1 0 turns off at the next END process Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the ERRCLR instruction e Normal completion Stays off and does not change Completion device D1 1 e Abnormal end Turns on at the END process of the scan where the ERRCLR instruction is completed and turns off at the next END process Operation while the ERRCLR instruction is being executed END END END Program scan process L__Sean__ process L__Sean__ process ERRCLR instruction E
14. Necessary Setting Mo Setting Already Set Set if itis nmeeded Mo Setting Already Set Start I O No valid Module During Other Station Access fi v Please input 16 point uniti HEX to start I O No in which module is mounted seas cda outing Poetas Assignment Image sroup Setting Check End Cancel y Print Window Print Window Preview p r Interlink Transm Faral b Ethernet operation setting Ethernet Operation Setting Communication Data Code Initial Timing Do not wait For OPEN Communications impossible at STOP time f ASCII Code cy Always wait For OPEN Communication possible at STOP time i Binary Code IP Address Setting Send Frame Setting Input Format DEC Ethernetiv2 0 IP Address 192 TEEES02 3 Bunas Jajaweled ZG LL SUONCOIUNLWWOD O00 0Jq Pauljepalg JO ajduex3 S 4 Enable Online Change TCP Existence Confirmation Setting i Use the Keepalive Use the Ping ma 115 c Open setting Network Parameter Ethernet Open Setting Module No 1 ne Cere pe EA ae send pg Procedure Exist Disate i 4096 E ue oO a AA ee ee Maa asas MT A 116 CHAPTER 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING THE PREDEFINED PROTOCOL 11 5 3 Program example The following is a program example that specifies Connection No 1 and executes a protocol by using the ECPRTCL instruction 1 Sample program
15. a Sending side LCPU 1 side lt lt Open process program gt gt SM400 UO MOV G20480 K4M0 UO MOV G20482 K4M20 M1000 _AAAA lt lt lt A OO PS M1001 M1001 X19 MO M20 MOVP HO D100 ZP OPEN UO K1 D100 M100 M100 M101 SET M150 M101 P A M SET M151 oo lt lt Program for predefined protocol communications gt gt Y M3000 X19 MO X1D 3 2 J HA HA HA s moor 83 o D M3001 39 INC DO z y D 30 3 0 MOV HO D1 D D O U MOV HOFF D2 3 o O o MOV H3FF D3 O O 3 MOV H10 D4 2 M3001 DMOV K100 D5 5 n MOV HOA8 D7 MOV K10 D8 117 118 M3001 MOV K1 GP ECPRTCL K1 D200 M200 M201 SET M201 SET MOVP D201 lt lt Close process program gt gt MO a PL M360 M150 HH PLS M6000 q 2 PS M6001 MO _ ZP CLOSE UO K1 D400 M361 M410 SET M400 M401 SET M401 RST D202 M200 M250 M251 D300 M360 M361 M6001 M400 M410 M402 M403 M410 CHAPTER 12 COMMUNICATIONS USING A FIXED BUFFER CHAPTER 12 COMMUNICATIONS USING A FIXED BUFFER This chapter describes communications using a fixed buffer 12 1 Applications In communications using a fixed buffer a programmable controller can actively send data therefore data can be sent from the programmable controller to the host system when an error occurs in machine equipment or some other conditions are satisfied A maximum of 1K word of data can be sent or received between progra
16. o oooooo ooo 59 Applicable systems o o ooooooooo o 59 Application data 132 158 ARK acen eN e ad a e 16 ASCII a ide ad apie eta 362 Auto open UDP port o o oooo 299 Basic 1UNCHONS r sarao dada ed 29 Basic Setting does o it 65 Bend PIS a ri tl a 62 Broadcast communications 140 Buffer Memory recrea dels 34 BUFROV 0 2 e AAA AAA eS 189 BUFRO VS sado a AS EA Wh ee 189 BUFSND 26 itches a tad cito e 189 Cascade connection 21 CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 relay communications 0 0000 eee ee eee 30 Checking the LEDS o o o oooo 235 Checking the serial number function version and MAC address tac Fo tater ee eee 360 Checking the status of the E71 with the system MORIR ir del 291 Checking with the module error collection function A E a a oa sp Gora 234 CLOSE aos edt oka te Bo 189 Communication data code 0 66 Communication procedure 63 Communications using a fixed buffer 119 Communications using a random access buffer 153 Communications using an auto open UDP port 173 Communications using data link instructions 30 Compliance with EMC and Low Voltage Directives 6 Connecting MELSOFT products and a GOT 81 Connection target fiance cts Guinn doth Grates aor a et aoe 82 Data tomates
17. 13 7 Example of Communications Using a Random Access Buffer The following figure shows an example of a write operation from a connected device Connected device Random access buffer Device memory Data received Data received Receive process program U0 G 11720 0 U0 Y BMOV 11710 R20000 Receive completion flag The receive completion flag is provided at the end of the received data The receive completion flag is monitored When the receive completion flag turns on the data is transmitted from the random access buffer to the CPU module ng ss 29y Wopuey e Buisp suoneoiunwwog jo ajduexy3 167 CHAPTER 14 OTHER FUNCTIONS This chapter describes basic functions of the E71 other than those described in the preceding chapters 14 1 Router Relay Function This section describes the router relay function 14 1 1 Applications This function allows the E71 to communicate with connected devices on other Ethernet networks via a router and gateway This function does not allow the E71 to operate as a router One default router and up to eight routers can be set 14 1 2 Parameter settings Configure the settings in the following window TO Project window gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt Ethernet CC IE Field gt Select Ethernet under Network Type gt button 2 Network Parameter Setting the Ethernet Router Relay AE Router Relay Function Mot
18. 3 Programming tool setting Set the parameters using the programming tool as shown below a Ethernet operation setting Ethernet Operation Setting b Open setting Network Parameter Ethernet Open Setting Module No 1 TCP Unpassive wf5end Procedure Exist w Disable No Confirm v 2000 lalala lalola lalola le KOREA KOE lalala fata fe fafa fa lo lalola lalo lalala lefela lufele le KOREA KEKE lalala fata fe fa fafa fa lalola alo la fala KR KRER ER fofe lo lalola lo 392 APPENDICES 4 Sample program on the connected device side The program example of the connected device accessing the LO2CPU in the E71 connected station is described In this program data of DO to D4 five points in the LO2CPU in the E71 connected station are read with an A compatible 1E frame command 01 Batch read in word units The following are basic operation procedures e Sending a command with the line disconnected Connect the line After completing the connection the E71 sends a command e Reconnecting the line with it connected Disconnect the line After the disconnection is completed reconnect it rm The following is an outline of how to compile a program created using Microsoft Corporation Visual Basic NET e Start Visual Basic NET e Create a project From File gt New gt Project select Visual Basic Project in Project Types and Windows Application in Templates and set the project name e g
19. 301 TCP ULP Timer Set Time to Live during packet sending in TCP IP 2 to 32767 Set the receive buffer value on the recipient If the receive buffer on the recipient has no free space window size 0 data sending is waited until the recipient has free receive buffer space At this time the sender sends packets for checking the sending window to the recipient according to the TCP zero window timer value to check the receiving status TCP Zero Window Timer 2 to 32767 Set the time to resend ACK if it is not returned when a connection is opened or data is sent in TCP IP This timer is also used for Time to Live for the ARP function ARP is resent TCP Resend Timer by the time of TCP resend timer value 2 if no response to an 2 to 32767 ARP request is returned This timer is also used as the minimum set time for arrival monitoring time for data link instructions When closing the TCP IP connection by the own station set the monitoring time for waiting for a FIN from the connected device after the own station sends a FIN and an ACK is TCP End Timer returned from the connected device If a FIN is not received 2 to 32767 from the connected device within the time specified by the TCP end timer value a RST is sent to the connected device Timer Setting and the connection is forcibly closed The communication data may be divided at the IP level before being sent due to the buffer limitation of the sending station or IP Assembly Timer o
20. A response from the POP3 layer could not be received An e mail without an attachment was received This error occurs when an attachment is not read normally An e mail that was received has an attachment with an invalid name System error The OS detected an error Action e Follow the procedure below 1 Check if the Ethernet module the power supply module and the CPU module are properly connected 2 Check if the operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the CPU module 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual for each module Ifthe actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Check the cables and hubs e Check if communications with the DNS server can be performed using the PING command e Check if the POP3 server name has been registered in the DNS e Delete the POP3 server name and change the setting to the IP address setting Then check the operation e Check if communications with the POP3 server can be performed using the PING command e Specify the attachment on the sending side e Check the program on the sending side e If data sending using the MSEND instruction previously failed with the sending source of the mail server check the destination of the MSEND instruction e Check if the e mail specifications such as the encoding de
21. Data type Bit BIN 16 bit BIN 32 bit BCD 4 digit BCD 8 digit Real number Character string Device name Description Bit data or the start number of bit data 16 bit binary data or the start number of word device 32 bit binary data or the start number of double word device Four digit binary coded decimal data Eight digit binary coded decimal data Floating point data Character string data Device name data 15 TERMS Unless otherwise specified this manual uses the following terms Term ARP Buffer memory Buffer memory address BUFRCV BUFRCVS BUFSND C24 CLOSE Dedicated instruction Device DNS E71 E71 connected station ECPRTCL ERRCLR ERRRD FTP GX Developer GX Works2 HTTP ICMP Intelligent function module IP MAC address MC protocol MELSECNET 10 MELSECNET H MELSECNET H remote I O station MRECV MSEND MX Component OPEN POP3 16 Description The abbreviation for Address Resolution Protocol This protocol is used to obtain the MAC address of Ethernet from an IP address A memory in an intelligent function module where data such as setting values and monitoring values exchanged with a CPU module are stored An address that indicates the storage location of data assigned to the buffer memory in an intelligent function module The abbreviation for ZP BUFRCV The abbreviation for Z BUFRCVS The abbreviation for ZP BUFSND Another term for the L series serial co
22. o NE a Fixed Buffer Edge Detect v Scan Completed J alo ol EE O a _ l IN IS gt IE FE PE a 0 EE M a EE a EE EE o EE M a E o N 0 EE M a OO EE O a EE M EN EE M a OO EE O a a Clear Check End Cancel 1 Do not set the same interrupt SI numbers as those to be set for an interrupt of other communications using a fixed buffer or the RECV instruction Input Format The input format of each data is decimal number only Device Code Select a device code Select Fixed Buffer in this setting Fixed Buffer Set the connection number of the fixed buffer to trigger the y Channel No Connection No 1 to 16 on interrupt program ie Set the interrupt control number for the E71 for when an interrupt y Interrupt SI No E 4 0 to 15 2 request is issued from the E71 to the CPU module a o O Point Interrupt SI numbers can be assigned by the user to receive up to 16 communications using a fixed buffer and communications using the RECV instruction in an interrupt program The user must manage the interrupt Sl numbers assigned for receiving data weJBod 1dnJ1ajur ue Buisn ueym Bulnes JajaweJled V S 131 12 6 Data Format Communication data consists of a header and application data 12 6 1 Header The header for TCP IP or UDP IP is used Because an E71 automatically adds and deletes a header the user setting is not requi
23. 0000 00198 2004 10 15 03 21 25 LI71E71 100 Peon Man block eh eit 00197 2004 10 15 03 21 04 LJ71E71 100 00193 2004 10 15 03 07 10 LJ71E71 100 Error and Solution Intelligent Module Information 00088 2004 07 14 02 48 01 LI71E71 100 00087 2004 07 14 02 47 31 LIV1E71 100 00086 2004 07 14 02 47 01 LI71E71 100 00085 2004 07 14 02 46 31 LI71E71 100 4 connection could not be established during the 00084 2004 07 14 02 46 02 LI71E71 100 open processing of a TCP connection 00083 2004 07 14 02 45 32 LJ71E71 100 00082 2004 07 14 02 45 02 LT71E71 100 00081 2004 07 14 02 44 32 LJ71E71 100 00080 2004 07 14 02 44 03 LJ71E71 100 00079 2004 07 14 02 43 33 LIV1E71 100 Check the operation of the external device 00078 2004 07 14 02 43 03 LJ71E71 100 Check the open processing of the external device PIA Correct the open settings of the communication 00077 2004 07 14 02 42 33 LJ71E71 100 parameters 00076 2004 07 14 02 42 04 LJ71E71 100 Review the Ethernet module s port number and the 00075 2004 07 14 02 41 34 LJ71E71 100 IP address port number and open system of the 00074 2004 07 14 02 41 04 LJ71E71 100 00073 2004 07 14 02 40 34 LJ71E71 100 Clear History Create CSY File Close Explanation Solution 234 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16 4 Checking the LEDs The following describes how to troubleshoot the problem by checking the LEDs Point The on off status of the INIT LED OPEN LED ERR LED and COM ERR LED can be a
24. 10 97 24 2 10 97 24 3 10 97 24 1 overlapped MAC address MAC address MAC address MAC address 00 26 92 89 2E 89 00 26 92 45 16 CC 00 1A 4D 5D 5D D8 00 26 92 DE 26 90 1 Checking the IP address already in use The following two methods are available e Checking buffer memory areas e Checking using the Ethernet diagnostics a Checking buffer memory areas Both the station already connected to the network and the station with the same IP address station connected to the network later and the MAC addresses of the stations with the same IP address can be checked The destination IP address can be checked only in the station with the same IP address station connected to the network later Buffer memory Buffer memory area Description address 234 EA The third and fourth octets of the IP H Destination IP address stored in the station with the same IP address address connected to the network later The first and second octets of the IP 235 EBy address 21121 5281 The fifth and sixth octets of the MAC The MAC address of the station that has been address already connected to the network stored in the 21122 5282 The third and fourth octets of the MAC station with the same IP address connected to H address the network later 21123 52834 The first and second octets of the MAC IP address status address storage area g 21124 5284n The fifth and sixth octets of the MAC The MAC address of the station with the sa
25. 50094 to 506Fy ystem area O o o O O O L I I I I I x 45 Address Programming Decimal Application Initial value tool setting Hexadecimal applicability Remote password mismatch notification accumulated 20592 count designation For user open port 4 z 50704 0 No designation i e 1 or higher Notification accumulated count Remote password mismatch notification accumulated count designation For auto open UDP port MELSOFT 20593 application transmission port TCP UDP and FTP 2 x H 5071 y transmission port e 0 No designation e 1 or higher Notification accumulated count 20594 Accumulated count of unlock process i 0H x 507214 normal completion 20595 Accumulated count of unlock process 0 y 50734 abnormal end a 20596 Connection Accumulated count of lock process 0 x 507414 No 1 normal completion n 20597 Accumulated count of lock process 0 xy 5075 abnormal end a x Remote 20598 password Accumulated count of lock process 5076 Monitoring area function based on close 20599 to 20603 monitoring E P E i 2 aus 50774 to 507By area onnection No e bit configuration is the same as Connection No O C tion No 3 The bit fi tion is th C tion No 1 507C to 50804 onnection No 3 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 20609 to 20613 5081 to 50854 Connection No 4 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 H H 20614 to 20618 5086 to 508A y Connection No 5 The bit configur
26. 94 USIMJSQ S8DUSIOVIG LL ZL 119 12 2 Communication Structure This section describes the structure of communications using a fixed buffer 1 Data flow In communications using a fixed buffer data is sent received using dedicated instructions e Sending data BUFSND instruction e Receiving data BUFRCV instruction or BUFRCVS instruction When the Procedure Exist control method is used the CPU module and the connected device communicate on a 1 1 basis The CPU module sends receives data to from the connected device while handshaking with the connected device When the No Procedure control method is used the CPU module sends receives data to from the connected device in a non procedural manner E71 Fixed buffer BUFRCV instruction BUFSND instruction isa Comnected device 2 Connected devices where data communications can be performed Data communications can be performed with the following connected devices e Devices in Ethernet where an E71 is connected e Devices connected with the router relay function When using each fixed buffer numbers 1 to 16 as shown in the figure below set the destination devices and usage conditions e g for sending receiving and Procedure Exist No Procedure in the open setting to fix a connected device to each buffer Fixed buffer No 1 To send data to the connected device 1 Fixed buffer No 2 Fixed buffer No 3 Fixed buffer No 16 To send data to the connected
27. AJSAMP and location e Create a form and a program Use the toolbox Button to create the sample window shown below Form1 vb and create a program referring to the sample program e On the Build menu click Build Solution to create an execution file AJSAMP EXE e Exit the Visual Basic NET e Execute the AJSAMP EXE 000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 Window example Form 1 vb ECER Object name rran aa Eee Button1 Connects the station with the E71 IIIIII o EM commandsend Button2 Sends the A compatible 1E frame command SS O E E EE reading in units of words O TA Button3 Cut off the line Button5 St CN o a Button4 Ends the program Checks the connection status MP i o1seg ensiA USUAA z 6 Xipueddy Bo ajduwes 6 xipuaddy pesn SI LAN y 9PIS Paj9auuoy ay UO We 353 Sample program Form 1 vb Option Strict Off Option Explicit ON Imports System Imports System Text Imports System Net Friend Class Form1 Inherits System Windows Forms Form FRegion Windows Form Designer generated code Public Sub New MyBase New If m_vb6FormDefinstance Is Nothing Then If m_InitializingDeflnstance Then m_vb6FormDefinstance Me Else Try For the start up form the first instance created is the default instance If System Reflection Assembly GetExecutingAssembly EntryPoint DeclaringType Is Me GetType Then m_vb6FormDefinstance Me Endlf
28. CODE CODF y 274 Data were sent without the initial process completed Action e Set the parameters with the programming tool and write them to the CPU module Then perform communications with the connected device e Wait for normal completion of the initial process before performing communications with the connected device The number of blocks exceeded the range e Correct the specified value for the number of blocks The subcommand value is incorrect e Correct the specified value for the subcommand A response to the PING test could not be received within the time of the communication time check The IP address and host name of the Ethernet module for the PING test are incorrect System error The OS detected an error System error The OS detected an error Data could not be received within the specified arrival monitoring time System error The OS detected an error e Correct the IP address and host name of the Ethernet module where the PING test is executed e Enable the Ethernet module where the PING test is executed to perform communications Complete the initial process e Correct the IP address and host name of the Ethernet module to perform the PING test e Follow the procedure below 1 Check if the Ethernet module the power supply module and the CPU module are properly connected 2 Check if the operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specificati
29. Catch End Try End If End If This call is required by the Windows form designer InitializeComponent End Sub 394 APPENDICES Form overrides dispose to clean up the component list Protected Overloads Overrides Sub Dispose ByVal Disposing As Boolean If Disposing Then If Not components Is Nothing Then components Dispose End If End If MyBase Dispose Disposing End Sub Required by the Windows Form Designer Private components As System ComponentModel IContainer Public WithEvents Command5 As System Windows Forms Button Public WithEvents Command4 As System Windows Forms Button Public WithEvents Command3 As System Windows Forms Button Public WithEvents Command2 As System Windows Forms Button Public WithEvents Command As System Windows Forms Button Dim Ajsock As Sockets Socket Private State As Boolean False NOTE The following procedure is required by the Windows Form Designer It can be modified using the Windows Form Designer Do not modify it using the code editor lt System Diagnostics DebuggerStep Through gt Private Sub InitializeComponent Me Command5 New System Windows Forms Button Me Command4 New System Windows Forms Button Me Command3 New System Windows Forms Button Me Command2 New System Windows Forms Button Me Command1 New System Windows Forms Button Me SuspendLayout Commando Me Command5 BackColor System Drawing SystemColors Control Me Command5 Cursor System Windows Forms
30. Check and correct the text or requested data length of the Qn header Then send the data to the Ethernet module again To write data to the remote I O station using the MC protocol with a QnA compatible 3E frame or 4E frame select Enable Write at RUN time in the Ethernet operation setting Read write data without the device memory set for extension Device memory can be extended only in an Ethernet module connected station and a Q QnACPU via CC Link IE Controller Network MELSECNET H or MELSECNET 10 Correct the number of device points for data read write and send the data to the Ethernet module again Check whether the data can be requested to the target programmable controller CPU Correct the request details and send it to the Ethernet module again For example change the subcommand Correct the request details Correct the network number or PC number Correct the read write request details Set the Station No lt gt IP information in the Ethernet module Change the conversion method for the CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H and MELSECNET 10 relay communication parameters Finish all the communications to perform the termination process of the Ethernet module Check if the relay station connected station is operating normally If the communication is alive no action for this error is required Check if there is an error with the cable connection between the own stat
31. Check if the IP address of the DNS server is correct Check if the mail server names SMTP server names and POP server names are correct C17Ay An error was returned from the DNS server Check with the network administrator if the DNS function of the server specified in the DNS setting is properly operating Check if the IP address of the DNS server is correct Check if the mail server names SMTP server names and POP server names are correct C17By An error was returned from the DNS server Check with the network administrator if the DNS function of the server specified in the DNS setting is properly operating 285 Error code Error description Action e Check if the IP address of the DNS server is correct e Check if the mail server names SMTP server names and POP server names are correct C17Cy An error was returned from the DNS server l ie l e Check with the network administrator if the DNS function of the server specified in the DNS setting is properly operating e Check if the IP address of the DNS server is correct e Check if the mail server names SMTP server names and POP server names are correct C17Dy An error was returned from the DNS server l us e Check with the network administrator if the DNS function of the server specified in the DNS setting is properly operating e Check if the IP address of the DNS server is correct e Check if the mail server names SMTP server names and POP serv
32. O m 205 c Timing chart The E71 performs the following process according to the timing of cancel request Protocol execution status E71 i address 54C0 operations at cancel request 0 Unexecuted No process 1 Waiting for transmission The E71 cancels the sending and terminates the dedicated instruction forcibly 2 Sending The E71 terminates the dedicated instruction forcibly at sending completion 3 Waiting for data reception The E71 cancels the receiving and terminates the dedicated instruction forcibly 4 Receiving The E71 terminates the dedicated instruction forcibly at receiving completion Completas The E71 terminates the dedicated instruction when protocols are executed consecutively The followings describe the operations of protocol cancellation according to the timing e When the cancel request is performed before sending when 1 Waiting for transmission is set in Protocol execution status address 54C0 ECPRTCL instruction Completion device es l l The device turns on Completion device 1 upon abnormal end Connection No n Protocol cancellation specification 54D3H when the value of n is 1 N 1 Cancellation request 4 2 Cancel completed The E71 does not send a send packet to the connected device Cancel even when a receive data or a protocol exists Send packet Connected device Send packet Waiting time to send E71 206 CHAPTER 15 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS
33. OFF gt ON of the close command Point Do not perform a open close process using I O signals and using the dedicated instruction together for the same connection Doing so will result in malfunction a O N U O 2 O 0 m 4 Errors If a dedicated instruction ends with an error Completion device D1 1 turns on and the error code is stored in Completion status S2 1 197 5 Program example The following shows a sample program that closes the connection number 1 when the I O signals of the E71 are X Y00 to X Y1F M 0 JPF M160 M160 M110 SSES MGA M6000 m a M6001 M6001 MO ZP CLOSE M200 M210 M200 M201 SET M202 J SET M203 RST M210 RST M110 198 CHAPTER 15 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 15 7 GPECPRTCL This instruction executes the protocols registered in the flash ROM of the E71 using the predefined protocol support function of GX Works2 Command epecerte E Available device ngex Constant register Others 4 Internal device Link direct device Intelligent Setting data File l system user T JDO function module oe Word 0 EE pa pap fpe Bit Word device UO GO AI IO A gm po po oO gt o o po poo 1 The file registers set for each local device and program cannot be used 1 Setting data Setting data Description Set by Data type Start I O number of the E71 00 to FEy The first two digits of the three
34. Page 264 Section 16 7 3 330 APPENDICES 2 When the communication type is Receive Only The receive process completes when the data received from a connected device match the receive packet expected packet If they do not match the data are discarded Receive data 1 Not patched Receive packet expected packet Connected Receive data 2 device Discarded Sixteen receive packets Header can be specified Received The operation image of Receive Only is as follows a When the instruction ends normally ECPRTCL instruction Completion device Completion device 1 E71 Receive data The receive data matched the receive packet expected packet Connected device Receive data 0920 0 1d Jo ad uonesiunuuOo9 yoea jo BHew vonelado xipueddy 020 0 4 pauljepalg JO siNjonyS ejeg pue shew vonelado g xipuaddy 331 332 b When the instruction ends abnormally timeout error 1 An error has ECPRTCL instruction x occurred Completion device S Y E7 i The device Completion device 1 abnormal end t waiting time to receive or the time specified by the destination alive check timer mM _ A jc E71 The receive data A did not match the A receive packet expected packet Connected device Receive data Receive data When the receive packet expected packet is not matched to the data by the waiting time to r
35. Physical address 2680H 9856 2681H 9857 1H 1 2682H 9858 9AH BCH 2H 2 2689H 9865 a words 3E7FH 15999 17FFH 6143 e Response format from the E71 to the connected device Subheader End code 162 CHAPTER 13 COMMUNICATIONS USING A RANDOM ACCESS BUFFER b Communications using an ASCII code e Command format from the connected device to the E71 Subheader Start address Data length E gt AL AH gt L 36H 32H 30H 30H OOH OOH OOH OOH OOH OOH OOH 41H K Text 20 words H L H H DL H L 31H 32H 33H 34H 35H 36H 37H 38H 39H 41H 42H 43H ES 39H 41H 42H 43H LS k Y as Y a hd A Y ASCII binary conversion Random access buffer Physical address H L Logical address 2680H 9856 OH 0 lt 2681H 9857 56H 78H 1H 1 A 2682H 9858 9AH BCH 2H 2 4 2689H 9865 9H 9 lt 10 words 3E7FH 15999 17FFH 6143 e Response format from the E71 to the connected device EWIOS Eed VEL Subheader End code 45H 32H 30H 30H sewo asuodsa pue puewwo jo sajdwexy3 y EL 163 2 Reading data from a random access buffer upon a read request from a connected device a Communications using a binary code e Command format from the connected device to the E71 Subheader Start address Data length A L H L mm IE OOH 14H OOH OAH OOH e
36. X Output relay Y Internal relay M Data Storage Area Latch relay L Specification Link relay B Data register D Link register W e File register File register R ZR e Buffer memory G device G Send receive area for predefined protocol support function address 4800 to 4FFF 1 Do not set local devices 2 Set within the device range specified in the Device window of PLC Parameter The following describes the configuration of the data storage area a When Fixed Length Variable Length is Fixed Length An area starting from the device number which is specified in the Element Setting window is considered as the data storage area The data storage area to be occupied varies depending on the setting of Unit of Stored Data e When Lower Byte Upper Byte is selected the same size as the data length is occupied However when the data length of a send packet is an odd number the upper byte lower byte for Byte Swap of the last device is not sent When the data length of a receive packet is an odd number the last data is stored with one byte of 00 e When Lower Bytes Only is selected twice the size of the data length is occupied Word Specified device Send a Data storage area NN packet Send packet The user stores the send data Receive packet The E71 stores the receive data Receive Ml Data storage area Ml packet Data storage area 104 CHAPTER 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USI
37. correct the program Send a command to the E71 e Check if the correct IP address was specified in the command If not correct the IP address and send the command again e Check if the communication protocol TCP IP or UDP IP matches with that of the connected device If not correct it Use the same communication protocol TCP IP or UDP IP as that of the connected device If the data code settings do not match data cannot be sent or received because the connected device cannot normally decode commands Use the same setting of Communication Data Code in the Ethernet operation setting as that of the connected device 237 Page 66 Section 7 1 3 Check the end and error codes to correct the error Correct the command format Check the checkbox next to Enable Online Change in the Ethernet operation setting Check and correct the error 4 If the connection of only the connected device is closed due to cable disconnection personal computer restart or other reasons reopen the connection using the same port used before the error occurred The E71 does not close a connection if it receives an Active open request again from the connected device with a different IP address or a port number 2 If the communication data code setting is different between the E71 and the connected device error codes that are not found in the error code list may be returned to the connected device When receiving data with different data codes
38. e When the cancel request is performed before sending completion when 2 Sending is set in Protocol execution status address 54C0y and the sending has not been completed ECPRTCL instruction Completion device A i i The device turns on Completion device 1 i upon abnormal end Connection No n Protocol cancellation specification 54D3H when the value of n is 1 1 Cancel request 2 Cancel completed Waiting time to send D t TCP ULP timer Send packet Packet sending in progress is completed without interruption Send packet e When the cancel request is performed at sending completion E71 I l L I LI A I LI LI The E71 does not send a send packet to the connected device even when a receive data or a protocol exists Connected device Cancel when 2 Sending is set in Protocol execution status address 54C0y and the sending has been completed ECPRTCL instruction Completion device a N U m O V A O i The device i turns on upon Completion device 1 abnormal end Connection No n Protocol cancellation specification 54D3H when the value of n is 1 2 Cancel completed 1 Cancellation request t TCP ULP timer Waiting time to send Send packet Send packet E71 K o eee The E71 does not send a send packet to the connected Cancel device even when a receive data
39. gt Project Edit Compile View Online Debug Diagnos 4PM 4 tH lt gt 4 FS sFS F6 sho E F F9 s Navigation Project farsa Parameter Intelligent Function Module Global Device Comment Program Setting POU B Program MAIN B Local Device Comment e Device Memory Device Initial Value 444444444 Connection Destination Unlabeled Pages describing instructions are organized as shown below The following illustration is for explanation purpose only and should not be referred to as an actual documentation Instruction name Execution condition of the instruction O Structure of the instruction art contac 82 SEIS al da ES in the ladder mode Intelligent Setting data aan a a 7 device A device with O IS UDIGO applicable to the instruction Local devices and file registers set for each program cannot be used T C D W ST SD and SW can be used When the target station is a Universal model QCPU or a Basic model QCPU a digit specified bit device can be used Ex K4M16 When using digit specification the following conditions must be satisfied Device number should be a multiple of 16 10 4 Number of digits points should be 4 K4 Descriptions Setting side of setting data Description User A device value is set by the user and data type 254 Network spooled in A O Module During Othe Statin System A device value is set o
40. l BUFSND instruction Po px E completion device fo k 1 scan l manan l l l BUFSND instruction completion device 1 gt ACK ACK E TCP only TCP only oO 09 Response Confirm the normal completion of the initial process Initial normal completion signal X19 ON Establish a connection between the E71 and the connected device and confirm the normal completion of the open process of the connection number 1 Execute the BUFSND instruction The data is sent The send data in the fixed buffer number 1 is sent to the connected device by the send data length When the connected device receives the data from the E71 the connected device sends a response to the E71 When the E71 receives the response from the connected device the E71 stops sending data If a response is not sent within the response monitoring timer value a data send error occurs 1 After the data send process abnormally ends execute the BUFSND instruction again to repeat the send process 1 Refer to the section describing the initial setting when adjusting the monitoring timer value _7 Page 301 Appendix 4 1 Point O The items configured in the open setting become enabled when Open completion signal of an E71 is started up O Do not send data command before data communications are completed or a response is received in response to the previous data commana O When an E71 communicates data with multiple connect
41. memory Was the BUFRCV instruction executed Was the BUFRCV instruction completed normally Was the BUFRCVS instruction executed Is the control data of the BUFRCVS instruction correct Has an open or initial error occurred in the error log area Action If the amount of the actually received data is smaller than the receive data length receive the remaining data If it is larger than the receive data length receive the excess data as the next request message or discard it e Open the connection with the connected device e Check if the open close processes for I O signals and the OPEN CLOSE instructions are not used together for the same connection If so correct the program e Read Open error code address 124 7C in the communication status storage area Then check the error details and correct the error Check and correct the IP address of the connected device Use the same communication protocol TCP IP or UDP IP as that of the connected device Data was not sent from the connected device Check the connected device on the sending side and correct the error e Correct the execution conditions of the BUFRCV instruction e Check if the send receive processes for I O signals and the BUFSND BUFRCYV instructions are not used together for the same connection If so correct the program Check the error code in the BUFSND instruction completion status area and correct the error e Correct the interrupt settin
42. using the alive check function the following processes are performed e The corresponding connection will be forcibly closed The line is disconnected Open the connection using a user program again e Open completion signal is turned off and the error code C035 is stored in the open error code storage area Exj Assuming that the values are set so that the number of retries may be three the E71 performs an alive check at the timing shown in the figure below an example of alive check using the PING commana Connection Open completion signal forced close address 5000H error code CO35H 188 The last Rive check Alive check Alive check RST sending communications Alive check resent resent TCP only eu 2nd time 3rd time i Interval timer Interval timer Interval timer Interval timer Starting interval value for alive value for alive value for alive value for alive timer for alive check check ofthe check ofthe checkofthe check of the of the target device target device target device target device target device g 8 it 1 1 The values of the number of retries and timers can be changed in the initial setting gt Page 301 Appendix 4 1 CHAPTER 15 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS CHAPTER 15 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Dedicated instructions facilitate programming for using intelligent function modules This chapter describes dedicated instructions that can be used in the E71 1 5 1 Li
43. x x Aowa yng S E S9ssaJppe JOU19Uuu JONG JO ISI ZSE 41 Address Decimal Hexadecimal 376 and 377 178 and 179p 378 and 379 17Ay and 17By 380 and 381 17C y and 17D 382 to 407 17Ey to 1974 408 and 409 1984 and 1994 410 and 411 19A y and 19B yy 412 and 413 19Cy and 19D 414 and 415 19E and 19F y 416 and 417 1A04 and 1A1 y 418 and 419 142y and 1A3y 420 and 421 1A4 and 1A5 422 to 439 1A6 to 1B7 y 440 and 441 1B8 and 1B9 442 and 443 1BAy and 1BBy 444 and 445 1BCy and 1BD 446 to 471 1BE to 1D7 472 and 473 1D8y and 1D9 474 and 475 1DAj and 1DB 476 and 477 1DCy and 1DDy 478 to 481 1DE y to 1E1 482 to 511 1E2 to 1FFy 42 Application Error log area Status for each protocol ICMP TCP UDP System area Received IP packet count Received IP packet count discarded due to sumcheck error Sent IP packet total count System area Received ICMP packet count Received ICMP packet count discarded due to sum check error Sent ICMP packet total count Echo request total count of received ICMP packets Echo reply total count of sent ICMP packets Echo request total count of sent ICMP packets Echo reply total count of received ICMP packets System area Received TCP packet count Received TCP packet count discarded due to sum check error Sent TCP packet total
44. 1 ol Stores the data read from the fixed buffer data area starting from to Receive data System the smallest address D1 n 4 Functions e This instruction reads the receive data for fixed buffer communications of the connection specified by S1 for the module specified by Un CPU module E71 Receive data length Fixed buffer data area BUFRCV CHAPTER 15 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS e Completion of the BUFRCV instruction can be checked with Completion device D2 0 and D2 1 Item Description Turns on at the END process of the scan where the BUFRCV instruction is completed and Completion device D2 0 turns off at the next END process Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the BUFRCV instruction e Normal completion Stays off and does not change Completion device D2 1 l e Abnormal end Turns on at the END process of the scan where the BUFRCV instruction is completed and turns off at the next END process Operation while the BUFRCV instruction is being executed END END END Program Scan process Scan process Scan process perece Completion device Vo BUFRCV instruction po gn gs ee y Abnormally ended Completion device 1 I I L l L L l I I I l L L r I Receiving data WA Storing the receive data e The ZP BUFRCV instruction is executed on the rising edge OFF gt ON of the read command bit for a connection with the connected device set in Fixed b
45. 24 8 Data sending receiving using the Web function The system administrator can monitor a CPU module in a remote location via the Internet using a Web browser For details refer to the following MELSEC Q L Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Web function A PAP HTTP MC protocol mn a header command message OE ie BE MC protocol HTTP response message header Exxx AAA E71 Web server Connected device C Web browser Display of C requests ASP _ results Communication library CHAPTER 2 PART NAMES CHAPTER 2 PART NAMES This chapter describes the E71 parts LJ71E71 100 RUN INIT OPEN ERR COM ERR 10BASE T 100BASE TX SPEED 7 1 1 No Name O Application 1 A lever to fix modules Te Indicates operating status RUN In normal operation OFF An error has occurred gt Page 235 Section 16 4 1 Indicates initial process status INIT Normal completion OFF Not processed Indicates open process status 2 OPEN An open process normally completed connection open OFF An open process normally completed no connection Indicates hardware failure status ERR N A hardware failure has occurred OFF Normal i Indicates whether a communication failure has occurred COM ERR 2 N A communication failure has occurred 2_ gt Page 235 Section 16 4 2 iD OFF Normal communications in progress 20 3 26 fo Indicates a transmissio
46. 3959 Paj9auuoy OU UO We 347 Perform receiving size check and receiving processing simultaneously rbuf_idx 0 Receive data storage head index initialization recv_ size 0 Initialize the number of receive data while 1 length recv socketno char 8r_buf rbuf_idx BUF_SIZE rbuf_idx 0 Response data receiving if length 0 ls connection cut off Sockerror ERROR_RECEIVE Error handling return SOCK_NG if length SOCKET _ERROR nErrorStatus WSAGetLastError if nErrorStatus WSAEWOULDBLOCK Sockerror ERROR_RECEIVE Error handling return SOCK_NG else continue Repeat until messages are received else rbuf_idx length Update the receive data storage position recv_size length if recv_size gt RECV_ANS 1 Update the number of receive data Have all response messages been received break Stop repeating as messages have been received r_buf rbuf_idx 0 Set NULL at the end of receive data printf n receive data n s n r_buf strecpy char s_buf O1FFOOOA4420000000000500 DO to D4 batch read request 1E frame strcpy char s_buf SOOOOOFFO3FFO00018000A04010000D 0000000005 DO to D4 batch read request 3E frame length strlen char s_buf if send socketno char s_buf length 0 SOCKET ERROR Data sending Sockerror ERROR_SEND Error handling re
47. 56 54 Overal System Configuratio ao 2 idos raro 56 92 NetWork COMPONE MS tepen e o o e A 57 53 Applicable Systems dni A E A ii 59 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 60 6 1 MRE EE a T E ase bl al rta ta 8 dene 60 62 WINING 2 apareciera caes ea ia ada 61 CHAPTER 7 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE 63 7 1 Setting Parameters Required for Communications o o oo concerns 64 Pov Parameterlists dais tad A AA tee 64 PAZ Basie SCUINGss causas dadas ra aan RA a dad RARA 65 Tio Etlhemet Operation SON moco ia CRA O AAA AA A Ai 66 LAA ORS SCHING 0 2 80 46 dadas a Eds 68 fe TCOPIP Communications centeno vols Oh ee bok ea See ee eee 71 EZ Establishing a conne ction sier enera a AAA AA Lach are ea cade A 71 faze Communication POCOS ic ia Aaa be ee 72 1 23 Active open procedure a 14 2d Passive pen proced le sica Aste cannes a Sot tk Ain eee athe Arie See se a Eo ease E 76 7 3 UDP IP GOmMuUnIGAHONS erer sab a y A e td o Ss 78 72331 COMMUNICATION PFOCOSS 0 AAA eee A wes 78 Taz ODEN procedures 2 42063 jars ido iis ea 79 CHAPTER 8 CONNECTING MELSOFT PRODUCTS AND A GOT 81 821 ePXDPIIG AVON So as e a do a o sas eee 81 8 2 Data Communication Procedure 82 CHAPTER 9 MC PROTOCOL COMMUNICATIONS 84 OU AP CATO lt a otk aaaea eE a eyes iow occas Syne ateo de ht 84 9 2 Communication Structure ee eee eee 85 9 3 Data Communication Procedure 00 ee eee eee ee ee 86 g
48. 62H gt Command response flag For command 0 For response 1 a When reading Subheader Subheader Command from the connected device to the E71 Response from the E71 to the connected device b7 to bO b7 to bO Oo 1353110 00 0 7 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 71 Communications using 61H OOH EH a binary code m y Subheader Subheader b7 to bO b7 to bO 0 1 1 Oe OG 0 0 1 1 1 1 oO Oy 0 0 1 NO a OD OW an ASCII code n 2 5 O D D Q D 159 3 Start address Use a logical address to set the start address of a random access buffer that reads writes data 2 gt Page 166 Section 13 6 a Communications using a binary code Specify the start address using a binary value XX y 2 bytes b Communications using an ASCII code Specify the start address using an ASCII code value expressed in hexadecimal r S y 4 bytes 4 Data length setting Set the number of words of the read written data in the random access buffer range a Communications using a binary code Specify the number of words using a binary value Maximum of 1017 words e E r ie a 2 bytes b Communications using an ASCII code Specify the number of words using an ASCII code value expressed in hexadecimal Maximum of 508 words r Xo gt 4 bytes 160 CHAPTER 13 COMMUNICATIONS USING A RANDOM ACCESS BUFFER 5 Text Text is a data written to and read from a random access buffer
49. AJ71E71 B2 and AJ71E71 B5 software versions S and later are required 2 The PING test cannot be executed on the own station a Applications By specifying the execution station and the target station the PING test can be executed from a remote device b Operating procedure Use the following procedure 1 Clickthe emete button in the Ethernet Module No fistModule y 10 oo Cou acma d DEC HEX CDEC HEX Diagnostics window Parameter Status Error History Status of Each Connection Status of Each Protocol LED Status Received E mail Information Send E mail Information Ethernet Diagnostics r Module Information al or Cot om DO Diagnostics gt Ethernet Diagnostics gt IP Address 192 168 3 40 Ethernet adress 0800 7081 F254 Target Module Setting under Module No Auto Open UDP 1388 Port 1891 ONId L S xIpuaddy 199Yy9 Ssn e s aun G xipuaddy Network No i Station No 1 Group No 1 PING Test Loop Test COM ERR Off 315 2 Configure the settings and click the _ Execute PING Test as button Specify the number of times EX i 3 Click the TE button MELSOFT Application 4 The test results are displayed 2 PING Test Specify the number of times Zi me SUCCESS SUCCESS SUCCESS SUCCESS Packets transmitted 4 Received 4 Lost 0 c Action for abnormal end If the test fails take the same action a
50. Cursors Default Me Command5 ForeColor System Drawing SystemColors ControlT ext Me Command5 Location New System Drawing Point 64 152 Me Command5 Name Commando Me Command5 RightToLeft System Windows Forms RightToLeft No Me Command5 Size New System Drawing Size 72 32 Me Commandb Tabindex 4 Me Command5 Text Connection status o1seg ensiA USUAA z 6 Xipueddy Bog ajduwes 6 xipuaddy pesn SI LAN y 9PIS Paj9auuoy ay UO We Command4 355 356 Me Command4 BackColor System Drawing SystemColors Control Me Command4 Cursor System Windows Forms Cursors Default Me Command4 ForeColor System Drawing SystemColors ControlText Me Command4 Location New System Drawing Point 144 152 Me Command4 Name Command4 Me Command4 RightToLeft System Windows Forms RightToLeft No Me Command4 Size New System Drawing Size 73 32 Me Command4 TabIndex 3 Me Command4 Text Close Command3 Me Command3 BackColor System Drawing SystemColors Control Me Command3 Cursor System Windows Forms Cursors Default Me Command3 ForeColor System Drawing SystemColors ControlText Me Command3 Location New System Drawing Point 64 96 Me Command3 Name Command3 Me Command3 RightToLeft System Windows Forms RightToLeft No Me Command3 Size New System Drawing Size 152 33 Me Command3 TabIndex 2 Me Command3 Text disconnect Command2 Me Command2 BackColor System Drawing SystemColors Control Me Comman
51. EEC If the initial process is not normally completed correct the set values of parameters listed in Chapter 7 and those in the initial process setting parameter described in this chapter After correcting the parameters write them to the CPU module again power off and on the CPU module or reset the CPU module Appendix 4 1 Setting the initial process Configure the setting in the initial setting window Each setting time is calculated by setting value X 500ms KO Project window gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt Ethernet CC IE Field gt Select Ethernet under Network Type gt button n a Network Parameter Ethernet Initial Setting Module No 1 Seles Timer Setting Module will operate with default values if setting is left blank po Setting Value Default value In Unit Tepe Timer fx 500m TCP Zero Window Timer 20 8 500s TePResendTimer 20 x500 ms Ter end timer 500s IP Assembly Timer 10 8 500s Response Monitoring Timer 60 8 500s Dest Confirmation Start Interval 1200 8 500ms Dest Confirmation Interval 20 8 500s SS 9O0ld Jen y xipuaddy ssaxoJd jeu ay Huas y xipueddy Dest Confirmation Resend 3ffmes DAS Setting Input Format DEC ETET Address of DNS Server1 Eoo Ip Address of DNS Server of DNS Serverz EAEN IP Address of DNS Servers of DNS Servers IF IP Address of DNS Server4 of DNS Servert End Cancel
52. Eror Hiit The HOME of errors and their details such AS me error code and information about the connection where the error has occurred is displayed Status of Each Connection The status of each connection such as error codes and the open setting is displayed Information such as the total number of data sending receiving times for each protocol Status of Each Protocol is displayed LED Status The operation mode and the LED status of the E71 are displayed Received E mail Information Received mail information and the error log are displayed Send E mail Information Sent mail information and the error log are displayed PING Test button The PING Test window is displayed Loop Test button The Loopback Test window is displayed COM ERR Off button The COM ERR LED is turned off lt _ gt Page 293 Section 16 10 rm For each window and detailed explanations refer to the following LEI Operating manual for the programming tool used 00000000000 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 290 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16 9 Checking the Status of the E71 with the System Monitor Open the system monitor window of a programming tool to check the LED status connection status and operating status of the E71 1 Open the System Monitor window O Diagnostics gt System Monitor 2 Select the module to diagnose in the Main Block field in the upper left of the window Then click the Hw Informati
53. Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the C206y System error The OS detected an error CPU module 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual for each module Ifthe actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative C207 y The file name has too many characters e Name the file with 255 characters or less C300 A response could not be received within the response e Check the operation of the connected device monitoring timer value e Correct the response monitoring timer value e Check that Predefined protocol ready X1D has turned on before executing the ECPRTCL instruction e Execute the ECPRTCL instruction after rewriting the C4004 Protocol not ready error protocol setting data to the Ethernet module e If an error still occurs even after rewriting replace the module e Correct the specified protocol number and execute the protocol again C401 y Protocol unregistered error E i e Register the corresponding protocol to the specified protocol number C4024 Protocol setting data error e Correct the protocol setting data and register it again e Do not execute dedicated instructions which do not support simultaneous execution C4034 Simultaneous dedicated instructions execution error r l e Correct the specified connection number and execute the dedicated instruction again
54. Hardware Design Reflect the parameter settings by turning off and on the CPU module or resetting the CPU module Maintenance and Inspection Initial process The initial process of the E71 is automatically performed Open process Page 71 Section 7 2 E Page 78 Section 7 3 The open process is to establish a connection with a connected device Ea Data communications using y each function Close process 23 Page 71 Section 7 2 The close process is to disconnect cancel the connection with the Page 78 Section 7 3 connected device established by the open process 63 1 1 Setting Parameters Required for Communications This section describes how to set parameters to communicate between the E71 and connected devices 7 1 1 Parameter list The following table lists parameters set through a programming tool Network Type Start I O No Network No Basic setting Configure settings to use the E71 as a network module Page 65 Section 7 1 2 Station No Configure the settings such as an IP address to Operation Setting Page 66 Section 7 1 3 connect the E71 to Ethernet Initial Setting Set a data communication timer value Page 301 Appendix 4 1 Page 68 Section 7 1 4 Open Setting Configure connection settings Parameter setting of each function Configure settings to communicate with connected Network Router Relay Parameter devices on Ethernet via a router and a gateway Parameter Conf
55. IP address of the error connected device is stored For errors below the TCP IP or Port No m UDP IP level 0 is stored The number of occurrences of the corresponding status of each protocol is stored When the 1784 to 1FF Sarena protocol H H count value by the E71 exceeds two words the count stops at FFFFFFFFy 4294967295 4 The error information is continued to be stored into the following areas even if the count of the errors is stopped e Error log write pointer storage area e Error log block 2 An error log block area consists of 16 error log blocks that have the same data order Point Values stored in the buffer memory are cleared when an E71 connected station is powered on or reset They are not cleared during the initial process Although this area does not normally need to be read read it when necessary for maintenance or other purposes 201 6 Protocol setting data check area address 5320 to 533F p The following table lists the details of the protocol setting data check area Buffer memory name Address Protocol No 53244 Setting type 9325 Protocol setting data error information Packet No 53264 Element No 33274 Number of registered 5328 protocols 292 Description When an error is detected in the protocol setting data the protocol No where an error has been detected is stored The protocols are checked from the lowest protocol No and the first protocol No where an er
56. Non conversion Variable is out of the Length calculating range or when there is no Length element except for when Non conversion Variable is placed at the end of the packet elements e Multiple Non conversion Variable elements are placed in the Length calculating range while a Length element is not placed e A Non conversion Variable element is placed before a Length element in the Length calculating range SJUSW F JOHIEd E LL 105 4 Non verified Reception Element Setting Non verified Reception Receive Element Marne Data Length lo Setting Range to 2046 0 Variable Cancel This element is used when receive data include unnecessary data The E71 skips characters as many as the specified number if a receive packet includes a Non verified Reception The following table lists the items Element Name Set name of the element O Variable number of Set this item when the number of characters not to characters be verified varies in each communication Data Length 1 to 2046 Specified number S Set the number of characters not to be verified of characters Poi oint O Multiple Non verified Reception elements can be placed in a packet O When Data Length is set to O and the configuration is set as follows an error occurs e An element other than Static Data is placed behind a Non verified Reception element when Non verified Reception is out of the Length calculating range or when there is no Length
57. RUN e Not selected Disable TCP Existence Confirmation i S e Use the KeepAlive Select an alive check method in TCP IP communications Setting e Use the Ping 1 The IEEE802 3 frame format can be used only when the connected device is compatible with the frame Generally using the Ethernet frame is recommended Send Frame Setting 66 CHAPTER 7 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE 1 Initial Timing This setting configures the open timing of the connection where TCP Passive open or UDP has been selected under Open System in the open setting gt Page 68 Section 7 1 4 a Do not wait for OPEN Communications impossible at STOP time Connections are opened or closed using a program Communications cannot be performed while the switch on the CPU module is set to STOP b Always wait for OPEN Communication possible at STOP time Connections always wait for the open status according to the Open System parameter This eliminates the need to open close connections using a program Communications can be performed while the switch on the CPU module is set to STOP 1 If the program of the CPU module on the own station closes a connection the station does not enter the OPEN request wait status after the connection is disconnected Point When remotely controlling the CPU module from a connected device select Always wait for OPEN Communication possible at STOP time If Do not wait for OPEN Communications impossible at S
58. S1 2 S1 3 Initial error 0000y 0000y Initial error code address 694 Open error code for a connection with the Open error 0001 yy to 00104 00004 connected device address 7Cy 86 e Completion of the ERRRD instruction can be checked with Completion device D1 0 and D1 1 Item Description Turns on at the END process of the scan where the ERRRD instruction is completed and Completion device D1 0 turns off at the next END process Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the ERRRD instruction e Normal completion Stays off and does not change e Abnormal end Turns on at the END process of the scan where the ERRRD instruction is completed and turns off at the next END process Completion device D1 1 Operation while the ERRRD instruction is being executed END END END Program __scan__ process Scan process Scan process ERRRD instruction Executed i Completion device Abnormally ended Completion device 1 error information Y Reading the p e The ZP ERRRD instruction is executed on the rising edge OFF ON of the read command 224 CHAPTER 15 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 4 Errors If a dedicated instruction ends with an error Completion device D1 1 turns on and the error code is stored in Completion status S1 1 5 Program example The following shows a sample program that reads the open error code of the connection number 1 when the I O signals
59. Station 2 1 Station 2 2 Station 3 1 Station 3 2 Connected device request source LCPU LCPU LCPU LCPU LCPU LCPU Station A x Station B x Station C x Station D O 4 The station A can access the stations marked with after the remote password unlock process is completed for 1 of the station 1 1 and can access the stations marked with O when the communication lines are open The station B can access the stations marked with O when the communication lines are open The station C can access the stations marked with after the remote password unlock process is completed for 1 of the station 2 2 and can access the stations marked with O when the communication lines are open The station D can access the stations marked with O after the remote password unlock process is completed for 1 of the station 3 2 and can access the stations marked with O when the communication lines are open Point To disable access from the connected devices to other stations through CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H and MELSECNET 10 relay communication functions select MELSOFT Application Transmission port UDP IP Dedicated Instruction CC Link IE NET10 H Relay Transmission Port in the remote password setting of the relay station or a station to be accessed 178 CHAPTER 14 OTHER FUNCTIONS 14 3 4 Differences in functions according to the remote password check status enabled disabled The following table
60. Straight cable A Category 3 4 or 5 straight cable or cross cable is usable Cross cable Connector RJ45 connector Hub 10Mbps hub Up to four levels of cascade connection can be configured 1 This applies when a repeater hub is used For the number of levels that can be constructed when a switching hub is used consult with the manufacturer of the switching hub used 2 Data can be communicated with an E71 between LJ71E71 100 modules In addition an E71 can be directly connected to a GOT rm Consult a network specialist for required devices CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 5 3 Applicable Systems This section describes MELSEC L series systems that include an E71 1 Applicable CPU modules and the number of connectable modules An E71 can be connected to an LCPU with an serial number first five digits of 14112 or later For the number of connectable modules refer to the following MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 2 Applicable software GX Works2 is required for setting and diagnosing an E71 GX Developer cannot be used Software Version GX Works2 1 95Z or later sw s s ajqeolddy s 99 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING This chapter describes installation and wiring of the E71 6 1 Installation This section describes installation of the E71 1 Installation method For the module installation environment and position refer to the followi
61. When Open completion signal is on e When Predefined protocol is set to Fixed Buffer Communication in the open setting If the protocol is executed to the connection where the above conditions are not satisfied the ECPRTCL instruction ends abnormally 98 CHAPTER 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING THE PREDEFINED PROTOCOL 11 2 Communication Type of Protocols Receive and send packets from to the connected device for the process execution are registered in a protocol Packet elements set using the predefined protocol support function correspond to the data part of the send receive packets The following shows an example of packet configuration For details on the packet elements refer to Page 336 Appendix 8 3 1 TCP IP Maximum data length 1514 bytes Header Destination Sender s MAC Type IP TCP MAC address address 2 GA 20 b fae 20b le Data 6 bytes 6 bytes y y y Ethernet header TCP IP header 40 to 1500 bytes 2 UDP IP Maximum data length 1514 bytes Header 6 bytes 6 bytes Ethernet header UDP IP header 28 to 1500 bytes Communications with the connected device using the predefined protocol function are performed with the following procedure communication types For the operations of each communication type refer to Page 329 Appendix 8 1 Communication type name Description Send Only Sends a send packet once Receive Only Receives a packet if it matches any of up to 16 defined receive packe
62. address 5000H b0 0 BUFRCV instruction BUFRCV instruction completion device BUFRCV instruction completion device 1 p Fixed buffer reception status signal A Address 5005H b0 ACK TCP only Receiving data Confirm the normal completion of the initial process Initial normal completion signal X19 ON Establish a connection between the E71 and the connected device and confirm the normal completion of the open process of the connection number 1 Receive data from the connected device e Fixed buffer reception status signal address 50054 b0 ON Execute the BUFRCV instruction to read the receive data length and receive data from the fixed buffer number 1 e Fixed buffer reception status signal address 50054 b0 OFF End the receive process If the data receive process is abnormally ended execute the BUFRCV instruction again to repeat the receive process Point O The items configured in the open setting become enabled when Open completion signal of an E71 is started up O When the buffer memory area that stores Fixed buffer reception status signal is turned off and on execute the BUFRCV instruction O When abnormal data is received Fixed buffer reception status signal does not turn on In addition data is not stored in the fixed buffer number 1 area 126 CHAPTER 12 COMMUNICATIONS USING A FIXED BUFFER 12 4 2 Data receiving using an interrupt program BUFRCVS instruction A re
63. allowed to use 4 Only A compatible 1E frame commands can be used for data communications To perform data communications using a command other than the A compatible 1E frame commands create a new program e Program for an AJ71E71 S3 and AJ71E71N in the own station Because the assignment of the buffer memory areas for an E71 is different from that for an AJ71E71 S3 and AJ71E71N a program for the AJ71E71 S3 and AJ71E71N cannot be used for an E71 Create a new program by referring to chapters that explain each function e Program using an I O signal Programs cannot be used together with parameter settings on the programming tool sa npouul sa119s y yUD WO SIDUSISHIQ XIpuaddy SalJ93S JOUIO JO SANPON J9UISUYIJ WO SAQUAJSHI XIpuaddy 327 320 b QE71 N Program of connected devices Programs of the connected devices for a QE71 N can be used for communications with the E71 except for the following programs e Program for file operation related commands e Program to access the data link system A QCPU Q Mode cannot be connected to MELSECNET Il However because the response speed of an E71 is different from that of a QE71 N the program may not be used as is Before using the same program check the operation Program for a QE71 N in the own station When using a program for the initial process and the termination process do not write the parameters of the E71 network parameters set on the programming tool
64. as Error log block 1 O Error log block 8 The bit confi tion is th Error log block 1 1244 to 12Cy rror log block 8 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 oe Error log block 9 The bit confi tion is th Error log block 1 12D to 135 rror log block 9 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 id Error log block 10 The bit confi tion is th Error log block 1 136 to 13E rror log bloc The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 e Error log block 11 The bit confi tion is th Error log block 1 13F to 147p rror log bloc The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 ae Error log block 12 The bit confi tion is th Error log block 1 1484 to 1504 rror log bloc The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 AE Error log block 13 The bit confi tion is th Error log block 1 1514 to 1594 rror log bloc The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 o Error log block 14 The bit confi tion is th Error log block 1 15Ay to 1624 rror log bloc The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 arene Error log block 15 The bit confi tion is th Error log block 1 1634 to 16B y rror log bloc The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Pd Error log block 16 The bit confi tion is th Error log block 1 16Cy to 174 rror log bloc The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 373 to 375 aa 1754 to 177p RIRA o O O O o O O I I I I TI TI I
65. backup and fail safe function are systematically or automatically provided outside of the PRODUCT for the case of any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT 2 The PRODUCT has been designed and manufactured for the purpose of being used in general industries MITSUBISHI SHALL HAVE NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY AND ALL RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY TORT PRODUCT LIABILITY FOR ANY INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY CAUSED BY the PRODUCT THAT ARE OPERATED OR USED IN APPLICATION NOT INTENDED OR EXCLUDED BY INSTRUCTIONS PRECAUTIONS OR WARNING CONTAINED IN MITSUBISHI S USER INSTRUCTION AND OR SAFETY MANUALS TECHNICAL BULLETINS AND GUIDELINES FOR the PRODUCT Prohibited Application Prohibited Applications include but not limited to the use of the PRODUCT in e Nuclear Power Plants and any other power plants operated by Power companies and or any other cases in which the public could be affected if any problem or fault occurs in the PRODUCT e Railway companies or Public service purposes and or any other cases in which establishment of a special quality assurance system is required by the Purchaser or End User e Aircraft or Aerospace Medical applications Train equipment transport equipment such as Elevator and Escalator Incineration and Fuel devices Vehicles Manned transportation Equipment for Recreation and Amusement and Safety devic
66. between the CPU module and 0060 the Ethernet module exceeded the CPU monitoring timer Increase the CPU monitoring timer value value oe e After unlocking the remote password using the MC e In communications using a fixed buffer the remote os os protocol perform communications using a fixed buffer 00634 password of the port for the destination Ethernet module os a e Exclude ports used for communications using a fixed is in the lock status buffer from the targets of the remote password check 0OAO This request cannot be specified in connection with the e Correct the request details E connected device e Correct the open setting e Check and correct the text length or request data length of Contents of the request cannot be analyzed because the 00A1y the Qn header Then send data to the Ethernet module text length or request data length is too short again 00A2y This request cannot be processed e Correct the request details and command 3E8 to e Refer to the troubleshooting section of the user s manual H AFFF Errors detected by a programmable controller CPU hardware design maintenance and inspection for the j CPU module used and take corrective action 7000 to Errors detected by a module such as a serial e Refer to a manual such as a serial communication module 7FFFy communication module user s manual and take corrective action B000y to e Refer to the CC Link System Master Local Module User s Errors detected by a CC Link mod
67. connected device and send the correct value e Check the situation of the line such as noise the distance between the line and power cable and the grounding of each device e Check the operation of the connected device e Check if the cable is disconnected e Check the operation of the connected device e Check if the cable is disconnected e Check the operation of the connected device e Check if the cable is disconnected e Check the operation of the connected device e Check if the cable is disconnected e Check the operation of the connected device e Check if the cable is disconnected e Check the operation of the connected device e Because there may be congestion of packets on the line send data after a certain period of time e Check if the cable is disconnected e If an alive check timeout occurs correct the IP assembly timer value of the connected device e Check the operation of the connected device e Because there may be congestion of packets on the line send data after a certain period of time e Check if the cable is disconnected e If an alive check timeout occurs correct the IP assembly timer value of the connected device e Check the operation of the connected device Because there may be congestion of packets on the line send data after a certain period of time e Check if the cable is disconnected e Correct the IP assembly timer value and perform the initial process again e Send the sam
68. connected e Connection to the Ethernet network e Parameter settings written in the CPU module e Operating status of the CPU module whether or not an error has occurred e IP address of the destination E71 specified using the PING command 1891 ONId L S xIpuaddy 199y9 sn e s aul G xipuaddy 317 Appendix 5 2 Loopback test This section describes the loopback test 1 Performing a test using a programming tool This test is to check whether the initial process for each module has been completed The test is executed on the network of stations connected to the programming tool and loopback test messages are sent sequentially to each E71 on the network and in the station number range specified for the loopback test request designation Programming Stations connected tool to the programming tool LJ Station No 1 Station No 3 Station No 5 Station No 7 Station No 9 ya EP al Network No 1 PEE ES A E AE E EE ERE EE ES a E E The loopback test is executed A A from the station No 1 through the station No 5 on the network Station No 2 Station No 4 Station No 6 Station No 8 No 1 4 Because the QJ71E71 100 of function version A and QnA A series modules do not have a function for responding to this request the test results cannot be checked a Applications The test can be executed only by specifying the network number for the test and target station number range Point For the E71 connected stat
69. continually therefore use them only when needed b System areas A system area is an area used by a system Point Do not write any data to the system area Doing so may cause malfunction of the programmable controller system 34 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 9 2 List of buffer memory addresses The following table lists the buffer memory addresses of an E71 Address Programming Decimal Application Initial value tool setting Hexadecimal applicability O and 1 04 and 14 Own station E71 IP address C00001FE y O H H 2 and 3 2 and 3p System area Special function settings Router relay function b5 b4 e 00 Do not use e 01 Use Conversion system setting for CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 relay function b7 b6 4 e 00 Automatic response system 4 3 e 01 IP address computation system 0100 O e 10 Table exchange system e 11 Use together system FTP function setting b9 b8 e 00 Do not use e 01 Use Bits other than those described above are reserved for system use 5 to 10 a ystem area 54 to Ay 11 TCP ULP timer value 3Cy O By Initial process Setting time setting value x 500 ms 60 arameter settin 12 one 9 TCP zero window timer value 144 O Cy Setting time setting value x 500 ms 20 13 TCP resend timer value 144 Dy Setting time setting value x 500 ms 20 14 TCP end timer value 28H O Ep Setting time setting value x
70. count System area Received UDP packet count Received UDP packet count discarded due to sum check error Sent UDP packet total count System area Initial value an I IL O I T x O I I O I I IL O I T O L I Programming tool setting applicability x Address Decimal Hexadecimal 512 and 513 2004 and 201p 514 and 515 2024 and 203 516 204p 517 and 518 2054 and 206p 519 and 520 2074 and 208p 521 to 524 2094 to 20C 525 to 528 20D to 2104 529 to 532 2114 to 2144 533 to 536 215 to 218p 537 to 540 2194 to 21Cp 541 to 544 21D to 2204 545 to 548 2214 to 224 549 2254 550 to 551 226 and 227 552 228 553 and 554 2294 to 22A y 555 and 556 22By to 22Cy 557 and 558 22Dy to 22Ey 559 to 564 22F to 234p to 931 to 936 3A3 to 3A8 937 and 938 3A9 and 3AAp 939 to 943 3ABy to 3AF y Application Router relay parameter setting area Station No lt gt IP information setting area CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Initial value Sub net mask Default router IP address Number of registered routers Sub net address Router 1 Router IP address O I Router 2 The bit configuration is the same as Router 1 Router 3 The bit configuration is the same as Router 1 Router 4 The bit configuration is the same as Router 1 Router 5 The bit configuration is t
71. criada es Data receiving using an interrupt program Data receiving using the main program Data transmission Speed o o ooooooo Dedicated instruction o oo ooo Default router IP addressS DEVICS diari he A be he eed dob s Differences from Ethernet modules of other series sca Ad io OS E E oR atten de o Seok nal canes op Seen Mca ence 324 Differences in functions according to the remote password check status enabled disabled 179 DIN TAMANO sorna ani EEA 26 Display Ulla sta o ddr 237 ON Santa a aa oa ados 16 Do not wait for OPEN Communications impossible at STO PIM tual dorks thd dar 67 E A O TA 16 E71 connected station ooo oo 16 EGPRTCE iio caco e 189 E mail function 0 0 0000 ooo 30 Enable online Change o oooo ooo 66 ENOCOJES taa ee aaa ee 259 ERRGUR mes riu haces knee nent aw ese Rade ore AO A 189 Erorcode ISC aaa ode E 249 ERRRD alii ate aura E 189 Ethernet diagnostics oo ooo o o 290 Ethernet operation setting 66 External dimension diagram 361 File transfer FTP server function 30 Fixed DUNE tias we aida da 129 Fixed buffer communication 129 A A E as Gea eee 16 Fullpassive aaa che dp iaa dls dida 76 General specifications 21 GRECGPRTO Lo naa edo Sie ees 199 GOUD NO sg eke a ad a o E OSA ak 65 GX Developer
72. describes the structure of communications using a random access buffer 1 Data flow The data flow in communications using a random access buffer is as follows The FROM TO instructions or intelligent function module devices are used to access a random access buffer from a CPU module E71 Writing data sen __ nese access Read request Connected Using the FROM TO instructions or an intelligent function module device Point Communications can be performed only with connected devices where communications using a fixed buffer in the Procedure Exist control method are set using the connection with Open completion signal of an E71 on O Communications are performed asynchronously with the program If synchronization is required use communications using a fixed buffer 2 Connected devices where data communications can be performed Data communications can be performed with the following connected devices e Devices in Ethernet where an E71 is connected e Devices connected using the router relay function 154 CHAPTER 13 COMMUNICATIONS USING A RANDOM ACCESS BUFFER 1 3 2 1 How data is read from a connected device The following figure shows how an E71 sends data in response to a read request sent from a connected device we Ai OCA SJ DO ooo 9 Read request command ACK TCP only CPU gt E access O using neem the TO instruction ACK TCP only Connected device Write
73. device 28 Comnected device 28 Note the following points when changing connected devices e During TCP IP communications a connected device can be changed only when the connection with the connected device is not established when Open completion signal is off e During UDP IP communications a connected device can be changed regardless of the status of connection with the connected device 120 CHAPTER 12 COMMUNICATIONS USING A FIXED BUFFER Point O When changing connected devices do not use the pairing open or alive check function O When No Procedure is selected for a connection the connection is dedicated to No Procedure communications using a fixed buffer after the open process is completed When Procedure Exist is selected for a connection the following data communications can be performed after the open process is completed e MC protocol communications e Communications using a fixed buffer using the Procedure Exist control method e Communications using a random access buffer 3 Processes during data sending receiving a When data is sent When a CPU module executes the BUFSND instruction the E71 sends data of the applicable fixed buffer number n to the connected device that is specified in Communication address setting area addresses 284 to SF corresponding to the fixed buffer number n b When data is received An E71 processes the data that is received from the connected device set in the co
74. digit I O number BIN 16 bit n1 Connection number 1 to 16 User San vi BIN 16 bit Device name S Start number of the device that stores control data User system Device name The start number of the bit device in the own station that Un BIN 16 bit a N U m O V A O n2 Number of consecutive protocol executions 1 to 8 D turns on for one scan upon completion of the instruction System Bit D 1 also turns on if the instruction ends abnormally 199 200 2 Control data Device item Setting data Setting range Set by S 0 S 1 S 2 S 3 S 4 S 5 S 6 S 7 S 8 S 9 S 10 S 11 Execution count result Completion status Execution protocol number specification 1 Execution protocol number specification 2 Execution protocol number specification 3 Execution protocol number specification 4 Execution protocol number specification 5 Execution protocol number specification 6 Execution protocol number specification 7 Execution protocol number specification 8 Matched receive packet No 1 Matched receive packet No 2 Stores the number of protocols which are executed by using the ECPRTCL instruction Protocols with errors are included in the count When settings of the setting data or control data 0 1to8 System contain an error 0 is stored Stores the status at completion When multiple protoco
75. e Reads bit devices in 16 or 32 point units e Reads word devices in 1 or 2 word units 0001 Specifies a device number in 1 point units to write a value to a bit device Discrete Device device numbers can be used Write Random 1402 e Specifies a device number in 16 point units to write a value to a bit device 0000 Discrete device numbers can be used e Specifies a device number in 1 or 2 word units to write a value to a word device Discrete device numbers can be used Entry Monitor Device 0801 0000 Registers a device to be read by Execute Monitor command 0802 R th f th i ist Entry Monitor Devi tt 0802 0000 eads the value of the device registered by Entry Monitor Device command 0801 Read Block 0406 0000 Species n points 1 point 16 bits or word or bit devices as one block and reads multiple blocks of data Discrete device numbers can be used Write Block 1406 0000 ls n points 1 poini 16 bits o word or bit devices as one block and writes multiple blocks of data Discrete device numbers can be used 0613 0000 Reads buffer memory data of the E71 Memory 1613 0000 Writes data to the buffer memory of the E71 0601 0000 Reads buffer memory data of the intelligent function module Extend Unit 1601 0000 Writes data to the buffer memory of the intelligent function module 1001 0000 Executes remote RUN to the CPU module where an E71 is connected Remote Stop 1002 0000 Executes remote STOP to the CPU module where an E71 is connected Remote
76. e The ECPRTCL instruction ends abnormally and Protocol cancel request error error code C404 is stored in Completion status S 1 e When cancel request is executed to the nth protocol while multiple protocols are being executed consecutively the E71 terminates the nth protocol forcibly and the following protocols are not executed The following table lists the control data that are stored when protocols are canceled The number of protocols executed including canceled protocols S 0 Execution count result When cancel request is executed to the second protocol 2 is stored S 1 Completion status Protocol cancel request error error code C4044 Matched receive packet number of the executed S 10 to S 17 Matched receive packet No 1 to 8 ercloca Operations of the E71 e Ifthe cancel request is executed when any protocol is not being executed the E71 completes the cancel without any process Point O f any data is received from the connected device after the protocol whose communication type includes receiving is canceled the data will be discarded O The E71 checks whether any cancel request exists at periodic processing For this reason it may take some time to process the cancellation after the cancel request is executed O When Protocol cancellation specification address 54D3H Connection No 1 is 1 Cancellation request the next ECPRTCL instruction cannot be executed a N A y m O U JD
77. following is an outline of how to compile a program created using Microsoft Corporation Visual C NET e Start Visual C NET e Create a project From File gt New gt Project select NET in Project Types and Empty Project in Templates and set the project name e g AJSAMP and location e Create a source file Open Solution Explorer Then right click Source Files and select Add gt Add New Item Set the file name e g AJSAMP cpp and location and create a program according to the program example e From the project setting window get WSOCK32 LIB linked Open Solution Explorer Then right click the project name AJSAMP and select Properties gt Configuration Properties gt Linker gt Command Line Type WSOCK32 LIB in Additional Options and press the OK button e On the Build menu click Build Solution to create an execution file AJSAMP EXE e Exit Visual C NET e Execute AJSAMP EXE O The following is an outline of how to implement a socket routine call Start Socket created socket Bind bina Passive open Active open UDP Open listen connect accept Communications send recv sendto recvfrom Sending reception disabled shutdown Close closesocket Completed 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000900 344 APPENDICES AAA AA A A EA E ARO Sample program program name AJSAMP CPP pe ad This program is a sample program to
78. have been received Set NULL at the end of receive data Processing to disable sending receiving Error handling Close processing Error handling Connection completion flag off Release Winsock DLL 349 JensiA USUAA 16 xipuaddy pesn SI LAN y OPIS 3959 Paj9auuoy ay UO We Bo ajduwes 6 xipuaddy void Sockerror int error_kind Error handling function if error_kind ERROR_INITIAL printf Initial processing is abnormal else nErrorStatus WSAGetLastError switch error_kind case ERROR_SOCKET printf Failed to create socket break case ERROR_BIND printf Failed to bind break case ERROR_CONNECT printf Failed to establish connection break case ERROR_SEND printf Sending failed break case ERROR_RECEIVE printf Receiving failed break case ERROR_SHUTDOWN printf Failed to shutdown break case ERROR_CLOSE printf Failed to close normally break printf Error code is d n nErrorStatus if Closeflag FLAG_ ON nErrorStatus shutdown socketno 2 Shutdown processing nErrorStatus closesocket socketno Close processing Closeflag FLAG_OFF Connection completion flag off printf Press any key to exit the program n Dmykeyin getchar Wait for a Key input WSACleanup Release Winsock DLL return 350 APPENDICES Appendix 9 2 When Visual Basic NET is used This section descr
79. hub is used consult with the manufacturer of the switching hub used 2 Data can be communicated with an E71 between LJ71E71 100 modules In addition an E71 can be directly connected to a GOT Point During high speed communications 100Mbps using 100BASE TX connection a communication error may occur due to high frequency noise from devices other than a programmable controller in a given installation environment The following lists countermeasures to be taken on the E71 side to avoid high frequency noise influence sjuauodulo YIOMION Z S O Wiring connection e Do not bundle the cable with the main circuit or power cable or do not place it near those lines Put the cable in a duct O Communication method Use TCP IP for data communications with connected devices e Increase the number of retries of communications if needed O 10Mbps communications e Use a 10Mbps hub for the E71 and set the data transmission speed to 10Mbps e Change the transmission speed of the E71 to 10Mbps using the UINI instruction gt Page 226 Section 15 13 rm IO Consult a network specialist for required devices 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000900 Of 08 2 10BASE T connection To configure a system for 1OBASE T connection use devices that meet the IEEE 802 3 10BASE T standards Unshielded twisted pair cable UTP or shielded twisted pair cable STP 2 Configuration device Description
80. is 1 to 32 1 Available only when the Data Length is 4 bytes 101 Ssjuauua 7 1998 d LL Point O Multiple Length elements can be placed in a packet O When there is no element other than a Length element an element error occurs To use a Length element one or more element s other than Length is are required O When the number of digits of calculation result is greater than that specified in Data Length digits greater than the specified digit are omitted ignored Ex When the Data Length is 2 bytes and the calculation result is 123 bytes the data length is considered as 23 O When a Non conversion Variable Variable length or Non verified Reception Variable number of characters is placed behind a Length and is not included in the Length calculating range place Static Data immediate after the Non conversion Variable or Non verified Reception O When Code Type is ASCII Hexadecimal a corresponding packet is regarded as a mismatch packet if a string except for 0 to 9 A to F and a to f is received O When sending data converted to ASCII characters use 0 to 9 or A to F O When multiple Length elements are placed the calculating range cannot be set as follows e A Length calculating range overlaps the others e The calculating range of a Length is greater than that of the Length placed before Length element cannot be placed at the end of the packet elements 102 CHAPTE
81. l S Station 1 1 Station 1 2 Station 2 1 Station 2 2 Station 3 1 Station 3 2 D reques A a LCPU LCPU LCPU LCPU LCPU LCPU ia source 9 9 Station A O 2 Station B O j Station C O Station D O 4 The station A can access the stations marked with O after the remote password unlock process is completed for 1 of the station 1 1 It can access the stations marked with O when the communication lines are open Stations B C and D can access the stations marked with O when the communication lines are open 177 When a remote password and the remote password check have been set in multiple LCPU stations Station 1 2 1 Station A LCPU E71 E71 Ethernet Station B Programming tool Ethernet Network No 2 Network No 3 A cru E71 Station 2 1 1 Station 2 2 2 Station 3 1 1 LCPU E71 a Station C E71 The unlock lock process can be performed for the following connected devices e 1 of the station 1 1 By the station A only e 1 of the station 2 2 By the station C only e 1 of the station 3 2 By the station D only O Stations that can be accessed from the connected device after the remote password unlock process O Stations that can be accessed from the connected device without performing the remote password unlock process x Stations that cannot be accessed from the connected device Target programmable controller station request destination Station 1 1 Station 1 2
82. module Ifthe actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Follow the procedure below 1 Check if the Ethernet module the power supply module and the CPU module are properly connected 2 Check if the operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the C1174 System error The OS detected an error CPU module 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual for each module If the actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Follow the procedure below 1 Check if the Ethernet module the power supply module and the CPU module are properly connected 2 Check if the operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the C1184 System error The OS detected an error CPU module 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual for each module If the actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Read Mail information storage area address 2682 of SP SPO9 10113 2 94 C1194 There is no received mail the buffer memory and read received e mails remaining on the server e Check that the e mail is not compressed or encrypted e Check if the e mail specifications such as
83. modules such as the C24 and E71 or programmable controllers connected to MC protocol supporting modules from external devices The abbreviation for a MELSECNET 10 network system The abbreviation for a MELSECNET H network system A generic term for the QJ72LP25 25 QU72LP25G and QJ72BR15 The abbreviation for ZP MRECV The abbreviation for ZP MSEND The abbreviation for MX Component SWOD5C ACT E or later The abbreviation for ZP OPEN The abbreviation for Post Office Protocol Ver 3 This protocol is used to transfer e mails from a mail server to a local computer Term Predefined protocol support function Programming tool READ RECV RECVS REQ SEND SLMP SMTP SREAD Subnet mask SWRITE UINI WRITE ZNRD ZNWR Description A function of GX Works2 This function sets protocols appropriate to each external device and reads writes protocol setting data from to the flash ROM of the E771 Another term for GX Works2 The abbreviation for JP READ and GP READ The abbreviation for JP RECV and GP RECV The abbreviation for Z RECVS The abbreviation for J RREQ JPR REQ GREQ and GP REQ The abbreviation for JP SEND and GP SEND The abbreviation for Seamless Message Protocol This protocol is used to access an SLMP compatible device or a programmable controller connected to an SLMP compatible device from an external device The abbreviation for Simple Mail Transfer Protocol This protocol is used to transfer e mails over
84. number of abnormal ends of the dedicated instruction MSEND is stored e 0 The MSEND instruction has not been executed or no executions have resulted in abnormal end e 1 or more The cumulative number of abnormal ends of the MSEND instruction The cumulative number of sent e mails forwarded by the E71 to the send mail server is stored e 0 No mail has been sent e 1 or more The number of normal completions of mail sending The cumulative number of e mails with an attachment sent by the E71 is stored e 0 No e mail with an attachment has been sent e 1 or more The number of normal sending of e mails with an attachment The cumulative number of e mails sent by the E71 to the send mail server is stored e 0 No e mail has been sent to the server e 1 or more The cumulative number of sending e mails to the server The cumulative number of communication errors returned in response to send requests to the send mail server is stored e 0 No communication error between servers or no e mail sent e 1 or more The cumulative number of communication errors The cumulative number of registrations in the send error log block area is stored e O No error or no inquiry to the server e 1 or more The cumulative number of writes to the error log block area The number of the error log block where the latest send error log is registered is stored e 0 No error no registration of sending error log e 1 or more The number of the error log
85. occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual O 2013 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION 366 WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instr
86. of the initial and open processes The initial process and the connection open process need to be completed 2 Send request from a CPU module A CPU module cannot issue send requests In addition reception completion in a CPU module is not confirmed When it is necessary to synchronize data sending receiving between the CPU module and the connected device use Communications using a fixed buffer 3 Random access buffer address The address specified by the connected device and the address specified using the FROM TO instructions are different For details refer to the physical and logical addresses of a random access buffer 2 gt Page 166 Section 13 6 13 6 Physical and Logical Addresses of a Random Access Buffer This section describes the start address of the E71 random access buffer without battery backup which is specified in commands Note that when designating the start address of a random access buffer the address specified by a connected device is different from that specified using the FROM TO instructions e Physical address Address specified with the FROM TO instructions of a program e Logical address Address specified by a connected device as the start address in the command Physical address Buffer memory areas 680H 1664 Fixed buffer 267FH 9855 2680H 9856 Logical address Random access buffer 3E7FH 15999 17FFH 6143 166 CHAPTER 13 COMMUNICATIONS USING A RANDOM ACCESS BUFFER
87. of the server in case of an error is stored IP address The time when the error occurred is stored in the BCD code Error log b15 to b8 b7 to bO block Month 01H to 12H Year 00H to 99H Last two digits of the year b15 to b8 b7 to bO Error time 510By to 510E Hour 00H to 23H Day 01H to 31H b15 to b8 b7 to bO A Second 00H to 59H Minute 00H to 59H b15 to b8 b7 to bO O Year OOH to 99H First two digits of the year Day of the week 0 to 6 oJ z 1 An error log block area consists of 16 error log blocks that have the same data order N 99 9 E mail status storage area address 5870y to 5FFF yy When the stored count exceeds FFFF y the count starts from Oy again The following table lists the details of the e mail status storage area The buffer memory addresses of the error log block are those of the error log block 1 For the addresses of the error log block 2 and later refer to the list of buffer memory addresses gt Page 35 Section 3 5 2 a Receive area Buffer memory name Number of mails remaining on the server Dedicated instruction normal completion count Dedicated instruction abnormal completion count Normal receiving count Attached file receiving count Server inquiry count Server communication error count Error log write count Receiving error log write pointer 256 Address 58704 58714 58724 58734 58744 58754 58764 58774 58784 Descr
88. or fixed buffer communications are not performed 1 For receiving e Destination existence confirmation b1 0 No confirm 1 Confirm e Pairing open b7 0 Disable Usage setting 1 Enable S2 2 As described in the left User area e Communication method protocol b8 0 TCP IP 1 UDP IP e Fixed buffer communication procedure b10 b9 00 Procedure exists 01 No procedure 9 a N U O 5 m Z 10 Predefined protocol e Open system b15 b14 00 Active open or UDP IP 10 Unpassive open 11 Fullpassive open Own station port l l 4014 to 13874 138By S2 3 Specify the port number of the own station User No to FFFEy 14 to FFFFFFFF y S2 4 Destination IP Specify the IP address of the connected device FFFFFFFF i User S2 5 address broadcast Destination port 14 to FFEFFy FFFF y S2 6 j Specify the port number of the connected device dd eek h User No broadcast S2 7 ee n Destination MAC S2 8 tae Specify the MAC address of the connected device 0000000000004 User S2 9 FFEFFFFFFFFF y 1 The range of 14 to 400 is available only in the E71 with the serial number first five digits of 15042 or later 193 3 Functions e This instruction performs the open process for a connection specified by S1 for the module specified by Un The setting value used for the open process is selected by S2 0 e Completion of the OPEN instruction can be checked with Completion device D1 0 and
89. process is performed on all the MELSOFT products connected to the network The E71 will wait for an Active open request to itself 39 nPp39014 UONE9IUNULUOD geq zg 83 CHAPTER 9 MC PROTOCOL COMMUNICATIONS Using MC protocol communications connected devices that can send and receive data in accordance with the MC protocol can access a CPU module Because an E71 processes and sends receives data based on commands from connected devices no programs for data communications are required on the programmable controller side For MC protocol communications refer to the following MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual 9 1 Applications of MC protocol communications are as follows 84 1 2 3 4 5 6 Applications Data read write Data can be read written from to a CPU module device and intelligent function module buffer memory This allows a connected device to monitor the CPU module operation perform data analysis and manage production control File read write Files such as a program and parameter stored in a CPU module can be read written This allows a connected device to manage CPU module files and switch execution programs Remote control of a CPU module The remote operation allows a connected device to remotely operate a CPU module Turning off the COM ERR LED The COM ERR LED on an E71 can be turned off from a connected device Remote password lock unlock A remote pa
90. properly or that Page 312 Appendix 5 communications are performed properly with the set parameters PING test loopback test y Continued to COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE _ gt Page 63 CHAPTER 7 54 CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURES BEFORE OPERATION Memo 99 CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 5 1 Overall System Configuration The following is a system configuration example of when using an E71 Display unit optional I O modules or Power supply module CPU module intelligent function modules END cover E m 56 CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 5 2 Network Components This section describes the devices used for Ethernet Connected device Point An E71 determines whether to use 100BASE TX or 10BASE T and the full duplex or half duplex transmission mode according to the hub For connection to a hub without the automatic negotiation function set the half duplex mode on the hub side 1 100BASE TX connection To configure a system for 100BASE TX connection use devices that meet the IEEE 802 3 100 BASE TX standards Configuration device Description Shielded twisted pair Straight cable A Category 5 or 5e cross cable is usable cable STP 2 A Category 5 or 5e cross cable is usable Connector RJ45 connector Hub 100Mbps hub Up to two levels of cascade connection can be configured 4 This applies when a repeater hub is used For the number of levels that can be constructed when a switching
91. routing parameter occurring The MELSOFT application transmission Disable the remote password setting and port UDP IP for the target E71 is locked No error with the remote password The target E71 is a function version A Check the module name and function Error code module version The Ethernet line is heavily loaded write the parameter to the CPU module including a case where an error equivalent When the Ethernet line is not heavily to the error codes CO30y and C0314 is loaded perform the test again No error Error exists occurring Point For an E71 where the loopback test failed check the error and take corrective action Then restart the E71 connected station Restarting the E71 executes the initial process To check whether the initial process has been completed in the E71 perform the PING test The PING test can be also performed on the Loopback Test window 320 APPENDICES 2 Performing a test using the MC protocol The loopback test can be also executed using MC protocol communications Note however that only the E71 in the own station can be used The test cannot be executed on E71 modules in other stations over the network For details refer to the following MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual Loopback test command sending station ER Ethernet z LCPU E71 LCPU E71 LCPU E71 Loopback test target station
92. status i i signal X19 OPEN instruction OPEN instruction completion device p wien OPEN instruction completion device 1 CLOSE instruction Cys 4 1 scan CLOSE instruction completion device i Abnormally CLOSE instruction i ended completion device 1 CA I Open completion signal Pa address 5000H AV CA Open request signal address 5002H I I I E Internal process O Internal process ED After parameter communications check that the initial process of the E71 is normally completed Initial normal completion signal X19 ON Start the open process using the OPEN instruction Open request signal address 5002 b0 ON The E71 performs the open process Internal process only Data communications are enabled when the open process is normally completed Start the close process using the CLOSE instruction Open request signal OFF The E71 performs the close process Internal process only When the close process is normally completed data communications terminate 80 CHAPTER 8 CONNECTING MELSOFT PRODUCTS AND A GOT CHAPTER 8 CONNECTING MELSOFT PRODUCTS AND A GOT This chapter describes the connection of the E71 with MELSOFT products such as a programming tool and MX Component and the GOT 9 1 Applications This section describes applications according to a connection type 1 Programming and monitoring over Ethernet In Ethernet a programming tool can cre
93. the Internet The abbreviation for JP SREAD and GP SREAD A number used to logically divide one network into multiple subnetworks and manage them easily The following Ethernet network systems can be configured e A small scale Ethernet network system in which multiple network devices are connected e A medium or large scale network system in which multiple small scale network systems are connected via routers or other network communication devices The abbreviation for JP SWRITE and GP SWRITE The abbreviation for ZP UINI The abbreviation for JP WRITE and GP WRITE The abbreviation for J ZNRD and JP ZNRD The abbreviation for J ZNWR and JP ZNWR 17 PACKING LIST The following items are included in the package of this product Before use check that all the items are included LJ71E71 100 LJ71E71 100 Before Using the Product 18 CHAPTER 1 FEATURES CHAPTER 1 FEATURES An Ethernet module hereafter abbreviated as E71 is an interface module on the programmable controller side for connecting a programmable controller system to the host system such as a personal computer and a workstation over Ethernet The module can collect and modify programmable controller data monitor and control CPU operating status and exchange data in TCP IP or UDP IP Internet Comnected device Comnected device aaa al
94. the connected device to perform data communications Command zP OPEN pa Available device 4 Internal device Link direct device Intelligent Index Setting data File l Constant system user JO O function module register Others register The file registers set for each local device and program cannot be used 1 Setting data Setting data Description Set by Data type UU Start I O number of the E71 00 to FEy The first two digits BIN 16 bit character of the three digit I O number User string Sn DT The start number of the bit device in the own station that D1 turns on for one scan upon completion of the instruction System Bit D1 1 also turns on if the instruction ends abnormally 192 CHAPTER 15 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 2 Control data Device Hem Setting data Setting range Set by To open a connection specify whether to use the parameter settings of a programming tool or to use the settings stored in the following control data starting from S2 2 00004 e 0000p Use the parameter settings of the 8000y Execution S2 0 type completion type User programming tool e 8000y Use the settings of control data starting from S2 2 to S2 9 Stores the status at completion Completion e 00004 Normal completion S2 1 System status e Values other than 00004 Abnormal end error code Specify the application of a connection e Usage of fixed buffer b0 0 For sending
95. the latest error log is registered Error log write pointer E4 y If the pointer value is 16 it means that the latest error log is registered in the error log block 16 area When the number of errors reaches 17 the error log is then registered in the error log block 1 area again 2 Error An error code indicating error details is stored The subheader code of the error message is code end stored in bits O to 7 of the corresponding area Bits 8 to 15 store 0 For errors below the code TCP IP or UDP IP level O is stored The command code of the error message or the values of the lower bytes of the request type and subrequest type of the data link instructions are stored EAy and EB e For errors below the IP level e When an error response was sent through the CPU module IP address ESy Command b15 to bO b15 to b8 b7 to bO O is stored in the following cases Error log e For messages not containing a command code block e For errors below the TCP IP or UDP IP level because their commands are unknown The number of the error connection is stored in bits O to 7 of the corresponding area Bits 8 No to 15 store 0 For errors below the TCP IP or UDP IP level O is stored m The port number of the error own station is stored For errors below the TCP IP or UDP IP a port No level O is stored d Destination Eos The IP address of the error connected device is stored 0 is stored in the following cases o Destination EC The
96. the network administrator if the DNS function of the server specified in the DNS setting is properly operating Check if the IP address of the DNS server is correct Check if the mail server names SMTP server names and POP server names are correct C1764 An error was returned from the DNS server Check with the network administrator if the DNS function of the server specified in the DNS setting is properly operating Check if the IP address of the DNS server is correct Check if the mail server names SMTP server names and POP server names are correct C1774 An error was returned from the DNS server Check with the network administrator if the DNS function of the server specified in the DNS setting is properly operating Check if the IP address of the DNS server is correct Check if the mail server names SMTP server names and POP server names are correct C1784 An error was returned from the DNS server Check with the network administrator if the DNS function SP SPO9 10113 2 94 of the server specified in the DNS setting is properly operating Check if the IP address of the DNS server is correct Check if the mail server names SMTP server names and POP server names are correct C1794 An error was returned from the DNS server Check with the network administrator if the DNS function of the server specified in the DNS setting is properly operating AJOW SW JONG y Ul P3J0 S SSPOd 10114 9L
97. to perform FTP communications and MELSOFT communications TCP IP UDP IP o When MELSOFT Connection has been selected in the open setting select the MELSOFT application communication port in System Connection MELSOFT connection is performed to the MELSOFT application communication port of the system connection not of the user connection If the MELSOFT application communication port is not selected in System Connection a window for a password does not appear Point When determining a remote password take care of the following e Avoid a simple character string e g Character string consisting of alphanumeric characters only e Combine alphanumeric characters and special characters e g and e Avoid using a character string that represents the user s name or the date of birth 183 sBuljes Jajaweleg 9 pl DJOMSSEd SJOWSY p 14 4 Hub Connection Status Monitor Function The current connection status and transmission speed of an E71 and a hub and the number of times that the E71 detected disconnection can be checked using the following buffer memory areas For details on buffer memory areas refer to the list of buffer memory addresses gt Page 35 Section 3 5 2 Buffer memory area Description Stores the current connection status and transmission speed Hub connection status area address 201 C9 y of an E71 and a hub Stores the number of times that the E71 detected
98. using a fixed buffer is used check whether the Has 14 been stored in Receive buffer full detection signal BUFRCV instruction is executed gt Page 124 Section 12 4 1 address 5240 e To receive data at shorter intervals than the scan time of the CPU module using a fixed buffer add the normally closed contact for the completion device of the BUFRCV instruction to the execution conditions of the BUFRCV instruction _ gt Page 152 Section 12 9 3 2 b If the packets cannot be received even though the number of received TCP Has the number in Received TCP packet count address packets has increased set the value of TCP Maximum Segment Transmission 1B8 and 1B9y increased setting area address 1Ey to 80004 Then perform the initial process again Page 301 Appendix 4 4 Availability depends on the version of the E71 _7 Page 300 Appendix 3 If the action above does not solve the problem perform the following tests on the E71 to check for hardware error e Hardware test lt gt Page 323 Appendix 6 2 e Self loopback test gt Page 322 Appendix 6 1 16 6 3 A dedicated instruction is not completed The following table lists how to troubleshoot the problem when a dedicated instruction is not completed Check item Action Set the network parameter mode to Online Is the network parameter mode set to Online L gt Page 65 Section 7 1 2 If a dedicated instruction is executed in the Offl
99. y System error The OS detected an error CPU module 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual for each module Ifthe actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative COCB Another send request was issued before the send process Wait for completion of transmission before sending the H has not been completed next send request e Follow the procedure below 1 Check if the Ethernet module the power supply module and the CPU module are properly connected 2 Check if the operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the COCC System error The OS detected an error CPU module 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual for each module If the actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Follow the procedure below 1 Check if the Ethernet module the power supply module and the CPU module are properly connected 2 Check if the operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the COCF System error The OS detected an error CPU module 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual for each module If the actions above do not solve the problem pl
100. 0 q_A2AA BLS M1001 A ee eee ele M1001 x19 MO M20 5 m MOVP HO D100 a A E MOVP H8000 D100 i i I MOVP HO D102 l I I I I I MOVP H1000 D103 l p 2 I DMOVP H0A6155DF D104 i l i I MOVP H2000 D106 I I e meee eee eee eee eee i al _ a ZP OPEN UO K1 D100 M100 id y O v m Z M100 M101 SET M110 M101 _ a SET M111 END 1 Necessary when the open setting of the programming tool is used In this case the program marked with 2 is unnecessary 2 Necessary when the open setting of the program is used In this case the program marked with 1 is unnecessary 195 15 6 ZP CLOSE This instruction disconnects closes a connection with the connected device performing data communications Command zciose f Available device Internal device Link direct device Intelligent Index Setting data File i Constant MEA user JO O function module onie Others St UU ET E E E register Bit Word device UO GO s J o o pa D1 ES LALA RA a A 1 The file registers set for each local device and program cannot be used 1 Setting data Setting data Description Set by Data type Tan Start I O number of the E71 00 to FEy The first two digits BIN 16 bit character n Un of the three digit l O number User string S1 Connection number 1 to 16 BIN 16 bit The start number of the bit device in the own station that D1 turns on for one scan upon completio
101. 000 cee ee ee ee ee 16 GX WOKS2 so wi eo ae ead ae wae oe ae ee 16 59 PANTESE untar aca Sout dete din rete aoc darte ate lala dade 65 Handing st a ia 62 Hardware test ias iso sra aida 323 o ed ake te ale ach 132 157 How to turn off the COM ERR LED 293 A os ae ane ae as SE Se OS ek 16 Hub connection status monitor function 184 EMP a Aaa Da 16 Initial process o ooooo ooo ee es 301 Initial tiMiNQ o o ooooooooooo 66 67 INPUT Macia dido 66 mstallalON gt ta ado ad be jas taa 60 Intelligent function module 16 Internal current consumption 5VDC 27 Interrupt pointer setting 130 Interrupt settings o o oooooooo 131 lees be ice as A A A 16 PadaresSys teta liada Wad he dk a Gs 66 IP address in use detection function 185 IP address setting o ooooooo o 66 Line status Ccheckosonal 312 List of buffer memory addresses 35 List of dedicated instructions 189 List of I O signals o n naana oF HSK A ee ees 32 LOCK PIOCESS ici a atada 175 Logical addresses madres aia ed 166 Loopback test o oooooooooooo 318 MAC address iia da 16 Maximum segment length 27 Maximum station to station distance maximum cable length 62 MC Protocol ivan aa 16 MC protocol communications 84 MELSECNET 10 0
102. 000 eee 155 13 2 2 How a connected device writes dala oooccooocccooen eee 155 13 3 Parameter o Std cn ara a ida E 156 tos Dala FO Mal is o o eee are A A a is ne 157 TODA SIC A A O NN 157 164 2 lt ADDIGAUON Cala ci e o tl di 158 13 4 3 Examples of command and response forMatS o oo ooocooonoo eee 162 13 5 Precautions when Creating Programs 0 ee eee ees 166 13 6 Physical and Logical Addresses of a Random Access Buffer o o ooo 166 13 7 Example of Communications Using a Random Access Buffer 167 CHAPTER 14 OTHER FUNCTIONS 168 14 1 Router Relay FUNCION 4 2244 Decidir ie he ed Eph kate ae he eS 168 ta Ved A DDIICAMONG sc ia Seen aie aoa sie a cts ia ae hea in ae ae ind Sco A 168 141 2 Parameter setings 24 6 ove ns hdr e ene ieee eee tae eee tae ii 168 14 2 Communications Using an Auto open UDP Port 0 0 ee 173 1421 AP DIGAUON 4 ias Hod hc deer ad bey BES Ee cee eee eRe a on a ee 173 14 33 Remote FassWoOldu ciuda rapero lud reta ates e Gaus oe e ea 174 14 34 Applica ca A A A AA AAA 174 14 3 2 Remote password setting processes unlock and lock processes 175 14 3 3 Remote password check procedure 0 0 ce ee eee eens 176 14 3 4 Differences in functions according to the remote password check status Gnabled disabled 34 A AA A A Boe Fiabe wh 179 143 07 UP RECAUNONS bits n ad det SES Ad eke RE Sea hate e
103. 00008 16 MELESECNE I Rls cd werra rai a 16 MELSECNET H remote I O station 16 MELSOFT application transmission port TCP 299 MELSOFT application transmission port UDP 299 MELSOFT connection ooo oo 82 Mode state Gane ht wk tana ele curb ores wwe 65 Module joint lever 0 0 0000 eee eee 25 MRECV santo do See tate a ae eee he 189 MSEND cra acts ue dd at nio nee a 189 MX component 000 eee eee eee 16 Network components 20000008 5 Network No 0 0 0 ee 65 Network parameter 0 000000 ee eee 64 Network type cani et a ee eee 65 No procedure s nerpia ne Sac Sia A 119 Number of connectable modules 59 Number of occupied I O points 21 OHIO sera sal chee nad 65 A cools Cer eae td eae bee S we 65 OREN A A ee 189 Open Seine Toda iaa SS E 68 OPEN SySteM iaa oa 68 364 Other TUNCHONAl acid aoe ca ieee cardos 168 Packing iSt ics syur sadada eine ak ede 18 Pairing OPE ra AS E a 138 ParameterliSia ica ad dada 64 PartinamesSs sandra aaron 25 Passive OPEN ai ES ES 76 Performance specifications 21 Physical addresses seriada 166 PING command cia a a he 317 PING He Stirs scat dana ta 312 FOP o GS hi GG aoe es aan i rasta Da 16 Port numbers used for the E71 299 Predefined protocol support function 17 Procedure exist simios vale bee ad eaten o 119 Procedures before operation
104. 1003 0000 Executes remote PAUSE to the CPU module where an E71 is connected Control Remote Latch Clear 1005 0000 Executes remote latch clear to the CPU module where an E71 is connected Remote Reset 1006 0000 Executes remote RESET to the CPU module where an E71 is connected Read Type Name 0101 0000 Reads the model name and code of the CPU module where an E71 is connected Lock 1631 0000 Specifies the remote password to disable the communication with other devices Remote The locked state is activated from the unlocked state Password eek wn 6000 Specifies the remote password to enable communication with other devices The unlocked state is activated from the locked state 92 CHAPTER 10 SLMP COMMUNICATIONS Item Command Subcommand Description Read Directory File 1810 0000 Reads file list information from the CPU module where an E71 is connected Search Directory File 1811 0000 Reads the file number of the specified file from the CPU module where an E71 is connected R t for th ified fil i New File 1820 0000 eserves storage area for the specified file of the CPU module where an E71 is connected Delete File 1822 0000 Deletes a file in the CPU module where an E71 is connected Copy File 1824 0000 Copies the specified file in the CPU module where an E71 is connected File Change File State 1825 0000 Changes the attributes of the file in the CPU module where an E71 is connected hange File Date 1826 0000 Changes the creation date of t
105. 4 58741 Attached file receiving count x H 22645 58754 Server inquiry count x H 22646 Server communication error count 0H x Pote E mail status Receive 22647 storage area 58771 Error log write count x H 22648 58781 Receiving error log write pointer x H 22649 H 22650 H 22651 to 22658 Error log block o Date 587B to 5882 1 22659 to 22662 58834 to 5886p L x 22663 to 22692 Subject 58874 to 58A4 y ubjec o L x sassaJppe Aiowew JeJjnq JO 1817 ZG Aowa yng S E 51 Address Decimal Hexadecimal 22693 to 22736 58A5y to 58D0 22737 to 22780 58D1 y to 58FCp 22781 to 22824 58FDy to 5928p 22825 to 22868 59294 to 59544 22869 to 22912 59554 to 59804 22913 to 22956 59814 to 59ACy 22957 to 23000 S9AD to 59D8p 23001 to 23044 59D9 to 5A04 23045 to 23088 SAO5y to 5A30yy 23089 to 23132 5A31 H to 5A5CH 23133 to 23176 5A5Dy to 5A88 y 23177 to 23220 5A89 to 5AB4 y 23221 to 23264 23265 to 23308 5AE1 yy to 5BOC 23309 to 23352 5BOD to 5B38 23353 5B39 23354 5B3A 23355 5B3B 23356 5B3CH 23357 5B3D 23358 5B3E 23359 5B3F y 23360 5B40 92 Application E mail status storage area Receive Send Initial value Error log block 2 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 3 The bit configuration is the same as
106. 4 Parameter Setting nes la seed hac a de eh eee dee em ee ek dr a 87 CHAPTER 10 SLMP COMMUNICATIONS 88 IOT ajo e AAA A eee ete Gre oes areal eu bate ore we ones 88 102 COMMUNICATION SUMIGIINE sc tate oe elo Se wie eb se Glee o ad emcee seer 89 10 3 Data Communication Procedures lt 32445 aladas 90 10 4 Parameter Sewing acs ms sia Za da esa Bas OS OS ek AEs BA eek Ae Redon Sie de 91 10 5 Available command St gies besa a a aa wb ete y 92 CHAPTER 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING THE PREDEFINED PROTOCOL 94 11 1 Data Communication Procedure 0 0 00 ccc eee ees 96 11 2 Communication Type of Protocols 0 0 cc eens 99 Wid Packet El MOS tata et oe de ta ORE EL ean ORE res 100 11 4 Execution Condition of Predefined Protocol Communicati0N o o ooooo 107 11 5 Example of Predefined Protocol Communications 0 000 eee eee 110 11 5 1 System configuration example 0 00 ee ee eee tenes 110 11 5 2 Parameter Setting 0 0 0 ccc eee nett nee nen eens 111 Tigo 0d Prourantexampler sra Aiea aaa Se eet a A eet ede ea eae 117 CHAPTER 12 COMMUNICATIONS USING A FIXED BUFFER 119 IZ ND DICANONS estetica eee 119 12 1 1 Differences between the Procedure Exist and No Procedure control methods 119 12 2 Gommunicalon Struct r nina oe cc Nek ta odes whit ie eee Be Sek kes oak ee BS eee 120 12 3 Date Sending Procedure at ii cee A AA hoe ee 122 12 4 Data Receiving Proced
107. 4 MITSUBISHI MY a ELECTRIC Mitsubishi Programmable Controller MELSECL MELSEC L Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Basic LJ71E71 100 SAFETY PRECAUTIONSO Read these precautions before using this product Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly In this manual the safety precautions are classified into two levels N WARNING and N CAUTION NWARNING Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in death or severe injury Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions N CAUTION resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage Under some circumstances failure to observe the precautions given under N CAUTION may lead to serious consequences Observe the precautions of both levels because they are important for personal and system safety Make sure that the end users read this manual and then keep the manual in a safe place for future reference Design Precautions NWARNING O Forthe operating status of each station after a communication failure refer to relevant manuals for each network Incorrect output or malfunction due to a communication failure may result in an accident To prevent the malfunction of the programmable controller system due to harmful e mails take preventive measures such as antivirus measures
108. 5 11 1 Data Communication Procedure By using the predefined protocol support function data can be communicated with the connected device in the following procedure 1 i MELSOFT Series lt Predefined Protocol Support Function Ethernet Module gt File Edit Module Read Write Tool Debugging Support Function Window Protocols Packets Packet Data Area Usage Module for Debugging _ 2 Si MELSOFT Series lt Predefined Protocol Support Function Ethernet Module gt Protocol Setting Untitled jsi File Edit Module Read Write Tool Debugging Support Function Window i Es AE Protocol Manufacturer Model Protocol Name Communication Type Packet Name Packet Setting No Editable Protocol E Kana characters CAP NUM SCRL Add Protocol Adds new protocol Selection of Protocol Type to Add Predefined Protocol Library y Reference Select from Predefined Protocol Library Please select manufacturer model and protocol name from Protocol to Type Protocol to Add General purpose 0401 Read word 0401 Read bit E 0401 Read word link direct 0401 Read bit link direct 0401 Read word intelligent 0403 Read random standard 0403 Read random link direct 0403 Read random intelligent 0406 Read block stand x pts 0406 Read block link x pts 0406 Read block intel x pts Point Display the Predefined Protocol Support F
109. 5 C1464 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING Action e Follow the procedure below 1 Check if the Ethernet module the power supply module and the CPU module are properly connected 2 Check if the operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the CPU module 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the System error The OS detected an error manual for each module Ifthe actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative The SMTP server is in process and an error response was Check if the mail address of the Ethernet module has received Mailbox not found been correctly set e Follow the procedure below 1 Check if the Ethernet module the power supply module and the CPU module are properly connected 2 Check if the operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the CPU module 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the System error The OS detected an error manual for each module If the actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative The SMTP server is in process and an error response was e Check the status of the SMTP server received Exceeded the allocation of the memory area The SMTP server is in process an
110. 500 ms 40 15 i A Monitoring IP assemDIy timer valig H O Fp iier Setting time setting value x 500 ms 10 16 Response monitoring timer value 3CH O 10 Setting time setting value x 500 ms 60 Destination existence confirmation starting interval timer 17 4B0y 114 value 2006 O 2 Setting time setting value x 500 ms 18 Destination existence confirmation interval timer value 144 O 1214 Setting time setting value x 500 ms 20 19 ae MORRE od 3H Destination existence confirmation resending time O 1344 3 20 14 4 Auto open UDP port number 1388 y x H 21 to 29 154 to 1Dp System area 35 S9ssaJppe AJOWSUW J9HNQ JO ITZ GE Aowa yng S E Address Programming Decimal Application Initial value tool setting Hexadecimal applicability TCP Maximum Segment Transmission setting area 20 e Oh Enable TCP Maximum Segment Size Option transmission AEn e 80004 Disable TCP Maximum Segment Size Option transmission 80004 x Re initialization makes the set value effective o Communication condition setting Ethernet Operation Setting area Communication data code setting b1 e 0 Binary Code e 1 ASCII Code TCP existence confirmation setting b4 e 0 Use the Ping Initial process e 1 Use the KeepAlive parameter setting Send frame setting b5 ea For l e O Ethernet E reinitialization 1 IEEE 802 3 Fu Setting of write enable disable at RUN time b6 OH O e 0 Disable e 1 Enable Initial timing
111. A eee 366 WARRANTY Si dee eee sees oe OIEA EA ow oe he eee oaks s 367 TRADEMARKS sapo aii Cov ee resell REC HS EUSP ips 368 12 MANUAL PAGE ORGANIZATION In this manual pages are organized and the symbols are used as shown below The following illustration is for explanation purpose only and should not be referred to as an actual documentation is used for window names and items 1 shows operating procedures T shows mouse operations is used for items in the menu bar and the project window shows setting or operating examples shows reference manuals ES shows reference pages A Asiria the 1 0 addres amp rot necessary as tha CPU doss t atoratraty Leono thts setting blank wl net couse sr error to ocour D ipti Select the type of the connected module Type Page 74 Section 7 1 2 Model Name Select the model name of the connected module Page 74 Section 7 1 3 Points Set the number of points assigned to each slot Page 74 Section 7 1 4 Start XY Specify a start VO number for each slot Page 74 Section 7 1 5 Switch Setting Configure the switch setting of the built in I O or intelligent function modules Page 74 Section 7 1 6 X Set the following o g Error Time Output Mode i 3 Detailed Setting PLC Opia AHN Page 75 Section 7 1 7 5 s VO Response Time 30 E 3 a Setting Start X Y enables modification on the start V O
112. ATED INSTRUCTIONS 15 8 ZP BUFSND This instruction sends data to the connected device through communications using a fixed buffer Command zeeursnn f pS Available device Hite te Constant register Others OE eee ee Internal device Es Link direct device Intelligent etting data ile i system user JOO function module register Be Word IEC EE 1 The file registers set for each local device and program cannot be used 1 Setting data Setting data Description Data type Start I O number of the E71 00 to FEy The first two digits BIN 16 bit character of the three digit I O number User string S1 Connection number 1 to 16 BIN 16 bit S2 Start number of the device that stores control data System Device name S3 Start number of the device that stores send data User Device name Un Un The start number of the bit device in the own station that D1 turns on for one scan upon completion of the instruction System Bit On 00 N y 05 E TI 0 Z 0 D1 1 also turns on if the instruction ends abnormally 2 Control data Device itm O Setting data Setting range Set by sano Systemae Stores the status at completion S2 1 Completion e 0000 Normal completion El status e Values other than 0000 Abnormal end error code 209 3 Send data Setting Setting data range Specifysenddata length Depending on Procedure exists Communications using 4 to 1017 the procedu
113. Address Decimal Hexadecimal 20765 to 20771 511Dy to 51234 20772 to 20778 51241 to 512Ayy 20779 to 20785 512B y to 51314 20786 to 20792 51324 to 51384 20793 to 20799 51394 to 513Fp 20800 to 20806 5140 to 51464 20807 to 20813 51474 to 514D 20814 to 20820 514E to 5154p 20821 to 20827 51554 to 515B 20828 to 20834 515Cy to 5162 20835 to 20841 5163y to 51694 20842 to 20848 516A y to 5170p 20849 to 20855 20856 to 20994 5178410052004 e 20995 52034 20996 to 21055 52044 to 523F y 21056 5240 21057 to 21119 52414 to 527Fy 21120 5280 21121 to 21123 52814 to 52834 21124 to 21126 52844 to 5286y 21127 to 21279 52874 to 531F 48 Application HTTP status storage area Disconnection detection storage area semasa O Receive buffer status storage area mem o IP address status storage area Error log block 4 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 5 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 6 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 7 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 8 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 9 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 10 The bit configuration is the same a
114. Assume that the scan time on the sending side is 10ms and the scan time on the receiving side is 8ms e 28 6561 ms 10 7 3 0 0033 x 1017 8 APPENDICES 2 Minimum processing time of communications using a random access buffer Reading Writing Trs Kr Kdr x Df ACK processing time of a connected device added only for TCP IP communications The time between the E71 receiving request data from a personal computer Trs and it completing the process unit ms Kr Kdr Constant Refer to the table below Df Number of request data words ACK processing time of the The time between a random access buffer reading writing completed and the connected device connected device returning ACK LJ71E71 100 Item TCP IP communications UDP IP communications Calculation example 1 The time between the E71 receiving request data from a personal computer and it completing reading when the E71 communicates with the personal computer in TCP IP and reads 508 word data of a binary code from a random access buffer unit ms e 2 508 ACK processing time of the connected device ms 2 0 0 0010 x 508 ACK processing time of the connected device Calculation example 2 The time between the E71 receiving request data from a personal computer and it completing writing when the E71 communicates with the personal computer in TCP IP and writes 508 word data of a binary code to a random access buffer unit ms e 2 8128 ACK processing t
115. CPU module To connect multiple products in the TCP IP communications set the connection for the second product or more in the open setting In the following cases the open setting is not required Only one product is connected in the TCP IP communications The network is running in the UDP IP communications Set the connection target in the programming tool DO Connection destination window gt Connection1 Select Ethernet Board under PC side I F and double click the item The window shown to left appears On the window enter the network number and station number of the personal computer not of the E71 Determine the network number and station number of the personal computer as follows The network number must be the same as that of the E71 The station number must be different from that of the E71 on the same network CHAPTER 8 CONNECTING MELSOFT PRODUCTS AND A GOT 4 Select Ethernet Module under PLC side I F and double click the item The window shown to left appears Set the station number and the IP address FLG T LJ71 E71 1 00 a a a according to the network parameters Me twork ho Station Ho 11 PLG side LF Detailed Settine of Ethernet Module fe IP Address 101 gfl 79 IF Input Format DEG f Host Mame Station Mo lt 21P Information Automatic Response System 5 Set Other Station Setting and Network Communication Route when required 6 A Passive open
116. CTIONS 1 5 3 Precautions for Dedicated Instructions This section describes precautions for using dedicated instructions 1 When changing data specified by dedicated instructions Do not change any data e g control data until execution of the dedicated instruction is completed 2 When the dedicated instruction is not completed Check that Online has been set under Mode in the network parameter window Dedicated instructions cannot be executed during offline 3 Securing service process time When accessing a programmable controller on another station using a data link instruction during the Ethernet diagnostics execution of the instruction may be delayed Take the following measures to execute the data link instruction after the Ethernet diagnostics e Execute the COM instruction e Reserve time for a communication process for 2 to 3 ms Use a programming tool for the setting KO Project window gt Parameter gt PLC Parameter gt Service Processing Setting under the PLC System tab 4 Specifying the first argument of a dedicated instruction Un The first argument of a dedicated instruction Un can be also specified with double quotation marks 15 4 Organization of the Dedicated Instruction Sections For the organization of the dedicated instruction sections refer to Page 13 SUOIONIJSU pa e91IpaQ JO SUONNBI9IA EGL 191 15 5 ZPOPEN This instruction establishes opens a connection with
117. Check the routing parameters and correct the error Set the Station No lt gt IP Information setting in the network parameter window gt MELSEC Q L Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Application If the action above does not solve the problem perform the following tests on the E71 to check for hardware error e Hardware test gt Page 323 Appendix 6 2 e Self loopback test 2 gt Page 322 Appendix 6 1 248 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 1 6 7 Error Code List This section describes the error codes abnormal codes of the errors that may occur in each process for performing communications between the E71 and a connected device as well as errors caused by process requests issued from the CPU module of the own station the error details and the actions to be taken The following table lists the types of errors that may occur ae Buffer memory area that Error type Description stores the error code seit e Setting value error l Errors occurring in the initial process 7 Page 250 Section 16 7 1 e Initial process error oo e Setting value error Errors occurring in the open process Page 250 Section 16 7 2 e Open process error Errors occurring in communications using a a i e Specified data error Page 250 Section 16 7 3 fixed buffer sending with the connected e Sending error Page 250 Section 16 7 4 device e Specified data error Errors occurring in communications using a e Communic
118. Code Initial Timing ve Do not wait For OPEN Communications impossible at STOP time f ASCII Code r Always wait For OPEN Communication possible at STOP time TP Address Setting Send Frame Setting Input Format Dec k f Ethernet 2 0 IF Address 192 234 TEEES02 3 Enable Online Change TCP Existence Confirmation Setting Use the Keepalive f Use the Ping Cancel Item Description Setting range UN l e Binary Code Communication Data Code Select the communication data code for the connected device ASCII Code e Do not wait for OPEN Communications impossible at STOP Initial Timing Refer to 1 in this section time e Always wait for OPEN Communication possible at STOP time e DEC DEC IP Address Set the IP address of the own station Make sure that the E71 on the own 0 0 0 1 to Setting IP Address station and the connected device to be communicated with have the same 255 255 255 254 class and subnet address Consult with the network administrator for the IP e HEX address setting 00 00 00 01 to FEPEPEPE Select the frame of the Ethernet header for the data link layer to be sent by the E71 e Ethernet V2 0 An E71 receives data from the connected device both with the Ethernet frame EEE802 3 1 and the IEEE802 3 frame Select whether to enable connected devices to write data in MC protocol e Selected Enable Enable Online Change o o i communications while the CPU module is in
119. D1 1 Item Description Turns on at the END process of the scan where the OPEN instruction is completed and Completion device D1 0 turns off at the next END process Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the OPEN instruction e Normal completion Stays off and does not change e Abnormal end Turns on at the END process of the scan where the OPEN instruction is completed and turns off at the next END process Completion device D1 1 Operation while the OPEN instruction is being executed END END END Program process process Scan __ process OPEN instruction m Executed Completion device ahd Completiondevice 1 lt i Abnormally ended lt lt lt J Connection y opened e The ZP OPEN instruction is executed on the rising edge OFF ON of the open command Point Do not perform an open or close process using I O signals and the dedicated instruction together for the same connection Doing so will result in malfunction 4 Errors If a dedicated instruction ends with an error Completion device D1 1 turns on and the error code is stored in Completion status S2 1 194 CHAPTER 15 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 5 Program example The following shows a sample program that performs an Active open process on the connection number 1 for TCP IP communications when the I O signals of the E71 are X Y00 to X Y1F SM400 U0 MOV G20480 K4M0 UO MOV G20482 K4M20 M100
120. DICATED INSTRUCTIONS b Changing the transmission speed and communication mode The following page provides a sample program that changes the Ethernet operation setting enables writing during RUN when the I O signals of the E71 are X Y00 to X Y1F M101 X19 Change the settings MOV H5000 D252 to 10Mbps and half duplex ZP UINI UO D250 M250 SET M100 Process upon completion SET M3000 Process upon abnormal end U0 G31 F U0 G105 HO Process upon completion RST M3000 SET M3001 LO lt gt G105 HO Process upon abnormal end M3001 X19 Communications enabled ININ dZ Eb Sb 231 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING This chapter describes how to identify causes of problems that occur when an E71 is used and take corrective action 16 1 Before Troubleshooting Check that the POWER LED of the power supply module and the MODE LED of the CPU module are on lf either or both are off troubleshoot the CPU module User s Manual hardware design maintenance and inspection for the CPU module used 16 2 Troubleshooting Procedure How to identify the cause of a problem and take corrective action is explained below Use a programming tool to identify the cause and take corrective action 1 Procedure Connect the CPU module to a programming tool System Monitor Monitor Status Connection Channel List Monitoring Serial Port PLC Module Connection USB System Image a n d O pe n th e de Syste m M
121. Error log block 1 Error log block 4 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 5 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 6 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 7 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 8 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 9 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 10 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 11 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 12 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 13 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 14 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 15 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 16 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Programming tool setting applicability x x x x x x x x Address Decimal Hexadecimal 23361 5B41 23362 5B42 23363 to 23370 5B43 to 5B4A y 23371 to 23374 5B4B to 5B4E 23375 to 23404 5B4F to 5B6C 23405 to 23448 5B6D to 5B98 y 23449 to 23492 5B99 to 5BC4 y 23493 to 23536 5BC5 to 5BF0p 23537 to 23580 5BF1 to 5C1Cp 23581 to 23624 5C1Dy to 5C48 23625 t
122. Ethernet address of the external device Check the operation of the external device The error history is sequentially displayed From an old error The latest error is displayed at the bottom line Stop Monitor Close v 4 lf the error details cannot be obtained in the step above perform the troubleshooting below Checking the LEDs K gt Page 235 Section 16 4 Troubleshooting by symptom 2357 Page 238 Section 16 6 Ethernet Diagnostics _ gt Page 290 Section 16 8 39 INPp99014 Bunooysa qno COL 233 16 3 Checking with the Module Error Collection Function With the module error collection function the errors that have occurred in the E71 are saved into the CPU module This allows error details to be held even if the power is turned off or the CPU module is reset Check the E71 s errors collected by the CPU module on the Error History window oO Diagnostics gt System Monitor gt button Error History A Monitor Status Connection Channel List Stop Monitor Serial Port PLC Module Connection USB System Image Refine Search Match all of the criteria below 1 Model Name matching LI71E71 100 2 Start I O matching 0000 Clear Refine Criteria Enter Refine Criteria Error History Error History List Error Details Displayed Errors Errors 83 200 Error Code Notation DEC HEX Model Name LIV1E71 100 Error Code Start I 0
123. Field Network MELSECNET H and MELSECNET 10 relay communications After an initial process is completed communications are enabled Communications using data link instructions 179 PJIOMSSE Y S OWSY Ep pajqesip pa qeua snje s y99y9 plomssed zow ay o BulpJog9e SUOI OUNJ Ul svuda Y Ep Ll Remote password check setting Disabled Enabled After an open process is completed Function Within Ethernet communications are oe 36 Communications are enabled from the time File transfer FTP server function enabled with the connected device that that the unlock command is received until the lock command is received has completed an open process 1 A dedicated connection is used for No Procedure communications using a fixed buffer or communications using the predefined protocol Do not set the remote password for the connection with the connected device 2 Remote password check is not performed against the e mail function 3 If a remote password has been set to the CPU module on the relay station or station to be accessed where the E71 is connected access to another station may not be performed 180 CHAPTER 14 OTHER FUNCTIONS 14 3 5 Precautions The precautions for using the remote password function of the E71 are provided below 1 Timing of activating a remote password To enable the remote password setting power off or reset the CPU module After a remote password has been set resta
124. I instruction Specify the parameters such as the IP address of the own station and Ethernet operation setting using the control data of the dedicated instruction and initialize the E71 When the E71 reinitialization request is completed Initial normal completion signal X19 turns off When the reinitialization processes are all completed Reinitialization specification address 1Fy b15 turns 0 and Initial normal completion signal X19 turns on If the reinitialization process fails an error code is stored in the initial error code storage area Sample program The following two methods are available e Using the dedicated instruction UINI instruction e Writing directly to the buffer memory Point Do not use the method using the dedicated instruction UINI instruction and the method by writing directly to the buffer memory together APPENDICES c Using the dedicated instruction UINI instruction The following shows an example where the reinitialization process is performed using the UINI instruction and the OPEN instruction is executed after the process is completed When the I O signals of the E71 are X YOO to X Y1F SM400 U0 MOV G20480 K4MO U0 MOV G20482 K4M20 M6500 I SET M2500 M2500 X19 MO M1 MOV K2 D252 UO MOV G203 D255 SET D255 6 ZP UINI U0 D250 M250 ges TT O 0 D J aa O NEN RST M2500 A Oo v U D O 0 NO RST M3001 a A O gt M250 M251 E Process upon completi
125. J71QE71N T AJ71QE71N B5T A1SJ71QE71N3 T A1SJ71QE71N B5 A1SJ71QE71N B2 A1SJ71QE71N T A1SJ71QE71N B5T A series AJ71E71N 324 1 Functional comparison The following table lists the functional comparison APPENDICES O Supported X Not supported QE71 N 9706 or 9706B or earlier later AJ71E71 S3 AJ71E71N Function AJ71E71 Initial process with the program Initial process Initial process with parameter settings Open process with the program Open process Open process with parameter settings Communications using a Procedure Exist fixed buffer No Procedure Communications using a random access buffer MC protocol communications Communications using data link instructions oO Interrupt process upon BUFRCVS instruction data receiving RECVS instruction Send receive with the program E mail function Send with the auto notification function ak Cc 3 O O 3 File transfer FTP server Web function Broadcast communications Communications with the switch on the CPU module set to STOP Selection of the communication data code ASCIl binary CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 relay communications Router relay function Connected device alive Ping check KeepAlive Pairing open Unit of each timer setting 500ms x 5 value for data communications Connection to TCP IP MELSOFT products UDP IP n O T x Installati
126. K is not returned after data transmission e When not performing the above retry process set O times configure the setting so that the following formula is met TCP ULP _ TCP end _ TCP resend timer value timer value timer value Set the same value for the timer values 304 APPENDICES Appendix 4 2 Reinitialization process The reinitialization process sets the E71 to the status after startup without restarting the programmable controller or resetting the CPU module Perform the reinitialization process using a program 1 The purpose of a reinitialization process The purpose of a reinitialization process is described a To update address information of a connected device held by the E71 To prevent other devices from illegally accessing the programmable controller using the IP address of the connected device with which communications are normally performed the E71 holds the IP address of the connected device and the corresponding MAC address If a module or the board of the connected device is replaced due to a failure the address information of the connected device held by the E71 must be cleared by the reinitialization process 4 A MAC address is unique to a device No devices share the same MAC address b To change the IP address of the E71 on the own station When a system is changed by only changing the own station IP address set by the programming tool communications with the connected dev
127. NG THE PREDEFINED PROTOCOL b When Fixed Length Variable Length is Variable Length An area starting from the device number which is specified in the Element Setting window 1 is considered as the data storage area The data storage area to be occupied varies depending on the setting of Unit of Stored Data e When Lower Byte Upper Byte is selected the same size as the data length one word length for the data length storage area are occupied However when the data length of a send packet is an odd number the upper byte lower byte for Byte Swap of the last device is not sent When the data length of a receive packet is an odd number the last data is stored with one byte of 00y e When Lower Bytes Only is selected twice size of the data length one word length for the data length storage area are occupied Word Specified device 0 Data length storage area 1 Send a Data storage area a packet A o O Send packet The user stores the send data Receive packet The E71 stores the receive data a Receive Data storage area a pa DY The unit of the data length is fixed to byte Point Multiple Non conversion Variable elements can be placed in a packet Data storage area When Fixed Length Variable Length is Variable Length and the configuration is set as follows an error occurs e An element other than Static Data is placed behind a Non conversion Variable element when
128. Network Parameter Ethernet Open Setting Module No 1 Send wfProcedure Exist wfpisable x No Confirm 2000 2000 a Lale lelefela lefofe lo lalola KOKORO UDP E O E il E E E g B E B E Ja faa fa fa fa fata fa fa fa fate fa fa Ja fafa fe fa fafa fafa la fa fate a fe KRERER ER KE CRCRER KAKO KOKORO KO apela fe fa fafa fafa fa fe fa fea fe Fixed Buffer Communication Select the communication method for communications using a fixed buffer Select eas Procedure Exist Procedure Exist for communications using a random access buffer 156 CHAPTER 13 COMMUNICATIONS USING A RANDOM ACCESS BUFFER 13 4 Data Format Communication data consists of a header and application data 13 4 1 Header The header for TCP IP or UDP IP is used Because an E71 automatically adds and deletes a header the user setting is not required 1 Detailed header sizes a TCP IP Ethernet IP TCP 14 bytes 20 bytes 20 bytes b UDP IP Ethernet IP UDP 14 bytes 20 bytes 8 bytes J pe H Vel jeuoy e1eQg VEL 157 13 4 2 Application data In the application data for communications with the Procedure Exist control method the following data code is expressed in a binary code or an ASCII code To switch between a binary code and an ASCII code use the Ethernet operation setting O Project window gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt Ethernet CC IE Field gt S
129. O 1 to 32766 the receiving station Set the waiting time for the divided data in such a case Set the following waiting time o e Time for waiting a response after a command is sent Response Monitoring Timer _ UN 2to 32767 e For receiving divided messages time until the last message is received after the first message is received Set the time until starting the alive check after communications with the connected device of the connection Dest Confirmation Start Interval o 1 to 32767 that has been opened where the alive check target exists is lost For the connection that is opened where the alive check target exists set the interval to perform the alive check again when a Dest Confirmation Interval 1 to 32767 response from the connected device as the alive check target is not received For the connection that has been opened where the alive check target exists set the number of times that the alive Dest Confirmation Resend 1 to 32767 check is performed again when a response from the connected device as the alive check target is not received Input Format Select an input format DEC HEX IP Address of DNS Server1 DNS os IP Address of DNS Server2 Setting Set the IP address of each DNS server IP Address of DNS Server3 IP Address of DNS Server4 1 The DNS setting is configured for using the e mail function For details refer to the following MELSEC Q L Ethernet Interface Module User s Man
130. O Block Month 01H to 12H Year 00H to 99H Last two digits of the year 15 to b8 b7 to bO Date 5883H Hour 00H to 23H Day 01H to 31H 15 to b8 b7 to bO Second 00H to 59H Minute 00H to 59H b15 to b8 b7 to bO Year 00H to 99H First two digits of the year Day of the week 0 to 6 The first 30 words of the e mail subject are stored A subject is not stored successfully if Subject 5887 y it contains characters other than alphanumeric and ASCII code characters o oO o 1 A receiving error log block area consists of 16 error log blocks that have the same data order 201 SI P09 10114 2 94 b Send area Buffer memory name Dedicated instruction normal completion count Dedicated instruction abnormal completion count Number of mails normally completed Attached file sending count Sending to the server count Number of mails abnormally completed Error log write count Sending error log write pointer Error code Command code To Error log block Date Subject Address 5B39 5B3Ay 5B3By 5B3Cy 5B3Dy 5B3E 5B3Fy 5B40 5B414 5B424 5B434 5B4By 5B4F yy Description The cumulative number of normal completions of the dedicated instruction MSEND is stored e 0 The MSEND instruction has not been executed or no executions have resulted in normal completion e 1 or more The cumulative number of normal completions of the MSEND instruction The cumulative
131. O n Ito r wi n d OW Main Block Operation to Selected Module Main block Main block O Diagnostics gt System Monitor Model Name LJ71E71 100 pa E p 1 Detailed Information H W Information Diagnostics Error History Detail Block Information List Module Information List Main block Number Of i Network No Block Module Block Name Power Total atus Block E ii t Jo Number OF Supply Modules Occupations e Point Address Station No Module Occupied Power L6DSPU Display Module L26CPU BT cpu 16Point Built in 1 0 16Point 0100 32Point Built in CC Link 32Point 0200 END Cover Error Major Error A Moderate Error Minor Error Assignment Error Assignment Incorrect Stop Monitor Product Information List System Error History Close When an error in the E71 is reported select the E71 System Monitor Connection Channel List Serial Port PLC Module Connection USB System Image a n d cl i Cc k th e Detailed Information b u tto n m eet eee opi n to Selected Module a taria When an error in a module other than the E71 is P Slot 0 E ueno ero reported refer to the manual for that module DetJed Information HAW Infomation Diagnostics Error History Detail Module Information List Main block Pe Y UA ll AA t JO NetworkNo Number OF Supply Modules Occupations Slot Point Address Station No Module Occupied P P
132. OS detected an error CPU module 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual for each module If the actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Follow the procedure below 1 Check if the Ethernet module the power supply module and the CPU module are properly connected 2 Check if the operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the C135y System error The OS detected an error CPU module 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual for each module Ifthe actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Follow the procedure below 1 Check if the Ethernet module the power supply module and the CPU module are properly connected 2 Check if the operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the C1364 System error The OS detected an error CPU module 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual for each module Ifthe actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 282 Error code Error description C137 C138 C139 C13Ay C13Byy C136 C1404 C1414 C1424 C1434 C144 C14
133. P IP is used 2 Outline of the program example a Program on the CPU module side Because parameters are set on the programming tool no program is required b Program on the connected device side Read write data from to the CPU module using the library described above e Write in word units for five points from DO to D4 e Read in word units for five points from DO to D4 342 APPENDICES 3 Programming tool setting Set the parameters using the programming tool as shown below a Ethernet operation setting Ethernet Operation Setting b Open setting Network Parameter Ethernet Open Setting Module No 1 Unpassive v Send v Procedure Exist Disable No Confirm j 2000 7 lalala lalola lalola lo lalola lalo lalala fata fa fa fafa lo lalola lalo Lale le lalala lufele le lafe lo lalo lalala fata fe fa fafa le lalola alo mongira pasn S LIN y 3 IENSIA USyM 16 xipuaddy 3PIS 39159 pap uuo y UO WeJHOJY ajdwes 6 xipuaddy 343 4 Sample program on the connected device side The program example of the connected device accessing the LO2CPU in the E71 connected station is described When this program is executed the contents of the following communication messages are displayed in order e Batch write command message in word units e Batch write response message in word units e Batch read command message in word units e Batch read response message in word units rm O The
134. PU module using an instruction such as the TO instruction when the E71 starts up In the above case identify the connection where the unlock lock process has failed using the following buffer memory areas e Accumulated count of unlock process abnormal end address of Connection No 1 20595 5073p e Accumulated count of lock process abnormal end address of Connection No 1 20597 5075p b Corrective action against a process failure Take the following actions if required e Close the connection with the connected device e Write 0 in the buffer memory areas Accumulated count of unlock process abnormal end address 20595 50734 and Accumulated count of lock process abnormal end address 20597 5075 If this action is not taken the process a above will be performed each time a process failure occurs exceeding the notification accumulated count e Ifthe number of unlock lock process failures for the connection to the connected device is greater than the above accumulated notification count the possible cause is unauthorized access from the connected device Disable the connection using the buffer memory area System port use prohibited designation area address 20488 5008 After this the unlock process cannot be performed for the connection until Use allowed is set e Inform the system manager that the number of unlock lock process failures is greater than the accumulated notification count and take corrective action
135. Point O When connected devices in the same Ethernet network do not need to receive communication messages by broadcast communications a discarding process is required O The user needs to determine the port numbers dedicated for data sending receiving for broadcast communications O Sending receiving procedures to perform the broadcast communications in communications using the predefined protocol are same as that in communications using a fixed buffer except for setting Predefined protocol under Fixed Buffer Communication of the open setting 12 8 1 Sending receiving procedures 1 Sending procedure To send data by broadcast communications set the IP addresses of the connected devices where the E71 sends data to FFFFFFFFy and perform the open process The E71 sets all the host address bits to 1 and sends data over the Ethernet network 2 Receiving procedure To receive data as data for broadcast communications set the IP addresses of the connected devices that send data to the E71 to FFFFFFFFy and the port numbers to FFFF y and perform the open process 140 CHAPTER 12 COMMUNICATIONS USING A FIXED BUFFER OO oo oooocooccoccononono conocio ca ncca na nnnnananacacanananos The following is the outline of the internal process of an E71 when data is received in the No Procedure control method or by broadcast communications The values specified in the buffer memory addresses Oy 14 and 284 to 5F y are used for the IP address
136. R 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING THE PREDEFINED PROTOCOL 3 Non conversion Variable Element Setting Non conversion Variable Send Element Name Fixed Length arable Length Fixed Length ka Data Length asimum Data Length 1 Setting Range 1 to 2046 Unit of Stored Data Lower Byte Upper Byte oe Byte Swap Disable Lower gt Upper ka Data Storage Area Specification Send Data Storage Area 1 word Specifiable Device Symbol A T M L B DLW A ZA G Buffer Memory Cancel This element is used to send data in the device memory of a CPU module or buffer memory as a part of a send packet or to store a part of a receive packet to the device memory of a CPU module device or buffer memory The following table lists the items Item Description Element Name Set name of the element Fixed Length Sends and receives the data whose length is fixed When sending The data length at the time of the protocol execution is Variable Length specified and the data is sent When receiving The data of which the length is variable is received Fixed Length Variable Length Set the length of data to be sent and received Data Length Maximum Data For the variable length data set the maximum data length that can be specified to the data length storage Length area The range is 1 to 2046 When sending Each one word 2 bytes data in the data storage area is sent in the order of the lower byte to the upper byte Wh
137. Read the response end code from the connection end communications using a fixed buffer code or error log area and perform the required action 265 SP SPOD 10113 2 94 Error code Error description Action e A response could not be received within the response e Check the operation of the connected device C022 monitoring timer value e Correct the response monitoring timer value i e The connection with the connected device was closed e Check the open status of the connection with the while waiting for a response connected device e The connection with the connected device has not been opened C023 e Open the connection with the connected device e The connection with the connected device has been closed When Predefined protocol is set in Fixed Buffer mes oe e Correct the connection number of Communication setting communications using a fixed BUFSND BUFRCV BUFRCVS ECPRTCL instructions buffer or a random access buffer are executed ae C024 y e Correct the Fixed Buffer Communication setting When Procedure Exist or No Procedure is set in Fixed A Procedure Exist No Procedure Predefined protocol of Buffer Communication setting a predefined protocol is the corresponding connection executed e When starting the open by using the OPEN instruction There is an error in the usage setting area when starting correct the usage setting area of the control data C0254 the open process by the OPEN instruction or inpu
138. Response format from the E71 to the connected device Subheader End code Text 10 words L H L H L H L H Random access buffer Physical address H L Logical address 2680H 9856 NA OH 0 2694H 9876 12H 34H 14H 20 2695H 9877 56H 78H 15H 21 2696H 9878 9AH BCH 16H 22 269DH 9885 9AH BCH 1DH 29 cra 17FFH 6143 10 words 164 CHAPTER 13 COMMUNICATIONS USING A RANDOM ACCESS BUFFER b Communications using an ASCII code e Command format from the connected device to the E71 Subheader Start address Data length H Abr H L 36H 31H 30H 30H OOH OOH 31H 34H OOH OOH OOH 41H e Command format from the connected device to the E71 Subheader End code 45H 31H 30H 304 Text 20 words H O H O H D H 3H 32H 33H 34 3H 36H 37H 38H 3 WH 41H 42H TE 3H 41H 42H 43H v oe Y de Y ms gt Y ASCll binary conversion Random access buffer Physical address H L Logical address 2680H 9856 OH 0 2694H 9876 14H 20 2695H 9877 56H 78H 15H 21 2696H 9878 9AH BCH 16H 22 269DH 9885 1DH 29 10 words 3E7FH 15999 17FFH 6143 165 sewo asuodsa pue puewwo jo sajdwexy3 eye jeu104 Eed VEL 13 5 Precautions when Creating Programs This section describes the precautions when creating programs for communications using a random access buffer 1 Completion
139. S Calculation example 1 The time between the E71 receiving request data from a personal computer and it completing reading when the E71 communicates with the personal computer in TCP IP and reads 100 point data of an ASCII code from the data register D in the own station unit ms Assume that the scan time of the E71 connected station is 10ms the command data length is 21 words and the response data length is 211 words e 14 37 ACK processing time of the connected device ms 3 3 0 0046 x 21 211 10 x 1 ACK processing time of the connected device Calculation example 2 The time between the E71 receiving request data from a personal computer and it completing writing when the E71 communicates with the personal computer in TCP IP and writes 100 point data of an ASCII code to the data register D in the own station unit ms Assume that the scan time of the E71 connected station is 10ms the command data length is 221 words the response data length is 11 words and writing during RUN is enabled e 14 99 ms ACK processing time of the connected device 3 3 0 0073 x 221 11 10 x 1 ACK processing time of the connected device 297 aw Buissa901d xipueddy 4 Processing time of the dedicated instructions The following table lists approximate operation processing time of each dedicated instruction The operation processing time differs depending on the system configuration and the scan time on the sen
140. Section 16 7 7 a 4C24 e bO to b7 Element No where the verification result did not match e b8 to b15 The cause of mismatch verification result code Received data verification result receive packet No 1 Received data verification 5403 to H result receive packet No 2 54D1 The bit configuration is the same as receive packet No 1 H to 16 The number of protocol executions in Connection No 1 is stored e 0 No protocol execution e 1 to 65535 Number of executions When the number exceeds 65535 the value remains 65535 Cancels the protocol executed in Connection No 1 Number of protocol 54D2 executions Protocol cancellation e 0 No cancellation specification PO 94D3y E specification e 1 Cancellation request set by user e 2 Cancel completed set by the system a Received data verification result The following information is stored in Received data verification result e Element No where the verification result did not match bO to b7 Stored value Description 0 Verification matched 1 to 32 Element No where the verification result did not match FFy Verification not performed e The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stored value Description Cause 00y Normal i The total packet size of receive data is smaller than that set in protocol 01H Insufficient receive data data 10H Data not matched The receive data do not match the value set in protocol data When ASCII Hexadec
141. T M3001 U0 gt G105 HO Process upon abnormal end M3001 X19 Communications enabled 000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 This is a sample program for communications using connection numbers 1 and 2 When using another connection number specify the corresponding signals and bits 310 APPENDICES 3 Precautions a Buffer memory area settings The following parameters operate according to the settings of the corresponding buffer memory areas configured when a reinitialization process is performed Therefore do not change the settings of the buffer memory areas e Timer setting of the initial setting e Open setting e Router relay parameter setting e Station number lt gt IP information setting e FTP parameters setting b Reinitialization process request Do not request another reinitialization process while a reinitialization process is in progress SS 9O0ld Jen y xipuaddy Ss900jd UONEezIenuiay 2 y xipueddy 311 Appendix 5 Line Status Check The E71 line status parameter settings and progress of the initial process can be checked The following two methods can be used to check the line status e PING test e Loopback test Appendix 5 1 PING test This section describes the PING test 1 Performing a test with direct connection to the E71 This test is to check the existence of an E71 that has completed the initial process on the same Ethernet network using the pr
142. TOP time is selected the communication line is closed during remote STOP After the line is closed the line cannot be reopened on the CPU module side and remote RUN cannot be performed from the connected device 67 Buljes voyelado jeulayl3 Z SUOI EDIUNWWOY JO palimbay sjajaweleg Bumnes 7 1 4 Open Setting Configure settings to open connections for data communications with connected devices xa Project window gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt Ethernet CC IE Field gt Select Ethernet under Network Type gt button Network Parameter Ethernet Open Setting Module No 1 IP Address Port No Input Format Fixed Buffer Pairing Existence Host Station Destination Procedure Exist v 2000 10 97 85 223 vv is IP Address and Port No will be displayed by the selected Format Please enter the value according to the selected number Cancel IP Address Port No Input l Eonar Select the input format for the IP address and port number Select the communication protocol for the connected device Protocol L gt Page 71 Section 7 2 Page 78 Section 7 3 Set this item when TCP is selected under Protocol Open System L gt Page 72 Section 7 2 2 Page 74 Section 7 2 3 Page 76 Section 7 2 4 For communications using a fixed buffer select whether to use the buffer for sending or for receiving in a connection to the connected device When not Fixed Buffer
143. The destination IP address can be checked only in the station with the same IP address station connected to the network later TT Diagnostics gt Ethernet Diagnostics Ethernet Diagnostics gt Target Module Setting 7 Change IP Address Display Port No Module No istModule 10Address o DECO HEX si Ove Parameter Status Error History Status of Each Connection Status of Each Protocol LED Status Received E mail Information Send E mail Information Number of Error Occurrences 7 1 Error End Code Sub Header Command Code Connection Mo st Station Port ceed del E Mo IP Address Port Mo coor ooga 0000 oagal ooo 10 97 24 1 0000 A Rh e e Na E Ina p hon e mo Clear History PING Test Loop Test COM ERR OFF 186 CHAPTER 14 OTHER FUNCTIONS 14 6 Alive Check Function When the E71 has not communicated with the connected device for a certain period of time while the connection is open this function checks whether the connected device is alive by sending an alive check message to the connected device and waiting for the response 1 Parameter setting To enable the alive check function select Confirm under Existence Confirmation in the open setting C gt Page 68 Section 7 1 4 In TCP IP comm
144. UBLESHOOTING Data communication type Communications Communications MC protocol i i using a fixed buffer ident using a random communications access buffer e Correct the specified points or the start address device number and step number Check the data length of the command and set the data again Register the monitoring data Data cannot be read from written to an area with an address after the last address Correct the specified address Correct the block number Correct the value to the one within the range that can be specified for each process l Ka e Correct the device e A file register cannot be specified CA specification e A word device has been specified for the command for bit devices The start number of bit devices has been specified using a value other than a multiple of 16 in the command for word devices e Correct the command or specified device 261 suo eoIunuuo9 ejep Bulinp asinap pajoauuos e o paulnjal sapos pug 9 S1 SPOD 10113 Z294 Data communication type Error Communications Communications Error description MC protocol code using a fixed using a random communications buffer access buffer 59 e An extension file register cannot be e Correct the device i specified specification e The CPU module and the E71 cannot e Check the error code communicate appended to the end e The CPU module cannot process a code and c
145. Used Subnet Mask Pattern E ee ee Default Router IF Address ie ie 2 Router Information Input Format DEC y o Subenet Address Router IP Address Ee EMI En EA EM E EN Clear Check End Cancel 168 CHAPTER 14 OTHER FUNCTIONS Router Relay Function Select whether to use the router relay function Not Used Use Subnet Mask Pattern Refer to 1 in this section C0000000y to FFFFFFFCy A value other than 000000004 and Default Router IP Address Refer to 2 in this section FFFFFFFFy Input Format Select the input format of router information DEC HEX A value other than 00000000y and Sub net Address Refer to 3 a in this section Router PFFFFFFFy Information A value other than 000000004 and Router IP Address Refer to 3 b in this section PFFFFFFFy 1 Subnet mask pattern Set the subnet mask Consult with the network administrator for the setting When not using the subnet mask set any of the following values according to the class Class Mask value Class A FF000000y Class B FFFFOOOO Class C FFFFFFOO a Setting example The following shows a Class B setting example Ex Class B Network address oo O IP add e mooom ooo ooo oo oll lo ololo o o o 1 Subnet mask OO O OO ololololfololofolofo y Subnet address Host address A A A A AAA A Padaress Ly Siw OSH Tt 1fofofjofojojol1fojojojojoj Joj1Jojol1fofl1 1 1 1jojojojoljojojoj1 Point O All devic
146. a Communications using a binary code Data length maximum of 1017 words Random access buffer Specified address n set number of words to be read 1 word 2 bytes b Communications using an ASCII code Data length x 2 maximum of 1016 words lt 63 H to L H to L senses H to L i 5 9 3 ejep uoeoddy zp el ASCll binary conversion Random access buffer Specified address n set number of words to be read Maximum of 508 words 31H 32H 33H 34H 35H 36H 37H 38H H to L H to L 161 6 End code An error code is stored in the end code added to a response For the error codes refer to the error code list lt gt Page 259 Section 16 7 1 End codes are stored in the communication status storage area of the buffer memory 13 4 3 Examples of command and response formats This section describes examples of command and response formats 1 Writing data to a random access buffer upon a write request from a connected device a Communications using a binary code e Command format from the connected device to the E71 Subheader Start address Data length Text 10 words L H L A L H L H L A L H 624 OOH OOH OOH OAH OOH 34H 12H 78H 56H BCH TE BCH 9AH Random access buffer H L 56H 78H Logical address OH 0
147. a Ps M1001 X19 MO M20 MOVP HO ZP OPEN UO K1 D100 M100 M101 SET M101 J a SET lt lt Fixed buffer No 1 send program gt gt M3000 X19 MO M3001 MOV K3 MOV K1234 MOV K5678 MOV K8901 ZP BUFSND UO K1 D3000 D300 M300 M301 K4MO K4M20 D20 M1001 D100 M100 M110 M111 M3001 D300 D301 D302 D303 M300 Process upon completion M301 Process upon abnormal end 150 CHAPTER 12 COMMUNICATIONS USING A FIXED BUFFER lt lt Close processing program gt gt MO e aa M160 M160 M150 _ _ PS M161 M6000 P_ MM S M6001 M6001 Mo ZP CLOSE UO K1 D200 M200 M161 SET M210 M200 M201 SET M202 M201 HA SET M203 RST M210 WwelBOld 6 Z Jang pexi4 e Buisf suoneoiunwwog jo ajduex3 6 z1 151 152 b Receiving side LCPU 2 side The following is a program on the receiving side LCPU 2 side lt lt Fixed buffer No 1 receive program gt gt SM400 UO MOV G20480 K4MO UO MOV G20482 K4M20 UO MOV G20485 K4M40 M5000 X19 MO M40 M500 J __4 __1 PLS M5001 M5001 7P BUFRCV UO K1 D5000 D500 M500 M500 M501 Process upon completion Process upon abnormal end M501 Point O Secure sufficient device areas according to the maximum length of data sent from the send source to prevent the device areas used for other purposes from being overwritten by the receive data O Toreceive data at shorter intervals than the scan time of the CPU module ad
148. afele lalola 112 CHAPTER 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING THE PREDEFINED PROTOCOL d Protocol setting data The value in D100 to D109 of the destination station can be read by using SLMP Device Read command in the Predefined Protocol Library The followings are setting examples of the protocol setting data using the Predefined Protocol Support Function Protocol Setting i MELSOFT Series lt Predefined Protocol Support Function Ethernet Module gt Protocol Setting Sample epc a File Edit Module Read Write Tool Debugging Support Function Window mM e MES gt Request variable Set pl Protocol in Predefined Protocol Library Editable Protocol Protocol Line TO Send Packet Line LC Receive Packet Line Kana characters CAP NUM SCRL Packet Setting e Send Packet Request Packet Setting Protocol No i Protocol Name 0401 Read word Packet Type Send Packet Packet Mame Request Element List a Element Type Element Mame Element Setting 1 Static Data Fixed data a re state ata Ped dat RR OOO 4 Non conversion Variable NetworkNo Di D lffisedLenathitBwtelLowerlipnerByte ho Swap IS Non conversion Variable Station No D2 21 Fixed Lenath 1Byte Lower Upper ByteiNo Swap 6 Nor conversionYariable Requested module VO No D3 D31 Fixed Lenath 2Bvte Lower Upper Eyte hlo Swap 7 StaticData_ For future expansion 00M BAe 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 8 Length Requestdata length Objec
149. al monitoring time is incorrect allowable range Data could not be received within the specified arrival re ed te oe C1B5y a e Correct the specified arrival monitoring time monitoring time e Correct the specified send mail address number C1B6y The specified send mail address number is incorrect e Correct the send mail address setting in the parameter setting C1B7 A reading operation was executed while no receiving e e If there is an mail received in the mail information execute H mail was stored in the mail buffer data area the MRECV instruction The RECV instruction was executed for the channel that e Correct the execution condition of the RECV instruction C1B8 had not received data e Correct the channel number The OPEN instruction cannot be executed for the specified C1B9y e Correct the connection number connection C1BA The dedicated instruction was executed with the e Execute the dedicated instruction after the initial process a initialization not completed is completed C1BBy The target station CPU type is incorrect e Correct the specified target station CPU type e Correct the remote password and unlock lock the remote C200 The remote password is incorrect password again C201 The remote password status of the port used for e After unlocking the remote password perform A communications is in the lock status communications e When accessing another station do not set the remote When another station was acces
150. ame as Fixed buffer No 9 Fixed buffer No 14 The bit configuration is the same as Fixed buffer No 9 Fixed buffer No 15 The bit configuration is the same as Fixed buffer No 9 Fixed buffer No 16 The bit configuration is the same as Fixed buffer No 9 Availability depends on the version of the E71 lt _ gt Page 300 Appendix 3 Programming tool setting applicability x x x x x 53 S9ssaJppe JOu1au J9SJHNQ JO ISI ZSE Aowa yng S e CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURES BEFORE OPERATION This chapter describes how to connect an E71 to Ethernet For how to communicate with connected devices after the E71 is connected refer to the communication procedure 2 gt Page 63 CHAPTER 7 Checkbox E System consideration 13 Page 27 CHAPTER 3 i Page 56 CHAPTER 5 Design the system configuration of the E71 Installation Page 25 CHAPTER 2 Page 60 Section 6 1 Connect the E71 Page 57 Section 5 2 Page 61 Section 6 2 Setting parameters Set the following parameters which are required to start up 23 Page 65 Section 7 1 2 the E71 from the programming tool Page 66 Section 7 1 3 Basic setting Ethernet operation setting Restarting the CPU module MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Hardware Design Reflect the parameter settings by turning off and on the CPU Maintenance and Inspection module or resetting the CPU module Network diagnostics Check that the cables are connected
151. ammable controller CPU and each intelligent function module are properly connected e Check that the programmable controller CPU is not in the E reset status An error was detected in the programmable controller COEO sh e Check if an error exists in the programmable controller CPU If an error exists take the action required to correct it e Replace the power supply module programmable controller CPU or intelligent function module e Check that the programmable controller CPU and each intelligent function module are properly connected e Check that the programmable controller CPU is not in the reset status An error was detected in the programmable controller COE1 e Check if an error exists in the programmable controller CPU If an error exists take the action required to correct it e Replace the power supply module programmable controller CPU or intelligent function module e Check that the programmable controller CPU and each intelligent function module are properly connected e Check that the programmable controller CPU is not in the reset status An error was detected in the programmable controller COE2 ae e Check if an error exists in the programmable controller CPU If an error exists take the action required to correct it e Replace the power supply module programmable controller CPU or intelligent function module e Check that the programmable controller CPU and each intelligent function m
152. ange 0 to 30000 Standby Time Setting Range 0 to 30000 Monitoring Time Setting Range 0 to 3000 0 Infinite Wait Communication Parameter Batch Setting OK Cancel Si MELSOFT Series lt Predefined Protocol Support Function Ethernet Module gt Protocol Setting Untitled LO Set the configuration of packets to be sent and received in DBA pp E A r O the Packet Setting window E as z i ses DO Protocol Detailed Setting window gt Variable Unset or Element Unset Protocol in Predefined Protocol Library Editable Protocol EE Protocol Line Protocol Line EE SendPacket Line Send Packet Line Receive Packet Line E Receive Packet Line Packet Setting ES Protocol No fl Protocol Name Packet Type Send Packet Packet Name Element List Element Element Type Element Name Element Setting Element Type BINPSIVOJg UONEDIUNWWOD geq LLL Header Non conversion Variable Change Type Copy P Terminator Conversion Variable C Length Check Code Static Data Non veritied Reception Element Setting Length Send Code Type asc Hexadecimal y Data Length Element Name Data Flow Calculating Range Start Calculating Range End 97 5 Write the protocol setting data to the flash ROM Module Write Module Selection DO Online gt Write to PLC Execute 70 Address Model Select a target module and write the p
153. anual for each module If the actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Follow the procedure below 1 Check if the Ethernet module the power supply module and the CPU module are properly connected 2 Check if the operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the C105 System error The OS detected an error CPU module 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the SP SPOD 10113 2 94 manual for each module If the actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Follow the procedure below 1 Check if the Ethernet module the power supply module and the CPU module are properly connected AJOW SOW JONG y Ul P3J0 S SSpOd 10114 9L 2 Check if the operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the C106 System error The OS detected an error CPU module 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual for each module If the actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 279 Error code Error description C110 Citi C1124 C1134 C1144 C1154 280 System error The OS detected an error A response could not be received from the DNS client
154. ata code setting e 0 Online e 1 Offline e 2 Self loopback test e 3 Hardware test 39 Aowa yng S E S9ssaJppe AJOWSUW JONG JO ITZ GE Address Decimal Application Initial value tool setting applicability Programming Hexadecimal Status of settings with a programming tool Communication data code setting b1 0 Communications in a binary code e 1 Communications in an ASCII code Initial open method setting b2 e 0 No parameter setting start up according to the program e 1 Parameter setting start up according to the parameters TCP Existence confirmation setting b4 e 0 Use the Ping e 1 Use the KeepAlive 203 Module Send frame setting b5 CBy status area e 0 Ethernet e 1 IEEE 802 3 Setting of write enable disable at RUN time b6 e 0 Disable e 1 Enable Initial timing setting b8 e 0 Do not wait for OPEN Communications impossible at STOP time Communication 1 Always wait for OPEN Communication possible at status storage area STOP time Bits other than those described above are reserved for system use 204 E CCy ystem area 205 RECV instruction execution request H x CDy T O 206 Sa stem area CEy i 7 rea for 207 i TS ZNRD instruction OH x CF eiving 208 instructions instruction Si execution result ZNWR instruction On x D1 210 to 223 D2y to DFy remera B 224 to 226 a EO to E2p ystem area 227 Error log area Number of
155. ate programming of a programmable controller and monitor a programmable controller MELSOFT connection and the GOT can monitor and test a programmable controller Remote operations making full use of the Ethernet capability long distance connectivity and high speed communications are achieved Programming tool 2 Connecting multiple products Multiple MELSOFT products and GOTs can be connected using MELSOFT application communication ports suoeolddy 8 Point The connection used in the connection with MELSOFT products is only for data communications with the MELSOFT products and cannot be used for data communications with connected devices other than MELSOFT products a Connection using the TCP IP communications The E71 can connect to up to 17 MELSOFT products using one dedicated system connection and 16 user connections GOTs cannot be connected using the TCP IP communications Use the UDP IP communications b Connection using the UDP IP communications The E71 can connect a MELSOFT product and a GOT using one dedicated system connection 81 8 2 Data Communication Procedure This section describes the data communication procedure in the MELSOFT connection lex Connecting the E71 and a personal computer programming tool 1 Network Parameter Ethernet Open Setting Module No 1 IP Address and Port No will be displayed by the selected Format Please enter the value according to the sele
156. ath 1Byte Lower Upper Byte No Swap 6 Nor conversion Variable Requested module VO No _ D23 D23 Fixed Lenath 2Byte Lower Upper Byte No Swap 7 Static Data Forfutureexpansion 004Byte 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 8 length Response data length Obiectelement9 15 HEW Reversef2Bwte 9 Nor conwersion Variable End code 1D24 D24 fFixed Lenathy2Byte Lower Upper Byte No Swap 10 Nor conversion Variable NetworkNo 1D 25 D 251 Fixed Length 1 Byte LowerUpper ByteiNo Swap 11 Nor conversion Variable Station No D26 D26 Fixed Length 1 Byte LowerUpper ByteiNo Swap 112 Nor conversion Variable Requested module VO No 1D27 D27 Fixed Lenath 2Byte Lower Upper Byte No Swap 13 Static Data Forfutureexpansion 004Byt 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 0104 2Byte 15 static Data Subcommand A Change Type Bad New 114 CHAPTER 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING THE PREDEFINED PROTOCOL 2 Receiving side LCPU 2 side The following is an example of the parameter settings of the receiving side LCPU 2 side a Basic setting The following is an example of the basic setting Network Parameter MELSECNET CC IE Ethernet Module Configuration Set network configuration setting in CC IE Field configuration window po peration setting _______ lll Oo E O O S E O E O O S E PO Rater Relay Parameter A O o po Station Nowe2tP Information ______l__________ ________ pte Parameters o o e E EFE Sooo O o E OOOO Ootes 2222 YO
157. ation address 5330y to 533F p a If the protocol setting data is set correctly Power on reset E71 Checking the protocol setting data Check result normal X1D turns on when the check result is normal Predefined protocol ready X1D Protocol setting data check area address 5320H to 533FH SS Hime number of registered protocols and information about whether protocols have been registered are stored UOIJEOIUNWLWOD O9OJOJH PAUIJSpald JO UONIPUO UVOINNISXH y 107 b If an error has occurred in the protocol setting data Power on reset E74 Checking the protocol setting data Check result error Predefined protocol ready X1D Protocol setting data SS check area The error details are stored address 5320H to 533FH 2 When the protocol setting data is written When the protocol setting data writing from GX Works2 is completed Predefined protocol ready X1D turns off After the completion the E71 checks the protocol setting data If the protocol setting data is set correctly the E71 turns on Predefined protocol ready X1D If an error has occurred in the protocol setting data Predefined protocol ready X1D stays off and the error details are stored to the protocol setting data check area address 5320y to 533F yy a If the protocol setting data is set correctly Start to write the protocol setting data Writing the protocol Checking the protocol E71 l E set
158. ation error excluding errors occurring in ae Page 250 Section 16 7 4 fixed buffer with the connected device communications using a fixed buffer sending with the connected device e Errors returned in communications using a fixed buffer end code Errors returned to the connected device when e Errors returned in communications using a random communicating with it access buffer end code Errors returned in communications using the MC End code or error code for each protocol command e Specified data error Errors occurring while communicating with the Errors where the source cannot be found 5 destination including the causes in the e Errors that have occurred in MC protocol o o Page 251 Section 16 7 5 m Description column and whose error codes communications a are stored in the error log area e Errors that have occurred in communications using O a random access buffer T Errors occurring in data communications e Setting data error Page 252 Section 16 7 6 5 using the predefined protocol e Receiving error Page 254 Section 16 7 7 Errors response commands occurring in T MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Built In Ethernet file transfer FTP server function Function Errors occurring in communications using the oo Communication error Page 255 Section 16 7 8 Web function _ e Setting data error Errors occurring when an e mail is received Page 256 Section 16 7 9 a e Receiving error Po e Setting
159. ation is the same as Connection No 1 20619 to 20623 508B y to 508F Connection No 6 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 20624 to 20628 5090 to 5094 Connection No 7 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 20629 to 20633 5095 to 5099 Connection No 8 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 aaa es ta C tion No 9 The bit confi tion is th C tion No 1 509A to 509E onnection No 9 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 ee C tion No 10 The bit confi tion is th C tion No 1 509F y to 50A3 onnection No 10 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 46 Address Decimal Hexadecimal 20644 to 20648 50A4y to 50A8jy 20649 to 20653 50A9y to 50ADyy 20654 to 20658 5OAE y to 50B2 y 20659 to 20663 50B3y to 50B7 20664 to 20668 50B8y to 50BC 20669 to 20673 50BDy to 50C1 y 20674 to 20678 50C2y to 50C6yy 20679 to 20683 50C7 to 50CBp 20684 to 20688 SOCC y to 50DOy 20689 to 20693 50D1y to 50D5y 20694 to 20736 SOD6 to 510014 20737 5101p 20738 5102p 20739 51034 20740 51044 20741 5105p 20742 5106p 20743 5107p 20744 51084 20745 and 20746 51094 and 510A 20747 to 20750 510By to 510E y 20751 to 20757 510F y to 5115p 20758 to 20764 5116 to 511Cp Application Monitoring area HTTP status storag
160. block where the latest sending error log is registered If the pointer value is 8 it means that the latest error log is registered in the receiving error log block 8 area When the number of receiving errors reaches nine the error log is then registered in the error log block 1 area again An error code indicating the error details is stored The system command code of the error message is stored The first eight words of the receiver s e mail address of the error e mail in the communications with the mail server are stored in the ASCII code Example If the sender s e mail address is use from add sample co jp use from add sam is stored in the ASCII code The date and time when the e mail was sent are stored in the BCD code similar to 5883 of a The first 15 words of the e mail subject are stored A subject is not stored successfully if it contains characters other than alphanumeric and ASCII code characters 1 A sending error log block area consists of 16 error log blocks that have the same data order 258 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16 7 1 End codes returned to a connected device during data communications The following table lists the error codes stored in the end code appended to a response during data communications O Stored in the end code appended to a response Data communication type Error E Communications Communications Error description MC protocol code eee using a fixed using a random co
161. cations select Procedure Exist Bulnes J9 oweled y 6 8 CHAPTER 10 sLmP COMMUNICATIONS SLMP is a protocol that enables connected devices to access SLMP supporting devices over Ethernet SLMP communications are available among devices that can receive send messages in the SLMP control procedure This function is available only in the E71 with the serial number first five digits of 15042 or later For SLMP communications refer to the following SLMP Reference Manual 10 1 Applications 88 Applications of SLMP communications are as follows 1 Data read write Data can be read written from to a device of the CPU module where an E71 is connected and intelligent function module buffer memory This allows a connected device to monitor the operation of the CPU module where an E71 is connected perform data analysis and manage production control 2 Remote control of a CPU module The remote operation allows a connected device to remotely operate a CPU module where an E71 is connected 3 Turning off the COM ERR LED The COM ERR LED on an E71 can be turned off from a connected device CHAPTER 10 SLMP COMMUNICATIONS 10 2 Communication Structure When a connected device sends a message to an E71 in the SLMP message format the E71 performs the process according to the message During communications a CPU module including the E71 operates as a server and the connected device a personal computer or other terminals
162. cations are enabled communications are enabled After the remote password is entered ee After an initial process is completed communications are enabled The remote Communications using the predefined protocol ett fuel communications are enabled by password lock process is automatically support function dd establishing a connection in GX Works2 performed when the protocol setting data are closed After an open process is completed communications are enabled from the time Procedure exists Communications that the unlock command is received until the lock command is received After an open process is completed After an open process is completed No procedure rae hoch 4 communications are enabled communications are enabled After an open process is completed communications are enabled from the time using a fixed buffer Communications using a random access buffer that the unlock command is received until the lock command is received After an initial process is completed data After an initial process is completed data E mail function l ae 9 l a 9 sending and receiving are enabled sending and receiving are enabled After the remote password is entered communications are enabled The remote Web function password lock process is automatically performed when the Web browser is After an initial process is completed closed communications are enabled CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE
163. cautions CAUTION O Do not disassemble or modify the module Doing so may cause failure malfunction injury or a fire O Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before mounting or removing the module Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction O After the first use of the product module and display unit the number of connections disconnections is limited to 50 times in accordance with IEC 61131 2 Exceeding the limit may cause malfunction O Before handling the module touch a conducting object such as a grounded metal to discharge the Static electricity from the human body Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction Operating Precautions NCAUTION O When changing data and operating status and modifying program of the running programmable controller from a personal computer connected to an intelligent function module read relevant manuals carefully and ensure the safety before operation Incorrect change or modification may cause system malfunction damage to the machines or accidents Disposal Precautions CAUTION When disposing of this product treat it as industrial waste CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCTO 1 Mitsubishi programmable controller the PRODUCT shall be used in conditions i where any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT if any shall not lead to any major or serious accident and ii where the
164. ce 2 Network address sBuljes Jajaweled 2 1 pl uonouny Aejay Ja1moy pL Ooo o o Fw TS E TS A S SOS Subnet mask pi p p phuh ehhh ehhh 10oTolofoToTo oToToTo Connected device 3 IP address Class B 1JoJojofojojo 1jofojojofo fol1jofo foj1jofo Jojojofojojo 1 jo Set the subnet address of the connected device 3 Subnet address Subnet address setting value 1 ojo o ojojo ojojo ojoj1lo jojo oj1lolojojo o ojojo ojojo 171 172 b Router IP address Set the IP addresses of the routers when the E71 communicates with the connected devices on other Ethernet networks via a router other than the default router Set the value that satisfies the following conditions e Condition 1 The IP address class is any of A B and C e Condition 2 The subnet address of the router is the same as that of the E71 on the own station e Condition 3 The host address bits are not all 0 or all 1 Point When the E71 communicates with the connected devices via a router in Passive open status communications can be performed without using the router relay function The router relay function is not needed in a system that uses the Proxy router CHAPTER 14 OTHER FUNCTIONS 14 2 Communications Using an Auto open UDP Port This section describes communications using the auto open UDP port 14 2 1 Application The auto open UDP port is a UDP IP port that automatically opens and closes at the following timing Us
165. cedure The open close processes are performed by the procedures described below according to the Ethernet operation setting 1 When Always wait for OPEN Communication possible at STOP time is selected for the Ethernet operation setting After the E71 connected station is started up the connection in UDP IP communications automatically opens and data sending receiving are enabled Creating open close processing programs is not required Point When open close processes are performed from the E71 side using a dedicated instruction with Always wait for OPEN Communication possible at STOP time set in the Ethernet operation setting all open close processes with the subsequent connected devices must be performed in a program 3 1npa901d uedo ZEZ suonesIunuuo9 dl dan Z 19 2 When Do not wait for OPEN Communications impossible at STOP time is selected for the Ethernet operation setting Executing the OPEN CLOSE instructions is required on the E71 to make the E71 enter open close wait status open close wait status before receiving an open close request from the connected device When the open process is normally completed data sending and receiving are enabled For the OPEN CLOSE instructions refer to DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Page 189 CHAPTER 15 Open close processes for the connection number 1 Parameter communication Power on completed Open status Open allowed status closed Closed
166. ceive process in an interrupt program is performed using the BUFRCVS instruction An interrupt program is started up when data is received from a connected device and receive data for a CPU module can be read The following settings are required to use an interrupt program gt Page 130 Section 12 5 1 e Interrupt pointer setting e Interrupt settings 1 Procedure exists The following is the receive process performed in the fixed buffer number 2 area for the connection number 2 Initial Open process process Receiving data Sending a response Initial normal completion signal X19 Open completion signal O address 5000H b1 BUFRCVS instruction In interrupt process y Q n ACK S ACK 5 TCP only o TCP only S wv zs rd S O 15 5 a Cycle Cycle v O A eee seee eee z Program Scan poes Scan 3 Interrupt process Scan i i RE D Confirm the normal completion of the initial process Initial normal completion signal X19 ON Establish a connection between the E71 and the connected device and confirm the normal completion of the open process of the connection number 2 Receive data from the destination e Fixed buffer reception status signal address 50054 b1 ON e Request the CPU module to start up the interrupt program O The interrupt program starts up Execute the BUFRCVS instruction to read the receive data length and receive data from the fixed buf
167. ch local device and program cannot be used 1 Setting data Setting data Description Set by Data type Unf Un Start I O number of the E71 00 to FEy The first two digits BIN 16 bit character n Un of the three digit I O number User string S1 Connection number 1 to 16 BIN 16 bit S2 Start number of the device that stores control data Device name System a N U UJ C TI D O lt D1 Start number of the device that stores receive data Device name The start number of the bit device in the own station that D2 turns on for one scan upon completion of the instruction Bit D2 1 also turns on if the instruction ends abnormally 2 Control data Device iem Setting data Setting range Set by sao sema fT Stores the status at completion Completion e 00004 Normal completion S2 1 System status e Values other than 00004 Abnormal end error code 213 214 3 Receive data Setting Setting data range of the data read from Procedure exists communications using a E the fixed buffer data binary code Number of words area Depending on Al 3 ace Procedure exists communications using 1 to 508 D1 0 MECEN Ee Gala e procedure ot xed are ASCII code Number of words System length buffer communications the l No procedure communications using a data length is the p ure uni g 1 to 2046 number of words or binary code Number of bytes the number of bytes D1
168. ck for an error in the POP3 server The POP3 server could not be closed e Check if the network is heavily loaded 283 SI P09 10114 2 94 oww JONG y Ul P3J0 S SSpOd 10114 9L Error code Error description Action C147y Closing the POP3 server gave an error response e Check for an error in the POP3 server C150y POP3 server verification error e Check the status of the POP3 server The Ethernet module s mail address e mail setting e Check the account name of the mailbox on the server side C151y parameter is different from the account name in the and correct the account of the mailbox set in the Ethernet mailbox on the server side module The Ethernet module s password e mail setting od e Check the password on the server side and correct the C1524 parameter is different from the password on the server ide password of the Ethernet module side An error has occurred in acquisition of the received mail C153y list The list of the mail that arrived at the POP3 server failed to be acquired e Reset the server inquiry time to the default value and restart the CPU module of the own station e Check that the e mail is not compressed or encrypted An error has occurred upon receiving a mail An e mail e Check if the e mail specifications such as the cannot be read from the POP3 server encoding decoding style and file format on the sending side are the same as those for the Ethernet module C160 A response wa
169. ck test 2 gt Page 322 Appendix 6 1 The COM ERR LED does not turn off even after the error cause is removed To turn it off refer to How to Turn Off the COM ERR LED gt Page 293 Section 16 10 235 sgq31 ey Bunayo 791 HO suin 031 NAY 94 H b 7 Ob 1 6 4 3 If the SD RD LED does not flash when data is sent The following table lists the items to be checked and the actions to be taken if the SD LED does not flash when data is sent Check item Action Is the ERR LED or COM ERR LED on Remove the cause that turned on the ERR LED or COM ERR LED Check the cable connection In addition perform a line test to check if Are the cables properly connected there is a problem with the cable connection and the Ethernet line Page 312 Appendix 5 Correct the IP addresses of the own station and the communication Are the parameter settings correct A destination router setting and subnet mask setting Is the program correct Correct the send program of the connected device If the action above does not solve the problem perform the following tests on the E71 to check for hardware error e Hardware test gt Page 323 Appendix 6 2 e Self loopback test 2 gt Page 322 Appendix 6 1 236 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16 5 Checking with a Display Unit With the buffer memory monitor test of a display unit a value in the buffer memory can be checked without a programming tool and a problem ca
170. code code Reading data When the information is unnecessary for users and the data including the number of characters Non verified reception is are variable set in the elements Example of a packet setting Variable number of characters Static data Non verified reception variable number of characters Static data Setting the packet format as above and setting the Non verified Reception enable the followings e Only necessary information can be stored in a device of the CPU module or the buffer memory e Only one protocol packet is required even when the data that may change in each communication are included in the receive packet 339 s u w j jayx9ed jo s jdwex ejeq g g xipuaddy 020 0 4 pauljepalg JO siNjonyS ejeg pue ewj vonelado g xipuaddy Appendix 9 Sample Program on the Connected Device 340 Side The following shows a sample program for the connected device on the same Ethernet network as the E71 Each program example describes only the minimum programming that is required to perform a communication test Change the IP address port number and other values according to the system configuration used Other processes such as a process performed upon an error can be added 1 Receive process of the connected device A receive processing example on the connected device side is shown below Communication process on the connected device Request message send process Response message rec
171. coding style and file format on the sending side are the same as those for the Ethernet module e Receive an e mail with an unknown destination and unknown destination server from the SMTP server e Check if the file extension of the attachment is bin or asc on the sending side e Check that the e mail is not compressed or encrypted e Check the destination of the MSEND instruction e Receive an e mail with an unknown destination and unknown destination server from the SMTP server e Follow the procedure below 1 Check if the Ethernet module the power supply module and the CPU module are properly connected 2 Check if the operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the CPU module 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual for each module Ifthe actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING Error code Error description Action e Follow the procedure below 1 Check if the Ethernet module the power supply module and the CPU module are properly connected 2 Check if the operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the C116y System error The OS detected an error CPU module 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual for each
172. col support function of GX Works2 GX Works2 Sending Connected device Connected device Lo Receiving 3 Executing protocols Data can be communicated with protocols appropriate to each connected device Execute protocols by dedicated instructions Multiple protocols can be executed by one dedicated instruction 21 5 Exchange of data with connected devices communications using a fixed buffer and random access buffer a Communications using a fixed buffer Up to 1K word data can be exchanged among programmable controllers or between a programmable controller and the host system While MC protocol communications are passive communications using a fixed buffer are an active protocol If an error occurs in equipment or certain conditions are met the programmable controller can send data to the host system Using an interrupt program allows the CPU module to quickly read received data 2 gt Page 119 CHAPTER 12 Send receive Send receive IE laf OCF SI DCLDCL OCF SY DEDO Another station Own station Connected device b Communications using a random access buffer Up to 6K word data can be communicated This buffer is useful when the data size is too large for communications using a fixed buffer capacity 1K word L gt Page 153 CHAPTER 13 L Read write Read write OO 2 DEODATO Connected device Connected device 6 Prevention
173. conduct a connection test between the E71 and target device This program accesses the data register D of the PLC CPU installed together with the E71 yee ia Copyright C 2005 Mitsubishi Electric Corporation All Rights Reserved fare a AAA EN ara ing EN AA include lt stdio h gt include lt winsock h gt define FLAG OFF 0 I Completion flag OFF define FLAG ON 1 Completion flag ON define SOCK OK 0 I Normal completion define SOCK NG 1 Abnormal completion define BUF SIZE 4096 Receive buffer size define ERROR_INITIAL 0 Initial error define ERROR_SOCKET 1 Socket creation error define ERROR_BIND 2 Bind error define ERROR CONNECT 3 Connection error define ERROR_SEND 4 Send error define ERROR_RECEIVE 5 Receive error define ERROR SHUTDOWN 6 Shutdown error define ERROR_CLOSE 7 Line close error Definitions for checking the receiving sizes define RECV_ANS_1 4 Receiving size of response message in reply to device write 1E frame define RECV_ANS_1 22 Receiving size of response message in reply to device write 3E frame define RECV_ANS_2 24 Receiving size of response message in reply to device read 1E frame define RECV_ANS 2 42 Receiving size of response message in reply to device read 3E frame 9 JensiA UsSym 16 XIpu ddy Bo ajdwes 6 xipuaddy typedef struct sck_inf struct in_addr my_addr unsigned short my_ port struc
174. cted device When the open process is normally completed data communications are enabled Start a close process using the CLOSE instruction Open request signal OFF The E71 performs the close process The E71 sends a close request FIN to the connected device d00000 YO When the close process is normally completed data communications terminate 2 74 1 2 CHAPTER 7 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE If the E71 sends an SYN and the connected device returns a RST Open abnormal detection signal X18 turns on immediately and the open process terminates Open abnormal end If an ACK and a FIN are not returned within the time specified by the TCP end timer value the E71 forcibly closes the connection sends a RST Close abnormal end 19 ainpsoo0jd usdo ANY Z SUOESIUNWWOY dl dOlL dL 7 2 4 Passive open procedure The E71 has the following two connection methods for Passive open U l Performs a passive open process on connections for all devices connected to the network npassive j regardless of the IP address and port number of the destination device Ful l Performs a passive open process on connections for the connected device specified by the ullpassive j IP address and port number Under the Passive open method the open close processes are performed using the procedures described below according to the Ethernet operation setting 1 When Always wait for OPEN Communication possible at STOP time i
175. cted number Transfer Setup Connection CC IE Field CC IE Cont CG Link T71 0l Board NET 1 0H Board Board Ethernet Board Q Series Bus Network No f1 E CC Link Module Station No 2 f Ethernet Module PLC CCIE Cont Module NET41 0H Module Module Name IP Address Host Name 10 97 79 2 Station No lt gt P Information Automatic Response System Other Station Gingle Network Other Station Co existence Network E CC Link C24 No Specification Time Out Sec 30 Retry Times 9 CCIE Cont NET 1 004 CC IE Field Ethernet Network No f1 Station No f1 il CCIE Cont CC Link C24 NET 1 O H ll Accessing Other Station TIT d a CC IE Field Ethernet PG side LF Ethernet Board Setting He twork MHo Station Mo 2 This setting is an assignment for Ethernet board Please execute the following settings Protoco UDP OF Destination Destination ort No D NETQI Board vel CCIE Field CC IE Field Master Local Communication Head Module gt LIME 100 Network No I Station No Connection Channel List PLC Direct Coupled Setting Connection Test PLC Type System Image Phone Line Connection 024 Cancel Metwork Mo Network Mo ofEthernet module set in parameter Station Mo Station Mo that does not overlap on the same loop Protocol 82 Write the parameter settings gt Page 68 Section 7 1 4 in the
176. ction established CA Connection established Data sending The client requests data Data sending sending and sends data Ill EU The client receives the response Receive process to the data Data sending Data sending The client receives data and sends back the response to the data Response Receive process Close request Close process Close request o l Close request The packet to stop communications is exchanged then the connection is disconnected Response Closed Closed CHAPTER 7 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE Point O The corresponding bit of Open completion signal address 50004 automatically turns off and the communication line is closed in the following situations A timeout has occurred in the alive check function gt Page 187 Section 14 6 e An E71 has received a close request and the ABORT RST instruction from a connected device e An E71 has received Alive open request from a connected device again with open completed in TCP After an E71 sends an ACK to a connected device the E71 closes the connection when receiving the RST command from the connected device If the E71 with a different IP address or port number receives Active open request from the connected device again the E71 only sends the RST command It does not close the connection e A timeout has occurred upon transmission in TCP O After the connected device sends a close request to the E71 wait for 500ms or more before
177. ction of sending error or reception error OFF For fixed buffer communication of connection No 2 ON Sending normal completion or reception completion OFF For fixed buffer communication of connection No 2 ON Detection of sending error or reception error OFF For fixed buffer communication of connection No 3 ON Sending normal completion or reception completion OFF For fixed buffer communication of connection No 3 ON Detection of sending error or reception error OFF For fixed buffer communication of connection No 4 ON Sending normal completion or reception completion OFF For fixed buffer communication of connection No 4 ON Detection of sending error or reception error OFF For fixed buffer communication of connection No 5 ON Sending normal completion or reception completion OFF For fixed buffer communication of connection No 5 ON Detection of sending error or reception error OFF For fixed buffer communication of connection No 6 ON Sending normal completion or reception completion OFF For fixed buffer communication of connection No 6 ON Detection of sending error or reception error OFF For fixed buffer communication of connection No 7 ON Sending normal completion or reception completion OFF For fixed buffer communication of connection No 7 ON Detection of sending error or reception error OFF For fixed buffer communication of connection No 8 ON
178. d an error response was Check if the mail address of the Ethernet module has received Illegal mailbox name been correctly set e Follow the procedure below 1 Check if the Ethernet module the power supply module and the CPU module are properly connected 2 Check if the operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the CPU module 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the System error The OS detected an error manual for each module If the actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Check that the port number of the POP3 server is 110 The port number of the Ethernet module is fixed to 110 The POP3 server could not be opened e Check if communications with the POP3 server can be performed using the PING command Communications cannot be performed with the POP3 e Check if the POP3 server is busy server Error response Communications cannot be performed with the POP3 e Check if the POP3 server is busy server Abort Communications cannot be performed with the POP3 e Check if the POP3 server is busy server Reset response e Check for an error in the POP3 server A response from the POP3 server could not be received e Check if the network is heavily loaded Forcefully disconnected from the POP3 server e Check for an error in the POP3 server e Che
179. d is shown by on off status of the corresponding bit When the check results include any error O is stored in all bits Registration status of Registration status of protocol No 16 protocol No 1 b15 b14 b13 to b2 b1 b0 Buffer memory address 5330H 5331H 0 OFF Not registered 1 ON Registered 5330y to Protocol registration 533Fy 5337H to Registration status of Registration status of protocol No 128 protocol No 113 Unused reserved 1 When the setting value gets Unidentified 65535 the following causes are possible When settings undetectable with the E71 used are written When the protocol setting data is broken hardware failure SI P09 10114 2 94 253 7 Predefined protocol support function execution status check area address 94C0y to 95FF yy The following table lists the details of the predefined protocol support function execution status check area The buffer memory addresses are those of Connection No 1 For the addresses of the Connection No 2 and later refer to the list of buffer memory addresses gt Page 35 Section 3 5 2 Buffer memory name Address Description The status of protocols being executed in Connection No 1 is stored e 0 Unexecuted e 1 Waiting for transmission Protocol execution status 54C0h 2 Sending e 3 Waiting for data reception e 4 Receiving e 5 Completed Verification result of receive packet No 1 is stored _ gt Page 254
180. d the normally closed contact for the completion device M500 of the BUFRCV instruction to the execution conditions of the BUFRCV instruction as shown in the above program When there is no normally closed contact for the completion device M500 the receive direction M5001 of the BUFRCV instruction is not turned off and on and the BUFRCV instruction may not be executed CHAPTER 13 COMMUNICATIONS USING A RANDOM ACCESS BUFFER CHAPTER 13 COMMUNICATIONS USING A RANDOM ACCESS BUFFER This section describes communications using a random access buffer 13 1 Applications In communications using a random access buffer data can be freely read from and written to any connected device not including an E71 A random access buffer is used as a common buffer area for all the connected devices in the 4 3 Ethernet network E71 Connected device Connected device Reading access Writing Connected device Connected device Writing Connected device E Point Data communications sending receiving by e mail using a CPU module cannot be used together with communications using a random access buffer Only one of the functions can be used at one time The e mail sending function using the E71 programmable controller CPU monitoring function can be used together with communications using a random access buffer Reading suoneoiddy 153 13 2 Communication Structure This section
181. d with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice 367 TRADEMARKS Microsoft Windows Windows Vista Windows NT Windows XP Windows Server Visio Excel PowerPoint Visual Basic Visual C and Access are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States Japan and other countries Intel Pentium and Celeron are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries
182. d with all E71 connected stations in the same Ethernet network that is a Page 140 Section 12 8 connected to the E71 when No Procedure communications using a fixed buffer are performed using UDP IP Data is read written from multiple connected devices to the Page 153 CHAPTER 13 random access buffer of an E71 Data communications are performed through a router and a gateway This function is not the function where an E71 Page 168 Section 14 1 operates as a router Communications are enabled without the open close boat Page 173 Section 14 2 processes after an E71 connected station is started up Unauthorized remote access to a CPU module is prevented Page 174 Section 14 3 The current connection status and transmission speed of an E71 and a hub and the number of times that the E71 Page 184 Section 14 4 detected disconnection can be checked If different stations in the same network use the same IP i Page 185 Section 14 5 address the address in use can be detected Whether a connected device is normally operating after a i er Page 187 Section 14 6 connection is established open process can be checked 29 An error that has occurred in an E71 can be stored in the CPU module as error history The history data can be stored Module error collection function on a memory with the backup power feature therefore error Page 234 Section 16 3 details are held even if the CPU module is reset or the sy
183. d2 Cursor System Windows Forms Cursors Default Me Command2 ForeColor System Drawing SystemColors ControlText Me Command2 Location New System Drawing Point 64 56 Me Command2 Name Command2 Me Command2 RightToLeft System Windows Forms RightT oLeft No Me Command2 Size New System Drawing Size 152 31 Me Command2 Tablindex 1 Me Command2 Text Sending a E71 command Command1 Me Command1 BackColor System Drawing SystemColors Control Me Command1 Cursor System Windows Forms Cursors Default Me Command1 ForeColor System Drawing SystemColors ControlText Me Command1 Location New System Drawing Point 64 16 Me Command1 Name Command1 Me Command1 RightToLeft System Windows Forms RightT oLeft No Me Command1 Size New System Drawing Size 152 31 Me Command1 TabIndex 0 Me Command1 Text connect APPENDICES Form1 Me AutoScaleBaseSize New System Drawing Size 5 12 Me BackColor System Drawing SystemColors Control Me ClientSize New System Drawing Size 280 214 Me Controls Add Me Command5 Me Controls Add Me Command4 Me Controls Add Me Command3 Me Controls Add Me Command2 Me Controls Add Me Command1 Me Cursor System Windows Forms Cursors Default Me Location New System Drawing Point 329 189 Me Name Form1 Me RightToLeft System Windows Forms RightToLeft No Me StartPosition System Windows Forms FormStartPosition Manual Me Text Form1 Me ResumeLayout False End Sub End Region Reg
184. data error Errors occurring when an e mail is sent Page 258 Section 16 7 9 b e Sending error oe ae o e Specified data error communications with the destination using the os e Communication error Errors occurring in communications usin j e Specified data error Not stored stored in the complete data link instructions from the CPU module of a e Communication error status area of the instructions the own station Errors occurring in communications using the e e Specified data error Not stored stored in the complete dedicated instructions from the CPU module a e Communication data error status area of the instructions of the own station 249 250 1 2 3 4 Initial error code address 69 The error codes generated when the initial process is executed are stored Error codes are stored in binary when Initial aonormal completion signal X1A is on The error codes are cleared when Initial normal completion signal X19 turns on but can be also cleared by the following processes e Resetting or powering off the CPU module e Writing O to the initial error code storage area using a program Open error code address 7Cy to C14 5824y to 58694 The result of the open process for connection with the connected device is stored in binary e 0 Normal completion e Values other than 0 Abnormal end Open abnormal detection signal X18 ON The error codes are cleared by the following operations e R
185. data in the random access buffer of the E71 using the TO instruction Asynchronously with the process above the connected device sends a read request to the E71 The E71 side command receiving Upon receiving the read request from the connected device the E71 sends the data written in the random access buffer to the connected device that sent the read request The E71 side response sending 1 3 2 2 How a connected device writes data The following figure shows how a connected device writes data to the E71 random access buffer O writin g data command CPU module 31n19n13S UONCOIUNWWOD Z EL ACK TCP only e Reading using buffer no FROM instruction ACK TCP only The connected device writes data to the random access buffer of the E71 The E71 side command receiving 991 A9P P3JI3UUOI E WO PB3 SI B ep MOH Z EL The E71 processes the write request from the connected device and returns the writing result to the connected device that sent the write request The E71 side response sending Asynchronously with the processes and above the data written in the random access buffer is read using the FROM instruction 155 13 3 Parameter Setting Set the following parameters to perform communications using a random access buffer e Basic setting gt Page 65 Section 7 1 2 e Ethernet operation setting gt Page 66 Section 7 1 3 e Open setting gt Page 68 Section 7 1 4
186. describes the precautions for broadcast communications 1 Port number To perform broadcast communications the user needs to determine the port numbers dedicated for data sending receiving for broadcast communications and specify these port numbers 2 Size of send receive data per sending receiving A maximum of 2046 bytes of data in the application data can be processed per sending receiving To send data with a size exceeding 2047 bytes divide the data into smaller chunks at the send source rm An E71 temporarily stores a subsequent receive data in its internal buffer for the operating system until the current receive process is completed If data with a size exceeding the capacity of the internal buffer approximately 40KB is received by broadcast communications the data is discarded In communications using a fixed buffer in the Procedure Exist control method the E71 sends a command message to the connected device waits for a response message then sends the next command message Therefore the user need not take account of the above mentioned internal buffer for the operating system 00000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000900 144 CHAPTER 12 COMMUNICATIONS USING A FIXED BUFFER 12 9 Example of Communications Using a Fixed Buffer This section describes an example of communications using a fixed buffer in the Procedure Exist control method between an E71 and the connected device 12 9 1 System c
187. ding receiving stations Processing time unit ms Instruction Number of access points Condition 1 Condition 2 For 1 BUFRCV 0 80 BUFRCVS 1 word ld 0 23 words BUFSND 7 44 LCPU Instruction execution condition For 2 1 16 name TCP IP communications binary code communications and fixed buffer communications procedure exists 10 80 O A UDP IP transmission port is closed Nlalaln alololu N I A OoOl O A UDP IP transmission port is open RECVS 0 23 960 words 12 50 READ 7 20 960 words 12 60 SREAD 7 28 Communications between E71 connected stations RECV 1 38 1 word SEND 4 64 960 words 13 00 WRITE 7 28 960 words 13 00 SWRITE 7 36 480 words 10 20 230 words Time between the UINI instruction accepted and reinitialization UINI 11 20 1 The processing time of the ECPRTCL instruction differs depending on a connected device or a protocol 298 APPENDICES Appendix 2 Port Numbers Used for the E71 The following table lists port numbers reserved for an E71 system Port number Application 1388 5000 Auto open UDP port Default value 1389y 5001 MELSOFT application transmission port UDP 138A 5002 MELSOFT application transmission port TCP 4 The port number can be changed The port number can be changed by overwriting the buffer memory address Automatic open UDP port number address 20 141 3 34 JO pesp SISqUINN HOd Z xipueddy 299 Appendix 3 New and I
188. disconnection after an initial process Disconnection is detected in any of the following cases Disconnection detection count address 20995 5203 e Disconnection between the E71 and a hub e Cable removal from the hub side connector e Hub power off e Cable removal from the E71 side connector Point If an error has occurred 65536 times or more the count stops at 65535 FFFF Write 0 to this area using a program to clear the stored value 134 CHAPTER 14 OTHER FUNCTIONS 14 5 IP Address in Use Detection Function If different stations in the same network use the same IP address the address in use can be detected This prevents a network from stopping due to incorrect IP address When the connected device with the same IP address does not support the IP address in use detection function the error is not detected If a station and another station with the same IP address exist on the same network another The station that has been already station cannot be connected to the network connected to the network continues The COM ERR LED turns on and COM ERR LED communications even if the station lt turning on check X1C turns on with the same IP address is connected This station cannot be connected to se Ole i SI i a e E i the network ES SA gt Sc nn ASA ac ES OE resulting in an error E IP address IP address IP address IP address _10 97 24 1 overlapped
189. do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Follow the procedure below 1 Check if the Ethernet module the power supply module and the CPU module are properly connected 2 Check if the operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the COC8y System error The OS detected an error CPU module 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual for each module Ifthe actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Follow the procedure below 1 Check if the Ethernet module the power supply module and the CPU module are properly connected 2 Check if the operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the COC9y System error The OS detected an error CPU module 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual for each module Ifthe actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 212 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING Error code Error description Action e Follow the procedure below 1 Check if the Ethernet module the power supply module and the CPU module are properly connected 2 Check if the operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the COCA
190. dure Exist vw Disable No Confirm v 2000 Eion ese 2000 a apela lalo lafefela la lefafelelo apela fe fa fa fafa fa la fafa fea fe KEKE EMER KR KR CRCRERER lelafelelo Ja fa a fe fa fa faa fa fa fa fate a fa ja fa fa fe fa fa faa fa fe fa fate fa fe 146 CHAPTER 12 COMMUNICATIONS USING A FIXED BUFFER 2 Receiving side LCPU 2 side The following is an example of the parameter settings of the receiving side LCPU 2 side a Basic setting The following is an example of the basic setting n Network Parameter MELSEGNET GC IE Ethernet Module Configuration b Ethernet operation setting The following is an example of the Ethernet operation setting Ethernet Operation Setting Puas Jajawueled ZEZ Jaung pexi4 e BuisN suoeoiunwwog jo ajduex3 6 Z4 147 c Open setting The following is an example of the open setting Network Parameter Ethernet Open Setting Module No 1 ec Procedure Exist Disable x No Confirm 2000 TP E mM gt B E E B E E B _ E E _ E E A apela lala CECE KREMER lufofelalo Ja fa fa fa fa fefefe lolo lafofelo a felalelelefele lolo lelolelols apela la Ju lefefelo lo lufafelalo Ja fa fa fa fa fa fafa lolo fa fa fe fa fe 148 CHAPTER 12 COMMUNICATIONS USING A FIXED BUFFER 12 9 3 Program 1 Sample program procedures This section describes the procedures for a sample program a Sending side LCPU 1 side The follo
191. e 1 Open abnormal detection i Abnormally ended signal X18 i CLOSE instruction a o a TP CLOSE instruction a completion device Eou CLOSE instruction me completion device 1 Z l Open completion signal Open request signal i address 5002H SYN ACK FIN ACK ol f of f SYN ACK FIN ACK After parameter communications check that the initial process of the E71 is normally completed Initial normal completion signal X19 ON Start the open process using the OPEN instruction Open request signal address 50024 b0 ON The E71 starts the open process upon receiving the open request SYN from the connected device When the open process is normally completed Open completion signal address 50004 b0 turns on and data communications are enabled The E71 starts the close process upon receiving the close request FIN from the connected device When the close process is completed Open completion signal address 5000H b0 turns off and data communications are disabled Start the close process using the CLOSE instruction Open request signal OFF 4 An open request SYN received after the normal completion of an initial process and before the E71 is in the OPEN request wait status will cause an error and the E71 sends a connection forced close RST TT SUOHHESIUNWLWOD dl dOl cL 31np390 d USdo aAIssed yz Point O Change connection settings before executing the OPEN instruction O Once a
192. e CPU module to STOP 2 Select H W Test under Mode and write the J Set network configuration setting in CC IE Field configuration window pa ra m ete r to th e C P U m od u e A Network Type Start I O No y Network Parameter MELSECNET CC IE Ethernet Module Configuration UD Project window gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt Ethernet CC IE Field gt Select Ethernet under Network Type Necessary Setting No Setting Already Set Set if it is nmeeded No Setting Already Set Start IJO No Valid Module During Other Station Access 1 v Please input 16 point unit HEX to start I O No in which module is mounted ancel 3 Resetting the CPU module starts the test Test time is approximately five seconds The RUN and OPEN LEDs turn on during the test 4 Check the LED of the E71 after five seconds When the test is running normally the RUN LED turns on If the test fails the RUN and ERR LEDs turn on If an error is detected in the hardware test H W test the following cause is possible The error information is stored in Error log area address E5 in the buffer memory e E71 RAM ROM error Point If the test fails perform it again If it fails again there may be a hardware problem with the E71 Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 323 sjso 9NSOUBEeIg 19S 9 xIpuaddy 1591 M H 159 SJempleH z 9
193. e Check the canceled protocol in the control data of the C404 y Protocol cancel request error ECPRTCL instruction execution count result and eliminate the cause of the cancellation e Correct the specified protocol number and execute the C405y Protocol number setting error protocol again e Correct the number of protocols to be executed C406y Continuous protocol execution count setting error l l continuously and execute the protocol again e Correct the specified connection number and execute the protocol again C407 y Connection number setting error l l e Correct the connection setting of the specified connection number and execute the protocol again e Check if the cable is disconnected e Correct the connection setting of the specified connection number and execute the protocol again e Check that there is no error in the connected device C4104 Receive wait timeout error e Check that the sending from the connected device is not interrupted e Check that there is no data lost due to a receive error e Check that there is no error in the data packet sent by the connected device e Check the data sent by the connected device e To send data that exceeds 2046 bytes from the connected C4114 Packet size error we device divide the data into several parts and send them separately 288 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING Error code Error description Action e Check the maximum allowable data length and spec
194. e LEDs on the E71 0000 Off H W LED ani 0001 On Information COM ERR BUF to Indicates the connection statuses of the connection numbers 1 to 16 0000 Open not completed BUF16 0001 Open completed NET NO Indicates the network No of the E71 GRP NO Indicates the group No of the E71 ST NO Indicates the station number of the E71 Indicates the mode of the E71 0000 Online MODE 0001 Offline 0002 Self loopback test 0003 H W test Indicates the operating status of the E71 which has been set with a programming tool b15 b9 b8 b7 b6 bd b4 b3 b2 b b0 ws ofofo wo wo Information A ii A j A i 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 Communication data code setting 4 Send frame setting CONFIG 0 Communications in a binary code 0 Ethernet frame 1 Communications in an ASCII code 1 IEEE 802 3 frame 2 Initial open method setting 5 Setting of write enable disable at RUN time 0 No parameter setting 0 Disable start up according to the sequence program 1 Enable 1 Parameter setting 6 Initial timing setting start up according to the parameters 0 Do not wait for OPEN 3 TCP Existence confirmation setting Communications impossible at STOP time O Use the Ping 1 Always wait for OPEN 1 Use the KeepAlive Communication possible at STOP time 292 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16 10 How to Turn Off the COM ERR LED The COM ERR LED turns on when an error occurs during communications with the connected device The COM ERR LED does not turn
195. e Specify the channel number from 1 to 8 e Change the channel number A channel number currently in use was specified e Perform communications again after the current communications are completed e The network number or PC number is outside the allowable range e Correct the network number or PC number e A response from the programmable controller CPU is e Check the programmable controller CPU operation faulty e Perform the open process e Check the operation of the connected device The open process of the TCP connection has not been eted e After sending a close request FIN from the connected completed d device to the E71 perform the open process again and wait for 500ms or more Because the close process is in process using the CLOSE e Perform the open process and send the request instruction a send request cannot be accepted e Follow the procedure below 1 Check if the Ethernet module the power supply module and the CPU module are properly connected 2 Check if the operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the CPU module 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the System error The OS detected an error manual for each module Ifthe actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative x talas e Open the communication line The specified communica
196. e area CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Initial value Connection No 11 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 Connection No 12 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 Connection No 13 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 Connection No 14 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 Remote password Connection No 15 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 function monitoring Connection No 16 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 area Auto open UDP port The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 No 1 No 1 FTP transmission port The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 e o AE Log counter HTTP response code 100 to 199 Log counter HTTP response code 200 to 299 Log counter HTTP response code 300 to 399 Log counter HTTP response code 400 to 499 Log counter HTTP response code 500 to 599 Error log block 1 Error log block 2 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 3 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Programming tool setting applicability x x x x x x x MELSOFT application transmission port UDP The bit configuration is the same as Connection MELSOFT application transmission port TCP The bit configuration is the same as Connection 47 S9ssaJppe AJOWSOUW J9SJHNQ JO ITZ GE Aowa yng S E
197. e command SData Encoding ASCII GetBytes 900000FFO3FF000018000A04010000D 0000000005 Send the data Me Ajsock Send SData MsgBox Send completion MsgBoxStyle Information Read the response from the PLC CPU Me Ajsock Receive RData MsgBox Encoding ASCll GetString RData MsgBoxStyle Information End Sub Private Sub Command3_Click ByVal eventSender As System Object ByVal eventArgs As System EventArgs Handles Command3 Click Close the TCP UDP connection socket disconnect the line Me Ajsock Shutdown Net Sockets SocketShutdown Both Me Ajsock Close MsgBox The disconnection was successful MsgBoxStyle Information State Me Ajsock Connected End Sub APPENDICES Private Sub Command4_Click ByVal eventSender As System Object ByVal eventArgs As System EventArgs Handles Command4 Click End the program End End Sub Private Sub Command5_Click ByVal eventSender As System Object ByVal eventArgs As System EventArgs Handles Command5 Click Check the connection state If State Then MsgBox Connected Else MsgBox Closed End If End Sub End Class o1seg Jensi USUAA z 6 Xipueddy Bog ajduwes 6 xipuaddy pesn SI LAN y 9PIS Paj9auuoy ay UO We 359 Appendix 10 Checking the Serial Number Function Version and MAC address 1 Checking the serial number and function version The serial number and function version can be checked on the rating plate or with the system monitor R
198. e controller CPU If an error exists take the action required to correct it e Replace the power supply module programmable controller CPU or intelligent function module e Check that the programmable controller CPU and each intelligent function module are properly connected e Check that the programmable controller CPU is not in the reset status e Check if an error exists in the programmable controller CPU If an error exists take the action required to correct it e Replace the power supply module programmable controller CPU or intelligent function module e Check that the programmable controller CPU and each intelligent function module are properly connected e Check that the programmable controller CPU is not in the reset status e Check if an error exists in the programmable controller CPU If an error exists take the action required to correct it e Replace the power supply module programmable controller CPU or intelligent function module e Check that the programmable controller CPU and each intelligent function module are properly connected e Check that the programmable controller CPU is not in the reset status e Check if an error exists in the programmable controller CPU If an error exists take the action required to correct it e Replace the power supply module programmable controller CPU or intelligent function module CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING Error code Error description Action e Check that
199. e data again and check the receipt of a response 267 S17 P09 10114 2 94 oww J19JNQ y Ul P3J0 S SIPOI 10114 9L Error code Error description Action e In communications using an auto open UDP port or communications using a fixed buffer in the No e Correct the data length Procedure control method there is an error in the data C04Dy ae wae e Correct the text size so that the text data size is within the length specified in the application data of the message receive buffer memory size received by the Ethernet module e Not all the receive data can be stored When ASCII Code has been selected in the e Select Binary Code in the Ethernet operation setting communication data code setting in the Ethernet operation Then restart the Ethernet module to perform C050 setting ASCII code data which cannot be converted into communications again binary code data has been sent from the connected e Check and correct the data sent from the connected device device and send it again C051 The number of read write points is outside the allowable e Correct the number of read write points and send the data e range to the Ethernet module again C052 The number of read write points is outside the allowable e Correct the number of read write points and send the data s range to the Ethernet module again C053 The number of read write points is outside the allowable e Correct the number of read write points and send
200. e following is the parameter setting for data sending Network Parameter Ethernet Open Setting Module No 1 Send o Procedure w Disable x No Confirm 0800 a UDP E E E E El E _ E p gt E E Lala lelefelalefele le lalola lefelo lalala lafela lufele le lalola lalo lalala lalola Jufefe le lalola alo AEREA KRER ER MENEM COKER KOE lalala lafela Jufefe le lalola ale Protocol Select UDP Fixed Buffer Select Send Fixed Buffer Communication Select No Procedure Existence Confirmation Select No Confirm Destination IP Address Set FFFFFFFFy _ 142 CHAPTER 12 COMMUNICATIONS USING A FIXED BUFFER 2 When receiving data The following is the parameter setting for data receiving a a Network Parameter Ethernet Open Setting Module No 1 BEHEA IP Address Port Mo Input Format Fixed Buffer Pairing Existence Host Station Destination Destination 0201 Broadeest Tonether JL__FFF EEN O O O a a MIP Address and Port Mo will be displayed by the selected Format Please enter the value according to the selected number Protocol Select UDP Fixed Buffer Select Receive Fixed Buffer Communication Select No Procedure Existence Confirmation Select No Confirm Destination IP Address Set FFFFFFFFy Destination Port No Set FFFFp Bulnes Joyoueled 2821 SUOIJEDIUNWILUOZ ISe9peolg 8 21 143 12 8 3 Precautions This section
201. e intelligent function module Doing so may cause malfunction of the programmable controller system Design Precautions CAUTION O Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power cables Keep a distance of 100mm or more between them Failure to do so may result in malfunction due to noise When changing the operating status of the CPU module such as remote RUN STOP from the external device select Always wait for OPEN Communication possible at STOP time for the Initial timing setting in the network parameter The communication line will be closed when Do not wait for OPEN Communications impossible at STOP time is selected and the remote STOP is executed from the external device Consequently the CPU module cannot reopen the communication line and the external device cannot execute the remote RUN Installation Precautions N CAUTION O Use the programmable controller in an environment that meets the general specifications in the Safety Guidelines included with the MELSEC L series CPU module Failure to do so may result in electric shock fire malfunction or damage to or deterioration of the product O To interconnect modules engage the respective connectors and securely lock the module joint levers until they click Incorrect interconnection may cause malfunction failure or drop of the module O Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the
202. e oe ae process process process process Initial normal completion signal X19 address 5000H Executed UINI instruction Completion device Completion device 1 Reinitialization specification address 1FH b15 i Processing reinitialization Y Internal process of the E71 CE Y reinitialization Initializing the module e The ZP UINI instruction is executed on the rising edge OFF gt ON of the reinitialization command Point To re initialize the E71 note the following e Terminate all data communications with connected devices check that all connections are closed then re initialize the E71 e Do not perform a reinitialization process using both direct writing to the buffer memory and the UINI instruction Also do not request another reinitialization process while reinitialization is being performed e When the IP address of the E71 has been changed reset that of the connected device as well If the connected device retains the MAC address of the destination device the communications may not be continued after the IP address of the E71 has been changed 228 CHAPTER 15 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 4 Errors If a dedicated instruction ends with an error Completion device D1 1 turns on and the error code is stored in Completion status S1 1 5 Program example The following pages show sample programs that change
203. e same as Connection No 1 49 Address Decimal Application Initial value Hexadecimal 21856 to 21875 55604 to 55734 Connection No 9 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 21876 to 21895 55744 to 55874 Connection No 10 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 21896 to 21915 55884 to 559B Connection No 11 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 21916 to 21935 559Cy to 55AF y Predefined protocol Connection No 12 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 support function 21936 to 21955 execution status 55B0 to 55C3 check area Connection No 13 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 H H 21956 to 21975 55C4 to 55D7p Connection No 14 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 21976 to 21995 55D8 to 55EB Connection No 15 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 21996 to 22015 55ECy to 55FF yy 22016 to 22559 S 5600 to 581Fy 7 area a O tati rt N 0 5820 wn station port No H Destination IP address Connection No 16 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 22561 and 22562 58214 to 58224 22563 o Lar 5823 Destination Port No Ou H 22564 5824 Open error code 0H H 22565 Connection 0 5825 No 9 Fixed buffer sending error code 22566 5826 Connection end code On H 22567 Fixed buffer communication time 0 58274 Maximum val
204. e size of the message sent by the E71 is greater than 1460 bytes The number of TCP segment transmission when communications are performed on a different line The Maximum Segment Size is at least 536 bytes on another line via a dialup router or other communication device and the number of TCP Segment transmission is as follows e n 1 when the size of the message sent by the E71 is 536 bytes or less SS 9O0ld Jen y xipuaddy e n 2 when the size of the message sent by the E71 is greater than 536 bytes and no more than 1072 bytes e n 3 when the size of the message sent by the E71 is greater than 1072 bytes and no more than 1608 bytes ssaxoJd jeu y Bumnas y xipueddy 303 e When a communication failure occurs due to a problem such as noise change the value so that the number of retries may increase The number of retries is obtained using the following formula When using the default values 3 60 20 Number of retries TCP ULP timer value TCP resend timer value Ex When the number of retries is three and data sending fails a data sending error occurs at the timing shown in the figure below in communications using the fixed buffer BUFSND instruction gt 1 scan BUFSND instruction Completion device 1 E71 Data 1st retry 2nd retry 3nd retry command A A A Lat _ _ _ Ip t Im TCP ULP timeout value A TCP resend timer value The time at which data are sent when AC
205. ease consult SI SPOJY 10114 2 94 your local Mitsubishi representative COD0O Incorrect data length was specified e Correct the specified data length CO0D1y The number of resends is incorrect e Correct the number of resends COD2y The arrival monitoring time is incorrect e Correct the arrival monitoring time e Check the specified value for the communication The number of relay stations in CC Link IE Controller destination COD3y Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H and e Correct the settings in the Station No lt gt IP information MELSECNET 10 exceeded the allowable range for the stations between the own station and the AJOW SOW JONG y Ul P3J0 S SSPOd 10114 9L communication destination e Check the specified value for the communication The number of relay stations in CC Link IE Controller destination COD4 Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H and e Correct the settings in the Station No lt gt IP information MELSECNET 10 exceeded the allowable range for the stations between the own station and the communication destination COD5y The number of retries is incorrect e Correct the number of retries e Correct the settings for the communication destination COD6y The network number or station number is incorrect e Correct the specified value for the communication destination 273 Error code Error description COD7 COD8 COD9 CODA CODB CODCy CODD
206. eceive or when the existence of a connected device cannot be checked within the time specified by the destination alive check timer the time calculated based on the destination existence confirmation starting interval timer value destination existence confirmation interval timer value and Destination existence confirmation resending time the instruction ends abnormally Point When variables are included in receive packet expected packet elements variable data are not verified Receive packets expected packets can be specified up to 16 When multiple receive packets expected packets are specified the received data are verified with the registered receive packet expected packet in order of registration When the receive packet expected packet is matched to the data the receive process is completed The following verification is not performed The receive packet number which is matched in the verification is stored in the control data of the ECPRTCL instruction and the buffer memory For the error occurred when the communication ends abnormally refer to the error code stored in the buffer memory 237 Page 264 Section 16 7 3 APPENDICES 3 When the communication type is Send amp Receive When the packet is sent once and the sending completes normally the status of the E71 changes to the receive wait status The process completes when the data received from a connected device match the receive packet expected packet a
207. eceiving side ejep voyeoIddy z 9 z ewo eq 9z1 137 12 7 Pairing Open Pairing open is an opening method that connects the own station with the connected device using only one port by pairing the receive and send connections for communications using a fixed buffer 12 7 1 Applications Enabling the pairing open allows data communications to be performed with two connections by performing the open process for one port MC protocol communications and communications using a random access buffer can be also performed using paring opened connections TCP IP or UDP IP communications Send data Connection No 1 Fixed buffer to receive data eon as Connected device E71 Receive data Connection No 2 Fixed buffer to send data Point O Connected devices where communications can be performed using the pairing open method are those in Ethernet where an E71 is connected and those connected using the router relay function O The open close processes in the receive connection where the pairing open has been enabled automatically perform the open close processes in the next connection send connection 138 CHAPTER 12 COMMUNICATIONS USING A FIXED BUFFER 12 7 2 Parameter setting The following is the pairing open setting Network Parameter Ethernet Open Setting Module No 1 IP Address Port No Input Format DEC v Communication Confirmation Port No IP Address Port No IP Address and Port No will be d
208. ed the data send process ends even if the communication line between a CPU module and the connected device is not connected due to cable disconnection or other causes It is recommended to set an original communication procedure to send receive data 31np390 4 Bulipuas geq Ez 123 12 4 Data Receiving Procedure This section describes how an E71 receives data from the connected device The following methods for receiving data are offered e Data receiving using the main program BUFRCV instruction e Data receiving using an interrupt program BUFRCVS instruction 12 4 1 Data receiving using the main program BUFRCV instruction A receive process in the main program is performed using the BUFRCV instruction 1 Procedure exists The following is the data receive process performed in the fixed buffer number 1 area for the connection number 1 Initial process Open process Receiving data Sending a response l l l Initial normal completion l signal X19 Open completion signal l address 5000H b0 BUFRCV instruction 0 gt BUFRCV instruction completion device e 4 scan BUFRCYV instruction Ls completion device 1 l Fixed buffer reception status signal Address 5005H b0 Z S ACK g TCP only Confirm the normal completion of the initial process Initial normal completion signal X19 ON Establish a connection between the E71 a
209. ed devices data can be sent sequentially however switching the connected devices before sending receiving data is recommended to prevent communication problems When a connection opened using the UDP IP protocol is used change the setting values in the communication address setting area before sending or receiving data to switch the connected devices 122 CHAPTER 12 COMMUNICATIONS USING A FIXED BUFFER 2 No procedure The following is the data send process performed in the fixed buffer number 1 area for the connection number 1 Initial process Open process Sending data Initial normal completion E signal X19 Open completion signal address 5000H b0 BUFSND instruction BUFSND instruction completion device BUFSND instruction completion device 1 ACK TCP only a Sending data Confirm the normal completion of the initial process Initial normal completion signal X19 ON Establish a connection between the E71 and the connected device and confirm the normal completion of the open process of the connection number 1 Execute the BUFSND instruction The data is sent The send data in the fixed buffer number 1 is sent to the connected device by the send data length The E71 stops sending data After the data send process abnormally ends execute the BUFSND instruction again to repeat the send process Point During UDP IP communications when the internal process of an E71 is normally complet
210. ee Ae 181 1430 Palameter Seuings a scr iz ip hic oi wt Maser aoay stim ie a Wiis hha aoa Ah iceman sth ie A ie oth Pe Soca end Ah ae 183 14 4 Hub Connection Status Monitor Function 0 00000 ee 184 145 IP Address in Use Detection Function 0 0000 eee eee ee eee nae 185 14 67 AliVe Check FUNCION airis aria ra 187 CHAPTER 15 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 189 15 1 List of Dedicated Instructions oooooooooooonrnron ee 189 15 2 Parameter Settings for Using Dedicated InstructiONS o ooooooooooooo 190 15 2 1 When using data link instructions 4 ubico ir da id 190 15 3 Precautions for Dedicated Instructions 0 0000 ee 191 15 4 Organization of the Dedicated Instruction Sections o o o oooooooooooooo 191 1830 ZROPEN is 2085 eds a dos ta ys ove a eres oie ne de hoe ee oe hae de ae Seals DL 192 10 ZR bs be orea Rene o ara td SRE e ias ey ek dl a is od 196 Or GRECPRICL sscitueeeeutet eee t ope a is he 199 19 0 ZP BUPSND y e tidad td eee SA 209 SA EAN A A RN 213 TAA BUFRO V S sabe AS A A A he E eee oR 217 y ZPERRGCUR 4420 esol hs ee ee A ees 219 TI ZRERRR D A ee pica ets aetna Bie Sete Rata he Bie aes nica Rata ae eae Mabe eee Be 223 ISS ARI a oi toto AES pate tated ee ets Sele eee RGA Re 226 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 232 161 Before TToubleshoOound sit ai Shee rae ee ieee OA ee tie Ai eeee 232 10 2 TroubleshoounG Proceaure isis c2etannn ou gehuvee
211. efer to the following MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 2 Checking the MAC address The MAC address can be checked on the rating plate or with the Ethernet diagnostics For how to check the MAC address on the rating plate refer to the following MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection To use the Ethernet diagnostics refer to Page 290 Section 16 8 in this manual 360 APPENDICES Appendix 11 External Dimension Diagram This appendix provides the external dimension diagrams of an E71 LJ71E71 100 RUN INIT OPEN ERR COM ERR 45 DIN rail center 10BASE T 100BASE TX 45 Unit mm 361 wesbeig uoIsuawIg eulajx3 xipueddy Appendix 12 ascii Code List The following is the ASCII code table O E 0111 1000 1111 Higher 4 bits BEBER a E a Hexadecimal Sa o 2 33 Y 362 INDEX 0 to 9 100BASE TX Ccomecti0N 57 TOOMDDS DUD 0 sordid ina id Bees es 57 10BASE T comnecti0N 58 10Mbps hub 58 4E frame sick Bsc awh tb ict a ee ee eA 85 Abnormal codes o o ooooooooooo oo 263 A compatible 1E frame oo 85 Active ODED Ai heath tee cee ds tng aca She arte dee ete Hebe ae 14 Alive check function ooooo o 187 Always wait for OPEN communication possible at STOP Meis 67 Applicable Software
212. egisters set for each local device and program cannot be used 1 Setting data Setting data Description Set Setby Data type Unf Un Start I O number of the E71 00 to FEy The first two digits BIN 16 bit character of the three digit I O number User string S1 Connection number 1 to 16 BIN 16 bit D1 Start number of the device that stores receive data Device name 2 Receive data Setting Device Setting data Set by Stores the data length a N U C Tl D O lt O of the data read from Procedure exists a using 1 to 1017 the fixed buffer data a binary code Number of words AN en Procedure exists communications using 4 to 508 D1 0 d ii ed i an ASCII code Number of words System eng uffer communications the j No procedure communications using a data length is the p g 1 to 2046 number of words or binary code Number of bytes the number of bytes D1 1 Stores the data read from the fixed buffer data area starting from to Receive data System D1 n the smallest address 217 3 Functions e This instruction reads the receive data for fixed buffer communications of the connection specified by S1 for the module specified by Un CPU module E71 Fixed buffer data area Operation while the BUFRCVS instruction is being executed Program Poca END process Interrupt program Executed I I Storing the receive data I e The Z BUFRCVS instruction is e
213. eive process The TCP connection is closed Is the TCP connection open Receive the remaining response messages Were the data received within the monitoring timer value Timeout of the monitoring timer value The received data size is insufficient Check the received data size If the response message to the next request has been received Response message process Have all the received messages been processed P Point For Ethernet communications the TCP socket functions are used inside the personal computer However these functions do not have any limit Therefore when the send function is executed once to transmit data the receiving side needs to execute the recv function once or more to read the data send and recv are not proportional to 1 1 execution For this reason the receive process above is required APPENDICES 2 When the receive process of the connected device is not supported When the receive process of the connected device is not the one shown in 1 the following may occur when Enable TCP Maximum Segment Size Option transmission is set for communications e When batch reading is executed from the connected device using the MC protocol data cannot be normally read e After replacing the E71 which does not support the TCP Maximum Segment Size Option transmission function with the alternative module supporting the function data cannot be nor
214. elect Ethernet under Network Type gt button 1 Format e Communications using a binary code Application data area command message data Maximum of 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 1017 words Text Communication Subheader Start address Pata length command request setting none at read source request Text response none at write Communication Subheader End code request destination request 4 bvt Maximum of ane Toyte 1017 words Application data area response e Communications using an ASCII code Application data area command message Maximum of 4 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes 1016 words Text Data length command Communication Subheader Start address setting oneal reaa request source Ka H L 1304304 H L H L request Text Communication response request destination Subheader End code eee SA H L HI L request IN 2 bytes 2 bytes Maximum of O 1016 words gt Application data area response 158 CHAPTER 13 COMMUNICATIONS USING A RANDOM ACCESS BUFFER 2 Subheader Because an E71 automatically adds and deletes a header the user setting is not required b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO 1 171 0 0 0 0 1 00 Only for command none at response L gt Command response type When communications are performed using the random access buffer this format is used For data reading 61H For data writing
215. element except for when Non verified Reception is placed at the end of the packet elements e Multiple Non verified Reception elements are placed in the Length calculating range while a Length element is not placed e ANon verified Reception element is placed before a Length element in the Length calculating range 106 CHAPTER 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING THE PREDEFINED PROTOCOL 11 4 Execution Condition of Predefined Protocol Communication Communications using the predefined protocol can be executed when Predefined protocol ready X1D is on This section describes the operations of Predefined protocol ready X1D 1 When the power supply is on or reset The E71 checks the written protocol setting data when the power supply is on or reset If the protocol setting data is set correctly the E71 turns on Predefined protocol ready X1D then the protocols can be executed Predefined protocol ready X1D is used as an interlock signal when the protocols are executed If an error has occurred in the protocol setting data Predefined protocol ready X1D stays off and the error details are stored to the protocol setting data check area address 5320y to 533F yy If no protocol setting data has been set the E71 does not check the data and Predefined protocol ready X1D stays off The information about whether protocol setting data has been registered can be checked in Number of registered protocols address 53284 and Protocol registr
216. en receiving The receive data is stored to the data storage area in the order of the lower byte to the upper byte Sjuauua 7 JOHIEd E LL Lower Byte Upper Byte Unit of Stored Data When sending Each lower byte data in the data storage area is sent The E71 ignores data in the upper byte When receiving The receive data is stored to each lower byte in the data storage area The E71 stores 00y in the upper byte Lower Bytes Only When sending When Enable is selected data in the upper byte and lower byte are swapped by word 2 bytes and sent When Unit of Stored Data is Lower Byte Upper Byte and Data Length is an odd number of bytes the upper byte is sent at transmission of the last byte When Unit of Stored Data is Lower Bytes Only and Data Length is an odd number of bytes data without any byte swap is sent at Byte Swap Disable Enable transmission of the last byte When receiving When Enable is selected data in the upper byte and lower byte are swapped by word 2 bytes and sent When Unit of Stored Data is Lower Byte Upper Byte and Data Length is an odd number of bytes the last byte is stored to the upper byte When Unit of Stored Data is Lower Bytes Only and Data Length is an odd number of bytes the last byte is stored without any byte swap 103 Item Description Specify a start device to store variable value Available devices are as follows e Internal user 172 Input relay
217. eopening the connection that caused an open error e Powering off and on or resetting the CPU module Fixed buffer sending error code address 7Dy to C2y 5825y to 586A y The error codes generated when an error has occurred in data sending to the destination during communications using a fixed buffer in the connection with the connected device are stored A sending error code is cleared when the next data sending is completed normally Connection end code address 7Ey to C3y 5826 to 586B The codes returned in the responses from the destination during communications using a fixed buffer in the connection with the connected device are stored in binary Process the end codes in the responses according to the destination CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 5 Error log area address E0y to 1FF The following table lists the details of the error log area The buffer memory addresses of the error log block are those of the error log block 1 For the addresses of the error log block 2 and later refer to the list of buffer memory addresses gt Page 35 Section 3 5 2 Buffer memory name The number of errors registered in the error log block area is stored When the number of Number of errors ESy 4 errors reaches 65536 the count stops at FFFFy 65535 The number of the error log block where the latest error log is registered is stored e 0 No error no registration of error log e 1 or more The number of the error log block where
218. er names are correct C17Ey An error was returned from the DNS server l m l l e Check with the network administrator if the DNS function of the server specified in the DNS setting is properly operating e Check if the IP address of the DNS server is correct e Check if the mail server names SMTP server names and POP server names are correct C17Fy An error was returned from the DNS server l a l l e Check with the network administrator if the DNS function of the server specified in the DNS setting is properly operating The device specified in Condition Device in News Correct the device settings in the PLC parameter window C180y Setting is outside the range set in the Device tab of the and specify the condition devices within the range of the PLC parameter window device settings Try again If the same error occurs the Ethernet module may have a C1A0y An illegal request was made Nal hardware error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative C1A2y A response to the request could not be received e Check and correct the response waiting time C1A4y A request or subrequest is incorrect e Correct the request and subrequest C1A5y The specified target station or clear target is incorrect e Correct the specified target station or clear target e Specify the connection number within the range of 1 to 16 C1A6y The specified connection number is incorrect e Do not select the connection number 8 or 16 when using
219. errors o E ES 228 ay J rror log write pointer E44 g p 40 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Programming Initial value tool setting applicability Address Decimal Application Hexadecimal E E de end cod x rror code end code ES a Subhead x ubheader E6 C d cod x ommand code E7y 232 a e onnection No ERE Error log block an O tati rt N wn station port No E94 p 234 and 235 TN EAy and EBy estination IP address 2 Destination Port N x estination Port No ECH 237 aes stem area _ EDy y signal Error log block 2 The bit confi tion is th Error log block 1 EE to F6 rror log block 2 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 ee Error log block 3 The bit confi tion is th Error log block 1 F74 to FFy rror log block 3 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 ee Error log block 4 The bit confi tion is th Error log block 1 1004 to 1084 rror log block 4 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 a Error OR Error log block 5 The bit confi tion is th Error log block 1 1094 to 111p rror log area cara rror log block 5 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 o Error log block 6 The bit confi tion is th Error log block 1 1124 to 11Ay rror log block 6 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 aes Error log block 7 The bit confi tion is th Error log block 1 11B to 1234 rror log block 7 The bit configuration is the same
220. errupt program Configure the parameter setting on a programming tool to start up an interrupt program E71 CPU module lt Program gt Control number Interrupt Connection No 2 interrupt pointer Ixx ZBUFROVS Setting SI No Setting box Z BUFRCVS of 2 E of 1 50 to 15 Connection No 16 255 1 Interrupt pointer setting The following is a setting example Connection No 1 Project window gt Parameter gt PLC Parameter gt PLC System gt button Intelligent Function Module Interrupt Pointer Setting Start Wo Count OOOO y od Set the start number of the interrupt pointer used ina Interrupt Pointer Start No 50 to 255 PLC Side program Interrupt Pointer Count Set the number of interrupt pointers used in a program 1 to 16 Start I O No Set the start I O number of an E71 0000y to OFE0y Among maximum 16 interrupt SI numbers control numbers on the Ethernet module side to be set in the interrupt Oto 15 Intelligent Module Side Start SI No program set the smallest numbers 0 to 15 130 CHAPTER 12 COMMUNICATIONS USING A FIXED BUFFER 2 Interrupt settings The following is a setting example KO Project window gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt Ethernet CC IE Field gt Select Ethernet under Network Type gt button Network Parameter Ethernet Interrupt Settings Module No 1 afk Input Format teca oeveno Fes termination
221. es handling of Nuclear or Hazardous Materials or Chemicals Mining and Drilling and or other applications where there is a significant risk of injury to the public or property Notwithstanding the above restrictions Mitsubishi may in its sole discretion authorize use of the PRODUCT in one or more of the Prohibited Applications provided that the usage of the PRODUCT is limited only for the specific applications agreed to by Mitsubishi and provided further that no special quality assurance or fail safe redundant or other safety features which exceed the general specifications of the PRODUCTs are required For details please contact the Mitsubishi representative in your region INTRODUCTION Thank you for purchasing the Mitsubishi MELSEC L series programmable controllers This manual describes the operating procedure system configuration parameter settings functions programming and troubleshooting of the LJ71E71 100 Ethernet interface module hereafter referred to as E71 Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and develop familiarity with the functions and performance of the MELSEC L series programmable controller to handle the product correctly When applying the program examples introduced in this manual to an actual system ensure the applicability and confirm that it will not cause system control problems Please make sure that the end users read this manual rm Unless otherwise
222. es and port numbers of the E71 in the own station as well as those of connected devices Is the IP address of the own station E71 the same as that of the receive data request destination NO Is the network address subnet address in the IP address of the own station E71 the same as the network address subnet address of the received data Are all the bits of the host address of the received data 1 NO Is Destination IP address FFFFFFFFH Simultaneous Broadcast Is Destination IP address the same as that of the receive data request source YES Simultaneous Broadcast Is Destination Port No FFFFH Is Destination Port No the same as that of the receive data request source YES Simultaneous Broadcast SUOIJEOSIUNLWLWOD Isespeolg 8 ZL YES sanpaxo Jd BulAisoes Bulpuas gZ Fixed buffer reception status signal address The received data is ignored discarded 5005H turns on because it has not been sent to the own station The application data of the received data is stored in the fixed buffer 4 When all the bits of the area expressing the host address of the IP address of the receive data request destination are 1 proceed to YES 060000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000080 141 12 8 2 Parameter setting The following is the parameter setting for broadcast communications 1 When sending data Th
223. es on the same subnetwork must have the common subnet mask When not managed by the subnetwork the connected devices need not have subnet masks Set the network address of the corresponding class 169 sBuljes Jajaweled ZL PL uonouny Aejey Jamoy pL 2 Default router IP address Set the IP address of the router default router when the E71 communicates with the connected devices on other Ethernet networks via a router other than the one specified in the router information Set the value that satisfies the following conditions e Condition 1 The IP address class is any of A B and C e Condition 2 The subnet address of the default router is the same as that of the E71 on the own station e Condition 3 The host address bits are not all 0 or all 1 Point If the corresponding subnet address does not exist in the router information when the connection is opened or data communications are performed communications are performed via the default router 3 Router information a Subnet address Set the network address or subnet address of the connected device when the E71 communicates with the connected devices on other Ethernet networks via a router other than the default router Set the value that satisfies the following conditions e Condition 1 The IP address class is any of A B and C e Condition 2 The host address bits are all 0 1 If the class network address of the E71 on the own station differs f
224. et operation setting 2 gt Page 66 Section 7 1 3 e Open setting gt Page 68 Section 7 1 4 Network Parameter Ethernet Open Setting Module No 1 ax IP Address and Port No will be displayed by the selected format Please enter the value according to the selected number Cancel Fixed Buffer Select the communication method for communications using a fixed buffer For Procedure Exist Communication SLMP communications select Procedure Exist Bulnes Jajaweled y OL 91 10 5 Available command list The following table lists the commands that can be executed from a connected device to the E71 The O part in the Subcommand column varies depending on the specified device For details on each command refer to the following SLMP Reference Manual Item Command Subcommand Description Type 0001 Reads values in 1 point units from bit devices consecutive device numbers Read 0401 UE Reads values in 16 point units from bit devices consecutive device numbers e Reads values in 1 word units from word devices consecutive device numbers 00011 Writes values to bit devices consecutive device numbers in 1 point units Write 1401 0000 e Writes values to bit devices consecutive device numbers in 16 point units e Writes values to word devices consecutive device numbers in 1 word units Specifies a device number to read the device value Discrete device numbers can be used Read Random 0403 0000
225. etting b1 0 Binary Code 1 ASCII Code e TCP existence confirmation setting b4 O Use the Ping 1 Use the KeepAlive Eiheretoneration e Send frame setting b5 S1 5 seii 0 Ethernet 1 IEEE 802 3 e Setting of write enable disable at RUN time b6 0 Disable 1 Enable e Initial timing setting b8 0 Do not wait for OPEN Communications impossible at STOP time As listed in the left User 1 Always wait for OPEN Communications possible at STOP time S1 6 S1 7 System area 221 4 The E71 enables data exchange to be resumed by clearing the address information of the connected device retained in the E71 and performing a reinitialization process Initial normal completion signal X19 turns on 3 Functions e This instruction re initializes the module specified by Un e Completion of the UINI instruction can be checked with Completion device D1 0 and D1 1 Item Description Turns on at the END process of the scan where the UINI instruction is completed and turns Completion device D1 0 off at the next END process Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the UINI instruction e Normal completion Stays off and does not change Completion device D1 1 a e Abnormal end Turns on at the END process of the scan where the UINI instruction is completed and turns off at the next END process Operation while the UINI instruction is being executed Close process Program ates d
226. f the connected device e Check if a send request is being repeatedly issued COC1y The transmission interval of UDP is too short i ie a e Increase the send interval e Follow the procedure below 1 Check if the Ethernet module the power supply module and the CPU module are properly connected 2 Check if the operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the COC2 System error The OS detected an error CPU module 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the SI BPO 10114 2 91 manual for each module If the actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Follow the procedure below 1 Check if the Ethernet module the power supply AJOW SOW JONG y Ul P3J0 S SSPOd 10114 9L module and the CPU module are properly connected 2 Check if the operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the CO0C3y System error The OS detected an error CPU module 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual for each module Ifthe actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative The UINI instruction has been executed during COC4 a e Execute the UINI instruction after closing all connections communications 2 1 Error code Er
227. fer number 2 When the receive data length and the receive data are completely read out a response is sent to the uolonsIsul SADYIINY9 wepod zdnia u1 ue Buisn Buia e1eQq Z y zL destination End the interrupt program to restart the main program 4 If the data receive process is abnormally ended the E71 does not return a response 127 128 2 No procedure The following is the receive process performed in the fixed buffer number 2 area for the connection number 2 Initial Open process process Receiving data Initial normal completion signal X19 Open completion signal A address 5000H b1 BUFRCVS instruction In interrupt process ACK TCP only jo O 2 oO O a Cycle Cycle m IH Program Scan pies Scan Interrplprocess Confirm the normal completion of the initial process Initial normal completion signal X19 ON Establish a connection between the E71 and the connected device and confirm the normal completion of the open process of the connection number 1 Receive data from the destination e Request the CPU module to start up the interrupt program The interrupt program starts up Execute the BUFRCVS instruction to read the receive data length and receive data from the fixed buffer number 1 End the interrupt program to restart the main program CHAPTER 12 COMMUNICATIONS USING A FIXED BUFFER 12 5 Parameter Setting Set the fo
228. finitely in the Protocol Detailed Setting the dedicated instruction is not completed until the data specified in the protocol setting is received 203 a N U m O V A O 204 4 Errors Completion device D 1 turns on and the error code is stored in Completion status S 1 in the following cases e When the setting value of the control data is abnormal e When an error is detected in the protocol setting data registered in GX Works2 e When an error has occurred in protocols the following protocols will not be executed e When a value other than Predefined protocol is set in Fixed Buffer Communication for connection No specified by n1 5 Program example For the program example refer to Page 110 Section 11 5 6 Canceling protocol execution A protocol can be canceled during its execution This function is used to terminate the protocol execution forcibly when a communication error occurs with the connected device a Execution method for cancel request Set the cancel request to Protocol cancellation specification address 54D3y Connection No 1 User Connection No n Protocol cancellation specification 1 Cancellation request 2 Cancel completed 54D3H when the value of n is 1 ie The E71 cancels the E71 protocols being executed in connection No n CHAPTER 15 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS b Operations after execution of cancel request Operations of the ECPRTCL instruction
229. flash ROM of the E71 protocol support function of GX Works2 Module Write Write to Module Writing 37 A OT Manufaci Packet _ Cancel Protocol Packet Sew Sending Connected device Connected device Lo Receiving 3 Executing protocols Data can be communicated with protocols appropriate to each connected device Execute protocols by dedicated instructions Multiple protocols can be executed by one dedicated instruction For the protocol setting method refer to the following GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Intelligent Function Module 94 CHAPTER 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING THE PREDEFINED PROTOCOL Point O The followings are the maximum numbers of protocols and packets that can be registered e Protocols Up to 128 e Packets Up to 256 e Packet data area size Up to 12288 bytes If once the number of packets reaches the upper limit protocols cannot be added even though the number of protocols has not reached the upper limit In addition if once the packet data area size reaches the upper limit protocols and packets cannot be added even though the numbers of protocols and packets have not reached the upper limit For details refer to the following GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Intelligent Function Module O From Connection No 1 to 16 are available O The Communication Data Code becomes Binary Code regardless of the setting 9
230. g OP using a fixed buffer Broadcast communications Communications using a random access buffer Router relay function Communications using an auto open UDP port Remote password Hub connection status monitor function IP address in use detection function Alive check function Description Reference An E71 can be connected with MELSOFT products such as Page 81 CHAPTER 8 a programming tool and MX Component and a GOT CPU module data can be read written from to connected Page 84 CHAPTER 9 devices Access to files can be also performed The connected device can read write data from to the buffer memory or device of an SLMP supporting device connected to the shared network with the E71 In addition the Page 88 CHAPTER 10 connected device can read write data from to the device of the CPU module where an E771 is connected Data can be sent received with protocols appropriate to each connected device The connected device side protocol can be easily selected Page 94 CHAPTER 11 or created edited from the Predefined Protocol Library of GX Works2 Any data is sent received between a CPU module and Page 119 CHAPTER 12 connected devices using the fixed buffer of an E71 Paring receiving sending connections enables data sI uonouny pee Sr UONOUNY EE communications with two connections by performing the Page 138 Section 12 7 open process for one port Broadcast communications are enable
231. g of the programming tool e Check if the send receive processes for I O signals and the BUFSND BUFRCYV instructions are not used for the same connection If so correct the program Correct the control data Check and correct the error If the action above does not solve the problem perform the following tests on the E71 to check for hardware error e Hardware test gt Page 323 Appendix 6 2 e Self loopback test 2 gt Page 322 Appendix 6 1 244 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16 6 10 Communications using a random access buffer cannot be performed The following table lists how to troubleshoot the problem when an E71 cannot perform communications using a random access buffer Check item Action e Open the connection with the connected device Has the connection with the connected device been opened Check if the open close process for I O signals and the OPEN CLOSE Check the corresponding bit of 5000 y in the buffer memory instructions are used together for the same connection If so correct the program Did the connected device send a command Send a command to the E71 e Check if the correct IP address was specified in the command If not Was a response returned to the device that had sent the correct the IP address and send the command again command e Check if the communication protocol TCP IP or UDP IP matches with that of the connected device If not correct it Is the end code of the response 0 Chec
232. g timer error OFF a Use prohibited Poi oint Do not use any use prohibited signal as an I O signal to the CPU module Doing so may cause malfunction of the programmable controller system rm The I O signals listed in this section are mainly applied when QnA series module programs are used For the L series the I O signals for intelligent function modules are turned on and off with dedicated instructions When QnA series module programs are used it is recommended to replace the signals with the dedicated instructions described in the section that describes the corresponding functions 0600000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000806 33 sjeubls O I 40 1817 y 3 5 Buffer Memory This section describes the E71 buffer memory 3 5 1 Configuration of the buffer memory This section describes a buffer memory configuration 1 Buffer memory address configuration A buffer memory area consists of 16 bits per address b15 b14 o13 b12 o11 o10 ba bs b7 ve bs ba b3 b2 bt bo 2 Buffer memory area configuration Buffer memory consists of user areas and system areas a User areas A user area is an area where a user writes or reads data A user area consists of a parameter area for the initial process and data communications an area for data communications and an area to store communication status and communication error data Data communications may take long if user areas are used
233. gnment Image 1 Connect the E71 to the line 1 Set the switch on the CPU module to STOP Select Self Loopback Test under Mode and write the parameter to the CPU module YD Project window gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt Ethernet CC IE Field gt Select Ethernet under Network Type Resetting the CPU module starts the test Test time is approximately five seconds The RUN and OPEN LEDs turn on during the test Check the LED of the E71 after five seconds When the test is running normally the RUN LED turns on If the test fails the RUN and ERR LEDs turn on When the line is not connected the self loopback test is not performed and ends normally If an error is detected in the self loopback test the following causes are possible The error information is stored in Error log area address E5 in the buffer memory E71 hardware error Ethernet line error Point There is no hardware related problem even when the self loopback test is executed while the destination is online Because 322 a packet collision occurs when there are many packets on the line the test may fail or may not be completed in five seconds In this case execute the test after stopping data communications between other devices APPENDICES Appendix 6 2 Hardware test H W Test The RAM and ROM of an E71 are checked 1 Operating procedure Use the following procedure 1 Set the switch on th
234. he connected devices 2 Selecting a connection for which the remote password check is performed A connection for which an entered remote password is checked can be selected using a parameter gt Page 183 Section 14 3 6 176 CHAPTER 14 OTHER FUNCTIONS 3 Stations that can be accessed when the remote password check is performed When the CPU module is protected with a remote password the stations accessible by the connected device and the LCP U stations that can perform the remote password unlock lock processes are limited to those in the same network The following shows an example of accessible stations When a remote password has been set in the LCPU on the station 1 1 and the remote password check has been set in 1 on the station 1 1 Station 1 2 1 Station A LCPU E71 225 E Network No 1 Ethernet E 2 Station 3 2 1 LCPU E71 aco B E71 Programming tool Ethernet Network No 2 Network No 3 Ethernet gt E Station 2 1 Station 2 2 Station 3 1 LCPU LCPU LCPU LJ E RR w 0 w D The station A is the only connected device that can perform an unlock lock process for 1 of the station 1 1 5 2 O Stations that can be accessed from the connected device after the remote password unlock process 3 2 Stations that can be accessed from the connected device without performing the remote password unlock D y jo process D H Z 8 Connected Target programmable controller station request destination oa oa device
235. he file in the CPU module where an E71 is connected Locks a fil that th ta of the file i t ch th i in the CP Open File 1827 0000 ocks a file so tha ed e file is not changed by other devices in the CPU module where an E71 is connected Read File Reads the data of a file from the CPU module where an E71 is connected Write File Writes the data to a file in the CPU module where an E71 is connected Close File Cancels the file lock by the open process Self Test Tests whether the communication with the E71 is normally executed or not Clear Error Turns off the COM ERR LED on the E71 SI PUELULOD aJqeIeay S O 93 CHAPTER 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING THE PREDEFINED PROTOCOL Data can be transferred between a connected device and the CPU module with a protocol appropriate to the connected device such as a measuring instrument or a bar code reader Device or buffer memory data can be taken into communication packets and thereby this protocol communications are suitable for data that may change in each communication The protocol setting required to communicate with the connected device can be configured in GX Works2 Protocols can be selected from the Predefined Protocol Library or can be created and edited This function is available only in the E71 with the serial number first five digits of 15042 or later 1 Setting protocols 2 Writing protocols Protocols can be set easily using the predefined Write the set protocols in the
236. he procedure of the remote password check performed by the E71 1 Communications in which an entered remote password is checked When the following parameters have been set for the E71 on the LCPU station the E71 checks a remote password for communication requests listed below e When a remote password has been set in the CPU module e When the connection where the E71 communicates with a connected device has been set as the target for the remote password check The E71 checks an entered remote password for a communication request addressed to the own station another station received from a connected device The E71 performs a send process upon the following send requests without checking an entered remote password e Send request from the CPU module on the own station such as communications using a fixed buffer Communication request from the connected device including the programming tool connected to the CPU module on the own station to send data to another station upon request from the CPU module LCPU _ A E71 Path checked using a remote password Ae Path not checked using a remote password l i Programming tool Remote password Programming tool A communication request from the connected device cannot be accepted because a remote password check has been a set If the remote password check has not been set the communication request is accepted and the E71 can communicate with t
237. he same as Router 1 Router 6 The bit configuration is the same as Router 1 Router 7 The bit configuration is the same as Router 1 Router 8 The bit configuration is the same as Router 1 System area meme Number of conversion table data Communication request destination source stations network number and station number Conversion External station Ethernet module IP address information No 1 System area O I S9ssaJppe JOU19Uuu JONG JO ISI ZSE Conversion information No 2 The bit configuration is the same as Conversion information No 1 to Conversion information No 64 The bit configuration is the same as Conversion information No 1 Subnet mask pattern for CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H and MELSECNET 10 routing System area Programming tool setting applicability O O O O O 43 Aowa yng S E Address Decimal Application Initial value Hexadecimal 944 to 949 Se TER 3B0 to 3B5 ogin name 950 to 953 gt ae 3B6 to 3B9 asswor 954 l o FTP setting area Command input monitoring timer 708 3BA 955 Programmable controller CPU monitoring timer Au 3BBy 956 to 1663 mn 3BC to 67F y ystem area a Data length a ata leng P Fixed buffer 1665 to 2687 No 1 E 681 H to ATFp IXe uffer data 7 2688 to 3711 A804 to E7Fy Fixed buffer No 2 The bit configuration is the same as Fixed buffer No 1 H H 3712
238. hed receive packet No 6 Matched receive packet No 7 Matched receive packet No 8 When the communication type of the third protocol executed includes receiving the matched receive packet number is stored When the communication type is Send Only 0 is stored If an error occurs to the third protocol executed 0 is stored When the number of protocols which are executed is less than 3 0 is stored When the communication type of the fourth protocol executed includes receiving the matched receive packet number is stored When the communication type is Send Only 0 is stored If an error occurs to the fourth protocol executed 0 is stored When the number of protocols which are executed is less than 4 0 is stored When the communication type of the fifth protocol executed includes receiving the matched receive packet number is stored When the communication type is Send Only 0 is stored If an error occurs to the fifth protocol executed 0 is stored When the number of protocols which are executed is less than 5 0 is stored When the communication type of the sixth protocol executed includes receiving the matched receive packet number is stored When the communication type is Send Only 0 is stored If an error occurs to the sixth protocol executed 0 is stored When the number of protocols which are executed is less than 6 0 is stored When the communication type of the seventh pr
239. here is an error in the checksum of the receive data when UDP is used The checksum in the header of the IP packet received is incorrect An error packet of ICMP was received An error packet of ICMP was received An IP assembly timeout error has occurred in the connected device An IP assembly timeout error has occurred The remaining part of the divided data could not be received and a timeout has occurred e Because there is no space in the internal buffer such as the IP header buffer data cannot be sent CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING Action e Check if the cable is disconnected e Perform the loopback test to check for an error in the line e Perform the self diagnostics test to check for an error in the Ethernet module e Correct the data length of the communication data e Because there may be congestion of packets on the line correct the settings of the initial process e Send the same data from the connected device again e Correct the checksum value sent from the connected device and send the correct value e Check the situation of the line such as noise the distance between the line and power cable and the grounding of each device e Correct the checksum value sent from the connected device and send the correct value e Check the situation of the line such as noise the distance between the line and power cable and the grounding of each device e Correct the checksum value sent from the
240. ibes the program execution environment data communication details and a sample program for when Visual Basic NET is used on the program of the connected device 1 Execution environment of the program example a CPU module side Item Description A model name of the LCPU in the E71 connected station LO2CPU E71 I O signal X Y00 to X Y1F E71 IP address C0 00 01 FDy 192 00 01 253 E71 port number 2000y Ethernet operation Refer to Page 352 Appendix 9 2 3 a Programming tool setting setting Open setting Refer to Page 352 Appendix 9 2 3 b b Connected device side Item Description Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System Operation environment Ver 2002 Service Pack2 Ethernet interface board model name WINSOCK compatible board Visual Basic NET 2003 manufactured by Microsoft Software development environment Corporation This setting is not required because the ARP function can be MAC address used IP address An arbitrary number is assigned Port number An arbitrary number is assigned c Communication protocol TCP IP is used 2 Outline of the program example a Program on the CPU module side Because parameters are set on the programming tool no program is required b Program on the connected device side Data DO to D4 in the CPU module are read out 351 o1seg Jensia USUAA z 6 Xipueddy p SN SI LAN y OPIS 999 PaJ9a3UuUO 94 UO We Boj ajduwes 6 xipuaddy
241. ice e Correct the execution conditions of the BUFSND instruction e Check if the send receive process for I O signals and the BUFSND BUFRCYV instructions are used together for the same connection If so correct the program Check the error code in the BUFSND instruction completion status area and correct the error Write the data length Correct the error in the connected device Check and correct the error If the action above does not solve the problem perform the following tests on the E71 to check for hardware error e Hardware test 2 gt Page 323 Appendix 6 2 e Self loopback test 2 gt Page 322 Appendix 6 1 243 wojduw s Aq Bunooysejqnos 9 94 JONG pexy e Buisn SuolediuUNWWOd YIM juas aq jouueo geq 8 9 91 16 6 9 Data cannot be received with communications using a fixed buffer The following table lists how to troubleshoot the problem when an E71 cannot receive data with communications using a fixed buffer Check item Does the receive data length match with the amount of data actually received Has the connection with the connected device been opened Check the corresponding bit of 5000 y in the buffer memory Is the IP address setting of the connected device correct Does the communication protocol TCP IP or UDP IP match with that of the connected device Is the receive status signal of the corresponding fixed buffer on Check the corresponding bit of 5005 in the buffer
242. ice can be resumed c To change the Ethernet operation setting By changing the communication conditions in the Ethernet operation setting set using the programming tool communications with the connected device can be resumed d To change the transmission speed and communication mode By changing the transmission speed and communication mode communications with the connected device can be resumed 305 SS8D0J q Jen y xipuaddy 8990 Jd UONezIenuiay 2 y xipuaddy 2 Program for the reinitialization process Perform the reinitialization process using a program The following shows the process timing and sample programs a Process timing Close process Program S can END process Scan END ane process can process can process can Initial normal completion signal X19 Open completion signal address 5000H UINI instruction Completion device Completion device 1 ane Reinitialization specification address 1FH b15 Internal process of the E71 306 b Abnormally ended ho ee eee i Processing reinitialization y Requesting Z ETE reinitialization Initializing the module Check the normal completion of the initial process Initial normal completion signal X19 ON Terminate all data communications with the connected devices and perform a close process on all connections Execute the UIN
243. ify the maximum length or less in the data length storage area C417y Data length setting error data quantity setting error e Check the maximum allowable data quantity and specify the maximum quantity or less in the data quantity storage area e Write the data again C420y Flash ROM write error e If an error still occurs even after rewriting replace the module e Replace the module because the number of writes C421 y Flash ROM write count over limit error res exceeded the limit C430 Protocol setting data writing during the ECPRTCL e If the ECPRTCL instruction is under execution cancel the i instruction execution instruction and write the protocol setting data e Check the operation of the connected device e Check the connection open status with the connected Connection close during the ECPRTCL instruction C4314 l device execution e Open the connection with the connected device again and execute the instruction D0004 to DFFF Errors detected by CC Link IE Field Network Refer to the manual for each module H E000 to EFFF Errors detected by CC Link IE Controller Network Refer to the manual for each module H FOOO to Errors detected by the MELSECNET H and e Refer to the MELSECNET H or MELSECNET 10 network FFFFy MELSECNET 10 network system system reference manual and take corrective action O Oooo eo occ occ ocr The error codes listed in the table include those returned to the connected device Each buffer me
244. igent function module are properly connected e Check that the programmable controller CPU is not in the reset status An error was detected in the programmable controller COEF pe e Check if an error exists in the programmable controller CPU If an error exists take the action required to correct it e Replace the power supply module programmable SP SPOD 10113 2 94 controller CPU or intelligent function module e Perform the hardware test again If an error occurs again An Ethernet module RAM error was detected in the COFO a hardware test H W test the Ethernet module may have a hardware error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Perform the hardware test again If an error occurs again An Ethernet module ROM error was detected in the COF1 i hardware test H W test the Ethernet module may have a hardware error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative oww JONG y Ul P3J0 S SIPOI 10114 9L COF3 A system error major error was detected in the CPU e Remove the error cause of the CPU module in the own H module station e Follow the procedure below 1 Check if the Ethernet module the power supply module and the CPU module are properly connected 2 Check if the operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the COF4y System error The OS detected an error CPU module 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient
245. igure settings e g network number and station Station No lt gt IP Information MELSEC Q L Ethernet number to communicate with other network modules Interface Module User s Configure the settings of the file transfer FTP eo FTP Parameters Manual Application function Configure the settings of the e mail function and the E mail Setting automatic notification function Set the control number SI on the E71 side to request Interrupt Settings Page 130 Section 12 5 1 an interrupt to the CPU module MELSEC Q L Ethernet Interface Module User s Set the communication path to communicate with a Routing Parameters i station having a different network number As Manual Application Select a relay module when an access request with no Valid Module During Other Station Access network number specified is issued from another station The connected device side protocol can be easily Predefined Protocol Support Function selected or created edited from the Predefined Page 94 CHAPTER 11 Protocol Library of GX Works2 Remote Password Select the connection protected by a remote password Page 174 Section 14 3 64 CHAPTER 7 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE 7 1 2 Basic setting Set items such as a network number and station number O Project window gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt Ethernet CC IE Field gt Select Ethernet under Network Type u Network Parameter MELSECNET CC IE Ether
246. il normally Try to send an e mail from a device other than the E71 Check the following e Convert the e mail attachment into the binary code and send it e Check if the sent data e mail attachment is not in the ASCII code e When the destination is a personal computer use another mailer If the received e mails differ depending on the mailer used check the mailer settings e Check if the encoding and decoding methods of the mail server differs from those of Ethernet 247 p3AI999J q JOUULI jew uy Z 9 9 wojduw s Aq Bunooyusejqnos 9 94 16 6 13 Communications using data link instructions cannot be performed The following table lists how to troubleshoot the problem when an E71 cannot perform communications using data link instructions Check item Is the communication status of the connected device normal Is the number of resends set upon every instruction execution Does an error occur even after the arrival monitoring time is increased Does an error occur even after the setting value in TCP Resend Timer in the initial setting is increased Are the routing parameter settings correct Is the Station No lt gt IP information setting configured Action Correct the error of the connected device Modify the program to set the number of resends upon every instruction execution Check and correct the arrival monitoring time Check and correct the setting value in TCP Resend Timer
247. ils on the dedicated instructions refer to the following MELSEC Q L Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Application SUOHINAJSU pajeoIpag 40 157 L SL Function Instruction Description MRECV Reads the received e mails E mail function MSEND Sends e mails READ Reads word device data from other stations RECV Reads data received from other stations Used in the main program RECVS Reads data received from other stations Used in an interrupt program SEO Performs remote RUN STOP to CPU modules on other stations Reads writes the clock data of other stations SEND Sends data to other stations SREAD Reads word device data from other stations with a completion device Communications using data link instructions SWRITE Writes word device data to other stations with a completion device WRITE Writes word device data to other stations ZNRD Reads word device data from other stations ACPU ZNWR Writes word device data to other stations ACPU 189 15 2 Parameter Settings for Using Dedicated Instructions When using dedicated instructions set the parameters of each function 15 2 1 When using data link instructions When using data link instructions set the following parameters e Station No lt gt IP information setting e Routing parameters setting For details on the settings refer to the following MELSEC Q L Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Application 190 CHAPTER 15 DEDICATED INSTRU
248. imal is set in Code Type data not in ASCII code 11H ASCII binary conversion error are received 12y Data length error The received Length value exceeded 2046 bytes The Length value received from the connected device does not match the 30y Data length size error actual length FFy Verification not performed 204 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 8 HTTP status storage area address 51014 to 5177p The following table lists the HTTP status storage areas The buffer memory addresses of the error log block are those of the error log block 1 For the addresses of the error log block 2 and later refer to the list of buffer memory addresses gt Page 35 Section 3 5 2 Buffer memory aoe Address Description name The number of the error log block where the latest error log is registered is stored e 0 No error no registration of error log e 1 or more The number of the error log block where the latest error log is registered Error log pointer 5101 y If the pointer value is 16 it means that the latest error log is registered in the error log block 16 area When the number of errors reaches 17 the error log is then registered in the error log block 1 area again The number of times the HTTP response code was returned from the E71 to the Web Log counter 51024 to 5106 l browser is stored HTTP response 51084 The HTTP response code in case of an error is stored code Destination 51094 to 510A The IP address
249. ime of the connected device ms 2 0 0 0016 x 508 ACK processing time of the connected device 295 aw Buisseool d xIpuaddy 3 Minimum processing time of MC protocol communications batch reading and batch writing Tfs Ke Kat x Df Scr X number of scans required for the process ACK processing time of the connected device The time between the E71 receiving request data from a personal computer and it completing Tfs the process unit ms Ke Kat Constant Refer to the table below Df Number of request data words number of response data words Application data part CPU module processing time a e Own station access E71 connected station scan time e Another station access over MELSECNET 10 Transmission delay time E71 connected station scan time LJ71E71 100 Item TCP IP communications UDP IP communications Ke Kat Ke Kd Communications using a binary code 0 0022 MZ 0 0018 Batch reading Communications using an ASCII code 0 0046 MA 0 0046 Communications using a binary code 0 0024 p26 0 0033 Batch writing Communications using an ASCII code 33 0 0073 Lae 0 0070 4 The time from when the E71 receives the request data from the personal computer until it completes the process is shown below Connected device personal computer Command ACK Response ACK TCP only message TCP only message E71 Step 0 Step 0 END CPU module scan time A E O 7 7 296 APPENDICE
250. ine mode no error occurs but the instruction is not completed If the action above does not solve the problem perform the following tests on the E71 to check for hardware error e Hardware test 2 gt Page 323 Appendix 6 2 e Self loopback test 2 gt Page 322 Appendix 6 1 239 wojdu s Aq Bunooysejqnos 9 94 S9 NSP P9 JOSUUOD y WO JUSS oBessow e 9 A1999 O SIC puanba LJZ5 SUL ZOOL 16 6 4 MC protocol communications cannot be performed The following table lists how to troubleshoot the problem when the E71 cannot perform MC protocol communications Check item Has the connection with the connected device been opened Check the corresponding bit of 5000 in the buffer memory Did the connected device send a command Was a response returned to the device that had sent the command Does the communication protocol TCP IP or UDP IP match with that of the connected device Does the communication data code ASCII or binary setting match with that of the connected device Is the end code of the response 0 Is the correct command format used for the command type device address and others Is the write operation during RUN enabled Has an open or initial error occurred in the error log area Action e Open the connection with the connected device e Check if the open close process for I O signals and the OPEN CLOSE instructions are not used together for the same connection If so
251. ing data Description Set by Data type Unf Un Start I O number of the E71 00 to FEy The first two digits i BIN 16 bit character n Un ser of the three digit I O number string S1 Start number of the device that stores control data Device name The start number of the bit device in the own station that D1 turns on for one scan upon completion of the instruction System Bit a N a D1 1 also turns on if the instruction ends abnormally m 70 70 70 U 223 2 Control data Device Hem Setting data Setting range Set by sino Stema l Stores the status at completion S1 1 nec e 0000 Normal completion System status e Values other than 0000 Abnormal end error code Specify error information to be read Read information 0000p Initial error code 0000 0001 to S1 2 User specification e 0001 y to 0010y Open error code for a connection 0010y with the connected device pew me Specify whether to read the latest error information ols ias e 0000 Reads the latest error information db nee specification Stores the error information that has been read S1 4 Error information 0000 No error System e Values other than 0000y error code Abnormal end S1 5 to System area S1 7 3 Functions e This instruction reads the error information of the module specified for Un Target Function i AN O Error information to be read Item specification specification buffer memory
252. ing this port makes the E71 ready for communications upon completion of an initial process thus enabling communications without using any programs regardless of the open status of connection numbers 1 to 16 1 Open and close timing The port automatically opens according to the registered parameter settings upon completion of the initial process of the E71 In addition it automatically closes when the E71 connected station is powered off or reset Point The E71 enables communications using an auto open UDP port after the initial process is normally completed and the E71 on the own station waits for communication requests to itself auto open The E71 accepts requests from anywhere as long as they are addressed to the E71 itself When a communication request is accepted from the connected device the corresponding port number is occupied until the process is completed Even if the next communication request is accepted during this time the communication process will be waited To change the auto open UDP port number a reinitialization process is required Page 305 Appendix 4 2 173 uoneoddy Ztl Od dan uedo o ny ue Buisp suonesiunwWWOd Z p 14 3 Remote Password The CPU module can be protected by a remote password Point A remote password is to prevent unauthorized access e g Corruption of programs and data from connected devices However this function does not guarantee prevention of all u
253. ing time for each function using the expressions below Note that the processing time may become longer depending on the load factor on the network how congested the line is the window size of each connected device the number of connections and system configuration Use the values obtained from the expressions as a guideline for the processing time when communications are performed in only one connection 1 Minimum processing time of communications using a fixed buffer communications between the E71s a Procedure exists Tfs St Ke Kdf x Df Sr Tfs The time from the start of sending to the completion of sending unit ms St Sending station scan time Ke Kdf Constant Refer to the table below Df Number of send data words Sr Receiving station scan time LJ71E71 100 Item TCP IP communications UDP IP communications 6 2 0 0040 0 0082 6 2 0 0081 b No procedures Tfs St Ke Kdf x Df Tfs The time from the start of sending to the completion of sending unit ms St Sending station scan time Ke Kdf Constant Refer to the table below Df Number of send data bytes LJ71E71 100 Item TCP IP communications UDP IP communications Communications using a binary code 5 4 0 0010 3 8 0 0009 294 Calculation example The time between the E71 sending 1017 word data of a binary code and it completing the sending when the E71 communicates with another E71 in TCP IP with the Procedure Exist method unit ms
254. ion Upgrade Wizard support code Private Shared m_vb6FormDefinstance As Form1 Private Shared m_InitializingDeflnstance As Boolean Public Shared Property Deflnstance As Form1 Get If m_vb6FormDefinstance Is Nothing OrElse m_vb6FormDeflInstance sDisposed Then m_InitializingDeflnstance True m_vb6FormDefinstance New Form1 3 3 m_InitializingDeflnstance False 553 End If Aa Deflnstance m_vb6FormDeflnstance NO End Get 53 Set a m_vb6FormDefinstance Value Eg End Set End Property o End Region pesn SI LAN y 9PIS Paj9auuoy ay UO We 357 Private Sub Command1_Click ByVal eventSender As System Object ByVal eventArgs 358 As System EventArgs Handles Command1 Click Connect to the Ethernet interface module Dim sock As New Sockets Socket Sockets AddressFamily InterNetwork _ sockets SocketlT ype Stream Sockets ProtocolT ype Tcp Ajsock sock Dim ip As IPAddress Dns Resolve 192 0 1 253 AddressList 0 Dim ipend As IPEndPoint New IPEndPoint ip 8192 Me Ajsock Connect ipend MsgBox Connection Completed State Me Ajsock Connected End Sub Private Sub Command2_Click ByVal eventSender As System Object ByVal eventArgs As System EventArgs Handles Command2 Click Dim SData As Byte Dim RData 256 As Byte Rend DO to D4 5 points with the A compatible 1E frame command SData Encoding ASCll GetBytes 01FFO00A4420000000000500 Read DO to D4 5 points with the QnA compatible 3E fram
255. ion and the connected station If the line is heavily loaded reduce the load Increase the number of resends for the data link instructions Increase the time reserved for the communication process in the service processing setting in PLC System under PLC Parameter Check if the relay station connected station is operating normally If the communication is alive no action for this error is required Check if there is an error with the cable connection between the own station and the connected station If the line is heavily loaded reduce the load Increase the time reserved for the communication process in the service processing setting in PLC System under PLC Parameter 269 SP SPOD 10113 2 94 AJOW SOW JONG y Ul P3J0 S SIPOI 10114 9L Error code Error description C084 C0854 C086 C087 y COB2 COB3 COB5 COB6 COB7 COB8 COB9y COBAyy COBB COBC 270 Action e Check if the own station relay station connected station is running normally e Check if there is a problem with the cable connection between the own station and the connected station The communication process was abnormally ended in e Increase the TCP resend timer value e Increase the time reserved for the communication process communications using data link instructions in the service processing setting in PLC System under PLC Parameter The own station s chan
256. ion errors returned in response to inquiries to the receive mail server is stored e 0 No communication error between servers or no inquiry e 1 or more The cumulative number of communication errors The cumulative number of registrations in the receiving error log block area is stored e O No error or no inquiry to the server e 1 or more The cumulative number of writes to the error log block area The number of the error log block where the latest receiving error log is registered is stored e 0 No error no registration of error log e 1 or more The number of the error log block where the latest error log is registered If the pointer value is 16 it means that the latest error log is registered in the receiving error log block 16 area When the number of errors reaches 17 the error log is then registered in the error log block 1 area again CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING Buffer memory name Address Description Error code 58794 An error code indicating the error details is stored Command code 587Ay The system command code of the error message is stored The first eight words of the sender s e mail address of the error e mail in the communications with the mail server are stored in the ASCII code Example If the sender s e mail address is use from add sample co jp use from add sam is stored in the ASCII code From 58 By The date and time when the e mail was received are stored in the BCD code Eora 15 to b8 b7 to b
257. ion subjected to the loopback test do not specify the MELSOFT application transmission port UDP IP as a valid port for the password check The loopback test cannot be executed 318 APPENDICES b Operating procedure Use the following procedure Ethernet Diagnostics 1 Click the Loop Test button in the Ethernet Module No ist modue on Camu DEC f HEX CDEC HEX Diag nostics window Parameter Status Error History Status of Each Connection Status of Each Protocol LED Status Received E mail Information Send E mail Information Module Information itil ror coce ooms TO Diagnostics gt Ethernet Diagnostics gt Eemet adress 000 761 7 Target Module Setting under Module No Network No Station No 1 Group No 1 PING Test Loop Test COM ERR Off Stop Monitor 2 Configure the settings and click the Execute Loopback T pup bees Tasi button to display the test results Network Mo 1 Starting Mode End Mode Number oF Confirmation Modes 1 Z PING Test Check ak Communication Time 10 Seconds Close F Result IF Address Error Code 192 165 340 192 168 3 44 IF Address Input Style fe DEC t HEX Number of Response Nodes E s yoeqdoo Z s xipueddy 199y9 sn e s aun G xipuaddy Point Ifthe same IP address or station number is assigned to multiple stations only the results of the station that responds first are displayed
258. ions of GX Works2 which are common to Simple projects and Structured projects Parameter settings for intelligent function modules monitoring operations and the predefined protocol support function of GX Works2 CONTENTS SAN eee Vers TNS a ds Bie cette Pe aio 1 CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUC terrae seca co estate featur asain eee 5 INTRODUCTION Ear A E E o RNE II OS tie oa 6 COMPLIANCE WITH EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES 0 0 0002 eee oo 6 REPEVANTIA NDA oredr ee canta eter aera cece Orne eal ise ey ae E taa A T MANUAL PAGE ORGANIZATION ua a aa Cata a 13 TERMS A A NO A Rr oe Re Pee cer niet ong oe ALR Gee eat A 16 FACRINGIM STA E E O E E AT alts Gael ane AR ae RELIC enn ULE aleve Sach ne ENTREN 18 CHAPTER 1 FEATURES 19 CHAPTER 2 PART NAMES 25 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 27 3 1 General SpeciicalonS eiii ia dat 27 3 2 Performance Specifications o oo ooooooornrr eee eee eas 27 S20 JPUNCHOM lols ook dee ease ular wee Ce ewe aes ot Sees eis eke 29 80 1 PUNCHORUISE 443 0504 agate hee oe A a tae 29 02 USE With Otner functions e daa dd rad aaa 31 of RIStOMlO SIGNdlS 2 1 00 cnet eee ee eee eek eee kee eee Ba SoS Widen eae 32 20 I DUMEMMEMOR si 2 a A A A Basin Ree eee 34 3 5 1 Configuration of the buffer memory 0 00 cc eee eee 34 3 5 2 List of buffer memory addresses iii de od he tide ba ee Yee dha sh elas 35 CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURES BEFORE OPERATION 54 CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
259. iption The number of remaining e mails returned when the E71 inquired the receive mail server is stored e O No received mail in the server e 1 to 15 The number of mails remaining in the server e 16 The number of mails in the server is 16 or more The cumulative number of normal completions of the dedicated instruction MRECV is stored e 0 The MRECV instruction has not been executed or no executions have resulted in normal completion e 1 or more The cumulative number of normal completions of the MRECV instruction The cumulative number of abnormal ends of the dedicated instruction MRECV is stored e 0 The MRECV instruction has not been executed or no executions have resulted in abnormal end 1 or more The cumulative number of abnormal ends of the MRECV instruction The cumulative number of received e mails forwarded by the E71 to the mail buffer data area is stored e 0 No mail has been transferred e 1 or more The number of normal mail transfer completions The cumulative number of e mails with an attachment received by the E71 is stored e 0 No e mail with an attachment has been received e 1 or more The number of normal reception of e mails with an attachment The cumulative number of inquiries to the receive mail server according to the parameter setting is stored e O No inquiry has been made to the server e 1 or more The cumulative number of inquiries to the server The cumulative number of communicat
260. isplayed by the selected format Please enter the value according to the selected number Cancel Set Pairing Open of the receive connection to Enable The next connection is 1 Pairing Open Pi automatically set as a send connection 4 When Enable has been set in Pairing Open for a send connection the following window appears MELSOFT Series GX Works This will set all the items in this row Overwrite if it is already set The Fixed buffer setting of the selected row is set as Receive Are vou sure usado uled JZ When the connection is automatically set as a send connection When Enable has already been set in Pairing Open the setting is overwritten Point Because the fixed buffer of the connection with the connected device for receiving and the fixed buffer of the next connection for sending are paired set connection numbers 1 to 7 and 9 to 15 as receive connections Connection numbers 8 and 16 cannot be set Bulnes Jajaweled ZZ 139 12 8 Broadcast Communications Broadcast communications mean that the same data is sent to all E71 connected stations in the same Ethernet network and to the connected devices without specifying destinations Broadcast communications can be performed when the following conditions are met e When UDP IP protocol is used e When No Procedure communications using a fixed buffer or data communications using the predefined protocol are performed
261. k the end and error codes to correct the error Is the correct buffer memory address specified for the command Correct the buffer memory address and send the command again Has data been set in the specified address of the random Write the data access buffer Has the write data been set in the connected device Set the data Has an open or initial error occurred in the error log area Check and correct the error If the action above does not solve the problem perform the following tests on the E71 to check for hardware error e Hardware test gt Page 323 Appendix 6 2 e Self loopback test gt Page 322 Appendix 6 1 245 wojdu s Aq Bunooysejqnos 9 94 pauojlad aq zouues Jejnq sses9e wopue e Buisn suoNediuNnWWOYD 01 9 9 16 6 11 An e mail cannot be sent The following table lists how to troubleshoot the problem when an E71 cannot send an e mail 1 When sending an e mail with a program Check item Action Was the MSEND instruction executed Correct the execution conditions of the MSEND instruction Check the error code in the MSEND instruction completion status area and Was the MSEND instruction completed normally the e mail sending error log to correct the error Check with the system administrator that the following settings are correct e DNS setting e E mail setting Is the error response received from the mail server using the MRECV instruction If the action above does not solve the
262. lists the behavior of the functions according to the remote password check status enabled disabled Remote password check setting Function Disabled Enabled After an initial process is completed After the remote password is entered Connection with MELSOFT products and a communications are enabled by communications are enabled The remote GOT establishing a connection in the password lock process is automatically programming tool performed when the project is closed After an open process is completed After an open process is completed communications are enabled from the time User open port een communications are enabled that the unlock command is received until MC protocol the lock command is received communications After an initial process is completed After an initial process is completed communications are enabled from the time Auto open UDP port n i communications are enabled that the unlock command is received until the lock command is received After an open process is completed Use MC protocol to communicate with the User open port a l Communications communications are enabled CPU module where a remote password is using SLMP After an initial process is completed set because SLMP does not have unlock Auto open UDP port te communications are enabled and lock commands ae l After an open process is completed After an open process is completed Communications using the predefined protocol AR A communi
263. llowing parameters to perform communications using a fixed buffer e Basic setting gt Page 65 Section 7 1 2 e Ethernet operation setting 2 gt Page 66 Section 7 1 3 e Open setting _ gt Page 68 Section 7 1 4 Network Parameter Ethernet Open Setting Module No 1 IP Address Port No Input Format DEC v Fixed Buffer Pairing Existence Host Station Destination Destination UDP X Receive w Procedure Exist y Disable No Confirm v 2000 10 97 85 223 200 fi IP Address and Port No will be displayed by the selected format Please enter the value according to the selected number Cancel Item Description Setting range Select whether to use the fixed buffer for connection with the connected device for Send Fixed Buffer np sending or receiving e Receive N al Fixed Buffer ON a Procedure Exist A Select the communication method for communications using a fixed buffer o Communication No Procedure z Select whether to disable or enable the pairing open for communications using a Bisel Disable 5 Pairing Open fixed buffer a e Enable o lt Page 138 Section 12 7 Select whether or not to use the alive check function _ Page 187 Section Existence Confirmation 14 6 Select No Confirm to send data by broadcast communications during No Procedure communications using a fixed buffer e No Confirm e Confirm 129 12 5 1 Parameter setting when using an int
264. lowing table lists how to troubleshoot the problem when an E71 cannot receive an e mail Check item Was the MRECV instruction executed Was the MRECV instruction completed normally Does the receive data exist in the device Is the receive data value incorrect Are the characters in the subject garbled Is a device other than the E71 sending the data Is the E71 sending the data Did the sending device send the e mail in the ASCII code or convert the ASCII code further into the ASCII code Action Correct the execution conditions of the MSEND instruction Check the error code in the MRECV instruction completion status area and correct the error e Shorten the inquiry interval e Check if there is any error in the communication path e Check the number of e mails remaining on the mail server e Check and correct the e mail parameter settings e Check if the mail server system is down e Check if there is any error in the communication path If EUC or SHIFT JIS is used perform the following e Send an e mail from a personal computer to the own station e Check the header information of the received e mail sent by the own station For Outlook Express select Properties Details In the header information check that the setting is Content Type text plain charset iso 2022jp If it is charset EUC jp or charset SHIFT JIS correct it Because the E71 does not decode received data it cannot receive an e ma
265. ls are executed the status of the protocol executed at last is stored System 0000 Normal completion Values other than 0000 error code Abnormal end 1 to 128 Set the first protocol number to be executed User Set the second protocol number to be executed User Set the third protocol number to be executed User Set the fourth protocol number to be executed User Set the fifth protocol number to be executed User Set the sixth protocol number to be executed User Set the seventh protocol number to be executed User Set the eighth protocol number to be executed User 0 1 to 128 0 1to 16 System 0 1to 16 System When the communication type of the first protocol executed includes receiving the matched receive packet number is stored When the communication type is Send Only 0 is stored If an error occurs to the first protocol executed 0 is stored When the communication type of the second protocol executed includes receiving the matched receive packet number is stored When the communication type is Send Only 0 is stored If an error occurs to the second protocol executed 0 is stored When the number of protocols which are executed is less than 2 0 is stored Device S 12 S 13 S 14 S 15 S 16 S 17 CHAPTER 15 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS item Setting data Setting range Set by Matched receive packet No 3 Matched receive packet No 4 Matched receive packet No 5 Matc
266. lso checked with a programming tool and in buffer memory e With a programming tool H W Information window gt Page 291 Section 16 9 In buffer memory Area for module status address C8 gt Page 35 Section 3 5 2 16 4 1 Ifthe RUN LED turns off The following table lists the items to be checked and the actions to be taken if the RUN LED turns off after the E71 is powered on Check item Action Reset the CPU module and check that the RUN LED turns on If the RUN Is ita watchdog timer error LED still does not turn on the E71 may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Is the E71 connected properly Power off the E71 and connect the module properly Is the power capacity of the power supply module sufficient Check if the power supply module has enough power capacity If the action above does not solve the problem perform the following tests on the E71 to check for hardware error e Hardware test 2 gt Page 323 Appendix 6 2 e Self loopback test gt Page 322 Appendix 6 1 16 4 2 Ifthe ERR LED or COM ERR LED turns on Connect the CPU module connected to the E71 with the ERR LED or COM ERR LED on to a programming tool to identify the cause gt Page 232 Section 16 2 Page 290 Section 16 8 If the action above does not solve the problem perform the following tests on the E71 to check for hardware error e Hardware test 2 gt Page 323 Appendix 6 2 e Self loopba
267. mal completion System e Values other than 0000y Abnormal end error code Specify 0000y to update the address information on the connected devices retained by the E71 Specify the target for setting change among the own station IP address Ethernet operation setting transmission speed and communication mode Do not specify the transmission speed and communication mode together with the own station IP address and Ethernet operation setting If doing so only the specification of the own station IP address and Ethernet operation setting is updated e Specification of own station IP address change b0 Specify whether to change the own station IP address Set the address in S1 3 and S1 4 0000 to 0 Do not change es 50004 Specification of nange S1 2 e Specification of the Ethernet operation setting change b1 Specify User changed item whether to change the Ethernet operation setting Set the parameters in S1 5 0 Do not change 1 Change e Specification of transmission speed and communication mode changes b12 to b15 Specify the transmission speed and the communicate mode 0 Do not change 1 Auto negotiation 2 100Mbps full duplex 3 100Mbps half duplex 4 10Mbps full duplex 5 10Mbps half duplex ININ dZ b Sb S1 3 Own station IP S1 4 address 00000001 y to Specify the IP address of the own station FFFFFFFEy User Specify the Ethernet operation setting e Communication data code s
268. mally read e Even though the value in Received TCP packet count Address 1B8 and 1B9 in the buffer memory was changed data cannot be received If these errors occur select Disable TCP Maximum Segment Size Option transmission 3PIS 39159 P9 O9UUOD y UO WeIbOJY ajdwes 6 xipueddy 341 Appendix 9 1 When Visual C R NET is used This section describes the program execution environment data communication details and a sample program for when Visual C NET is used on the program of a connected device 1 Execution environment of the program example a CPU module side Item Description A model name of the LCPU in the E71 connected station LO2CPU E71 I O signal X Y00 to X Y1F E71 IP address C0 00 01 FDy 192 00 01 253 E71 port number 2000 y Ethernet operation Refer to Page 343 Appendix 9 1 3 a Programming tool setting setting Open setting Refer to Page 343 Appendix 9 1 3 b b Connected device side Item Description Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System Ver 2002 Service Pack2 Operation environment Ethernet interface board model name WINSOCK compatible board Library to link WSOCK32 LIB Visual C NET 2003 manufactured by Microsoft Software development environment l Corporation This setting is not required because the ARP function can be MAC address used IP address Received upon an Active open Port number Received upon an Active open c Communication protocol TC
269. mber of data D 92H exceeds the range from 0 to 6143 O o Data by the number of words specified meres 3 7 e Correct the number of 3 text cannot be sent in one frame i c read write points J The data length value or the amount 63 of the text sent received are not in the o n allowable range 259 Error code 54y 55H Error description e When ASCII Code has been selected in the communication data code setting in the Ethernet operation setting ASCII code data which cannot be converted into binary code data has been sent from the connected device When Enable Online Change was disabled or not selected in the Ethernet operation setting the connected device requested a data write while the CPU module was running While the CPU module was running the connected device requested for writing a parameter program or microcomputer program e Check and correct the data sent from the connected device e Enable select Enable Online Change in the Ethernet operation setting and write data However a parameter program or microcomputer program cannot be written while the CPU module is running e Set the switch on the CPU module to STOP and write the data MC protocol communications Data communication type Communications Communications using a fixed buffer using a random access buffer 56 e The connected device specified a e Correct the device r wrong device specification
270. mber specified with a command is not FF of the own station or not the station number set with the MELSECNET link parameters After the E71 receives a request from the connected device normally communications cannot be normally performed between the E71 and the CPU module due to some causes such as noise The specified intelligent function module number has not been assigned to an intelligent function module that has the buffer memory and where communications can be performed For example the specified module is an I O module or empty The remote RUN STOP cannot be executed The remote STOP PAUSE has been already executed from another module The CPU module of the request destination has been disconnected from the data link Memory access to the intelligent function module cannot be performed due to the following causes e The control bus to the intelligent function module is faulty e The intelligent function module is in failure Action Change the PC number to FF y of the own station or not the station number set using the link parameter to perform communications again Perform communications again If the error occurs again check for noise and other causes and or replace the E71 Change the specified data contents in the control procedure or change the connecting position of the intelligent function module Then perform communications again Check if the remote STOP PAUSE has been already executed fr
271. mbes cae Sousa ea eae ds alas 232 16 3 Checking with the Module Error Collection Function 0 00000 eee eee ees 234 16 4 Checking the LEDS 4 Aisne ia dd es Be eee ae ee ee ee de 235 16 41 Fhe RUN LED UMS Off 23 25 E eo on oh eee aaa eae ews 235 16 4 2 If the ERR LED or COM ERR LED turns on 0 0 cect nee 235 16 4 3 If the SD RD LED does not flash when data is sent 00000 cee eee 236 16 5 Checking with a Display Unit 0 0 0 0 eee eens 23 166 Troubleshooting by SYMpPlOM 2 aia sis ii weet tS SoReal OSS Eee 238 16 6 1 Communications cannot be performed with the connected device 238 16 6 2 The E71 frequently fails to receive a message sent from the connected device 239 16 6 3 A dedicated instruction is not completed 0 0 0 es 239 16 6 4 MC protocol communications cannot be performed 0 000 cee eee 240 16 6 5 Communications using SLMP cannot be performed 00000 0 eee eens 241 16 6 6 Communications using the predefined protocol cannot be performed 241 16 6 7 The protocol setting data cannot be read or written o ooooooocooooo 242 16 6 8 Data cannot be sent with communications using a fixed buffer 243 16 6 9 Data cannot be received with communications using a fixed buffer 244 16 6 10 Communications using a random access buffer cannot be performed
272. me IP address address connected to the network later stored in 21125 52851 The third and fourth octets of the MAC the station that has been already connected to j address the network 21126 5286y The first and second octets of the MAC address uonsuny UOl D9 98q SN Ul SSOJPPV dl G VL 185 When the MAC address of the station that has been already connected to the network is 00 26 92 89 2E 89 the IP address already in use is 10 97 24 01 and the MAC address of the station connected to the network later is 00 26 92 DE 26 90 the value stored in each buffer memory area is as follows e 234 EA 1801 y the third and fourth octets of the IP address e 235 EBy 0461 y the first and second octets of the IP address e 21121 5281 y 2E89y the fifth and sixth octets of the MAC address e 21122 5282 y 92894 the third and fourth octets of the MAC address e 21123 52834 0026 y the first and second octets of the MAC address e 21124 5284 y 26904 the fifth and sixth octets of the MAC address e 21125 5285p 92DE y the third and fourth octets of the MAC address e 21126 5286p 0026 the first and second octets of the MAC address 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000090 NNO b Checking using the Ethernet diagnostics An error code COOF is displayed in the Ethernet Diagnostics window and the IP address used in multiple stations is displayed in the Destination IP Address column
273. mmable controllers or between a programmable controller and the host system 12 1 1 Differences between the Procedure Exist and No Procedure control methods There are two control methods for communications using a fixed buffer Procedure Exist control method and No Procedure control method This section describes the differences between the Procedure Exist and No Procedure control methods Difference Item 3 Procedure Exist No Procedure z l Data is sent received in the message format of the gt Message format Data is sent received in a fixed data format 5 connected device fab A response to data receiving A response to data receiving is sent A response to data receiving is not sent 5 07 Dat a Communications can be performed using a Communications are performed using only a binary ata code binary code or ASCII code code Data length specified using a S p Specified by the number of words Specified by the number of bytes dedicated instruction Amount of application data per a Maximum of 1017 words Maximum of 2046 bytes communication Point A connection with a connected device is dedicated for No Procedure communications using a fixed buffer MC protocol communications and Procedure Exist communications using a fixed buffer and random access buffer cannot be performed at the same time as No Procedure communications using a fixed buffer spoyjau JOJJUO9 AINPSIOJd ON PUB ISIX3 3INP39014
274. mmunication address setting area corresponding to the fixed buffer number n In addition when an E71 stores the received data in the corresponding fixed buffer in the receive process it updates the IP address and destination port number of the connected device in Connection information area addresses 784 to C74 and 5820 to 586F y corresponding to the fixed buffer number n If data is received from a connected device not set in the connection information area of the buffer memory an E71 ignores the received data 4 With the TCP IP Unpassive open data is sent to or received from a connected device stored in the connection information area of the buffer memory Point When received data is stored in the corresponding fixed buffer in the receive process of broadcast communications an E71 updates the destination IP address and port number in Connection information area address 784 to C74 and 58201 to 586F y corresponding to the fixed buffer number n 121 dIN ONIS UOIEDUNWWOD ZZ 12 3 Data Sending Procedure This section describes how an E71 sends data to the connected device 1 Procedure exists The following is the data send process performed in the fixed buffer number 1 area for the connection number 1 Initial process Open process Sending data Receiving a response l l l Initial normal completion l signal X19 Open completion signal 2 ST address 5000H b0 BUFSND instruction CU _ y
275. mmunication module The abbreviation for ZP CLOSE An instruction that simplifies programming for using functions of intelligent function modules A device X Y M D or others in a CPU module The abbreviation for Domain Name System This system is mainly used to convert host names on the Internet or domain names used for e mails to IP addresses Another term for the LJ71E71 100 The abbreviation for the station where the E71 is connected The abbreviation for GP ECPRTCL The abbreviation for ZP ERRCLR The abbreviation for ZP ERRRD The abbreviation for File Transfer Protocol This protocol is used to transfer data files over a network The product name of the software package for the MELSEC programmable controllers The abbreviation for Hyper Text Transfer Protocol This protocol is used to send and receive content such as HTML files between a Web browser and a Web server The abbreviation for Internet Control Message Protocol This protocol is used to exchange messages of errors in an IP network or other information related to an Ethernet network A module that has functions other than an input or output such as an A D converter module and D A converter module The abbreviation for Internet Protocol A unique identifier assigned to each external device on a network This address is also known as an Ethernet hardware address The abbreviation for MELSEC Communication Protocol This protocol is used to access MC protocol supporting
276. mmunications buffer access buffer When each 00 i ii communication is O h ed did normally completed the error code OO is stored ah e Check and correct the e The device range destination of a specified start device 02 devices to be read written from to is and the number of incorrect points e Codes for the command response type of a subheader are not within the specifications Check and correct the MC protocol communications 00y to command response 3Cy type set for the Communications using a fixed buffer connected device 604 Because the E71 50 Communications using a random access automatically adds O buffer 614 624 the e In communications using a fixed command response oe buffer if the data length setting is type the user setting smaller than the actual data amount is not required 2 E the remaining data is processed as the Check and correct the o el second data In this case a subheader ata length spa undefined command type error may zi a occur 5 9 In communications using a random 3 access buffer the start address Check and correct the E 91y specified by a connected device has specified start O 2 been set outside the range from 0 to address D 6143 D In communications using a random 2 access buffer the start address and D Q the number of data words dependin eer h di l a Check and correct the on the setting when reading data e g g i start address and the P specified by a connected device D nu
277. mory may also store the error numbers of the response messages returned from the connected device If an error code other than those listed is stored check the manual for the connected device and the response message from the connected device 060000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000080 289 SI P09 10114 2 94 AJOW SOW JONG y Ul P3J0 S SSPOd 10114 9L 16 8 Ethernet Diagnostics Items such as the module status parameter settings communication status and error history of an E71 can be checked Perform the diagnostics in the Ethernet Diagnostics window of the programming tool O Diagnostics gt Ethernet Diagnostics Ethernet Diagnostics Target Module Setting Change IP Address Display Port No Module No ist Module 7 fe 0000 LC No e DEC HEX DEC HEX Parameter Status Error History Status of Each Connection Status of Each Protocol LED Status Received E mail Information Send E mail Information Module Information Initial Error Code 0000 IP Address 10 97 79 14 Ethernet Address 0800 7044 2FCF Auto Open UDP 1388 Port Network No 1 Station No 1 Group No 0 PING Test Loop Test COM ERR Off M Stop Monitor Item Description Specify the E71 to be monitored The number of other network modules is not Target Module Setting Module No included Parameter Status Module information such as the IP address and basic settings is displayed
278. mproved Functions The following table lists the new and improved functions in the E71 and supported versions of modules and programming tool How to see the table e Numbers in quotation marks in the table represent the first five digits of the serial number of each module O Available No version restriction X Not available Function Version of E71 Version of CPU module Version of GX Works2 Reference Functi ion A or later of Communications using SLMP plas BE i ed ME Page 88 CHAPTER 10 Dat icati ing th Functi ion A or later of ala ee as ions using tne unction pained j or later O Version ao or later Page 94 CHAPTER 11 predefined protocol 15042 Setting range extension of the communication destination port Function version A or later of l number Port number 1 14 to 45042 Version 1 492N or later Page 63 CHAPTER 7 1024 400 can be set Receive buffer full detection signal Function version A or later of 300 APPENDICES Appendix 4 Initial Process The initial process is for enabling data communications with connected devices by setting the minimum number of parameters for the E71 In the MELSEC L series the initial process is performed automatically 1 Checking the initial process result The results of the initial process can be checked using the LEDs and I O signals Initial normal completion Initial abnormal Initial process INIT LED signal completion signal X1A ON Upon normal completion OFF a
279. munications The MC protocol enables connected devices to access MC protocol supporting modules over Ethernet The E71 can communicate with a personal computer and HMI Human Machine Interface as long as the connected devices can receive send messages in the MC protocol control procedure By using a separately sold communication support tool MX Component a communication program for the host system can be created without considering detailed protocols communication procedures _ gt Page 84 CHAPTER 9 Connected device 3 Communications using SLMP SLMP is a protocol that enables connected devices to access SLMP supporting devices over Ethernet SLMP communications are available among devices that can receive send messages in the SLMP control procedure Page 88 CHAPTER 10 CHAPTER 1 FEATURES 4 Data communications using the predefined protocol predefined protocol support function Registering protocol data in advance using GX Works2 allows communications by executing only an ECPRTCL instruction program In addition the protocol setting required to communicate with the connected device such as a measuring instrument or a bar code reader can be configured easily using the Predefined Protocol Support Function of GX Works2 2 gt Page 94 CHAPTER 11 1 Setting protocols Protocols can be set easily using the 2 Writing protocols Write the set protocols in the flash ROM of the E71 predefined proto
280. munications The received data is restored reassembled based on the data length in the communication data The E71 performs the following processes if data in the communication data is incorrect O If the data length specified immediately after the subheader is smaller than the amount of text data received 1 The data immediately after the text data equivalent to the data length specified immediately after the subheader is regarded as the next message 2 Because the header of each message is a subheader an E71 processes data according to the code in the subheader 3 If the subheader contains a code that is not recognized by an E71 the E71 sends a response notifying about an abnormal end to the connected device Data sent from the connected device Data processed by the E71 1st data 2nd data This section is processed as a subheader In the figure above the E71 returns a response containing a code obtained by changing the most significant bit of the code processed as a subheader to 1 For example if the subheader of a command is 65y the subheader of the response is E5y O If the data length specified immediately after the subheader is larger than the amount of text data received 1 The E71 waits for the remaining data 2 When the remaining data is received within the response monitoring timer value the E71 processes data according to the code in the subheader 3 If the remaining data could not be received within the response m
281. n S dal Protocol setting 21287 data check area 5327 y Element No Op 7 21288 e 5328 umber of registered protocols a 21289 to 21295 53294 to 532F yy A Ea o 21296 to 21311 w 53301 to 533F rotoco regis ration 21312 to 21695 ea 5340 to 54BF on area 21696 rae E 54C0 rotocol execution status 21697 a 54C1 ystem area 21698 to 21713 Connection data verification result receive packet No 1 to E x No 1 4 Number of protocol tion x 5 D24 executions 4 Protocol cancellati ifi ti O 5 D3 ation Specification 21716 to 21735 Predefined protocol 54D4 to 54E7 Connection No 2 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 support function 21736 to 21755 execution status 54E8 to 54FB check area Connection No 3 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 H H Kowa yng S E 21756 to 21775 54FC y to 550F y Connection No 4 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 21776 to 21795 5510 to 55234 Connection No 5 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 S9ssaJppe JOu1au J9HNQ JO ISI ZSE ee C tion No 6 The bit configuration is th C tion No 1 55244 to 55371 onnection NO e bit configuration Is the same as Connection No 21816 to 21835 A ae pao sates 55384 to 554B4 onnection No e bit configuration IS the same as Connection No 21836 to 21855 554Cy to 555Fy Connection No 8 The bit configuration is th
282. n be troubleshot For how to monitor buffer memory with a display unit refer to the following MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals pun Aejdsiq e yum Bunjoayo GOL 2317 16 6 Troubleshooting by Symptom The following describes how to troubleshoot for each phenomenon When an error occurs in the E71 identify the cause with the programming tool 2 gt Page 232 Section 16 2 16 6 1 Communications cannot be performed with the connected device The following table lists how to troubleshoot the problem when the E71 cannot communicate with the connected device Check item Action Reset the CPU module If resetting the CPU module does not turn on the RUN LED on the E71 the hardware of the E71 may be faulty Replace the Is the RUN LED of the E71 on E71 and restart all the connected devices that were performing communications with the own station 1 Does the connected device conform to the Ethernet Replace the device with one conforming to the Ethernet standard standard Is the cable securely connected 237 Page 56 CHAPTER 5 e Securely lock the cable e Check the wiring L gt Page 61 Section 6 2 Set the network parameter mode to Online Is the network parameter mode set to Online Does the communication data code ASCII or binary setting match with that of the connected device L gt Page 65 Section 7 1 2 If the data code settings do no
283. n completion execute the close process APPENDICES Appendix 8 Operation Image and Data Structure of Predefined Protocol Appendix 8 1 Operation image of each communication type of protocol In the predefined protocol function communications with connected devices is performed through the communication type Send Only Receive Only or Send amp Receive This section describes the operation images of each communication type 1 When the communication type is Send Only The specified packet is sent once Send data Connected device The operation image of Send Only is as follows a When the instruction ends normally ECPRTCL instruction na Lo Completion device 1 Waiting time to send E71 Send packet Connected device Send packet 090 0 d Jo ad UOIWEDIUNWULUOD yoes jo BHew vonelado g xipueddy 020 0 4 pauljepaJg JO siNjonyS ejeg pue shew vonelado g xipuaddy 329 b When the instruction ends abnormally at TCP timeout error An error has ECPRTCL instruction x occurred Completion device x The device turns on upon abnormal end Completion device 1 Waiting time tosend t TCP ULP timer Io E71 Send packet no response is received from the connected device The packet cannot be sent or Connected device y Point For an error occurred when the communication ends abnormally refer to the error code stored in the buffer memory L gt
284. n of the instruction D1 1 also turns on if the instruction ends abnormally S2 Start number of the device that stores control data Device name System 2 Control data Device Hem Setting data Setting range Set by sapo sytemarea Y Stores the status at completion S2 1 COmpie ion e 00004 Normal completion System status e Values other than 0000y Abnormal end error code 196 CHAPTER 15 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 Functions e This instruction performs the close process for a connection specified by S1 for the module specified by Un connection closed e Completion of the CLOSE instruction can be checked with Completion device D1 0 and D1 1 Item Description Turns on at the END process of the scan where the CLOSE instruction is completed and Completion device D1 0 turns off at the next END process Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the CLOSE instruction e Normal completion Stays off and does not change Completion device D1 1 a e Abnormal end Turns on at the END process of the scan where the CLOSE instruction is completed and turns off at the next END process Operation while the CLOSE instruction is being executed END END END Program process process process CLOSE instruction Executed Completion device Y Completion device 1 Abnormally ended Y Connection p closed e The ZP CLOSE instruction is executed on the rising edge
285. n open process is performed an open request cannot be canceled before the open process is completed Perform a close process Execute the CLOSE instruction after the open process is completed 1 3 UDP IP Communications This section describes UDP IP communications In UDP IP communications the system does not establish a connection and does not check whether each data has arrived at the destination normally thereby reducing the load on the line However UDP IP communications do not guarantee data reliability as the TCP IP communications do 1 3 1 Communication process Unlike TCP IP communications UDP IP communications do not require connections to be established with connected devices Server Client The client opens the port Data sending The client specifies the destination and sends data to it Data sending request The server requests data reception and reads the received data Receive process reading Data sending Data sending request Receive process reading The client performs the close process Point O lfa timeout has occurred in the alive check function the corresponding bit of Open completion signal address 5000p automatically turns off and the communication line is closed O After the connected device sends a close request to the E71 wait for 500ms or more before performing an open process again 78 CHAPTER 7 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE 1 3 2 Open pro
286. n speed SPEED 100Mbps OFF 10Mbps or a cable not connected ME Indicates data communication status SD RD Data communications in progress Data not sent or not received _ gt Page 236 Section 16 4 3 10BASE T 100BASE TX A connector to connect an E71 to the 10BASE T or 100BASE TX network An E71 judges whether communication connector to connect to the 10BASE T or 100BASE TX network based on the hub RJ45 Serial number display A display indicating the serial number printed on the rating plate DIN rail hook A hook to install the module on a DIN rail 4 The OPEN LED turns on and off depending on the open status of user connections 1 to 16 The open status of the system connections e g automatic open UDP port is not included 2 If the COM ERR LED is on it does not turn off even if the error cause is eliminated For how to turn off the LED refer to How to Turn Off the COM ERR LED gt Page 293 Section 16 10 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS This chapter describes the performance specifications functions CPU module I O signals and buffer memory areas of an E71 3 1 General Specifications For the general specifications of an E71 refer to the following Safety Guidelines the manual included with the CPU module 3 2 Performance Specifications The following table lists the performance specifications of an E71 Specifications Item LJ71E71 100 100BASE TX 10BASE T Data
287. nables to register up to 16 receive packets expected packets When the data are received the registered receive packet expected packet is verified in order of registration When the receive packet expected packet is matched to the data the receive process is completed Receive packets o expected packets No 1 No 2 No 3 No 16 y Sixteen receive Not matched i Matched packets can be A f registered Woe ea E A a re e a lo Receive data gt ip Received E e EEEE l a EESE EERE S l 3 When received data are not matched to all receive packets expected packets The received data are discarded Receive packets When sixteen expected packets No 1 No 2 o No 16 receive packets were registered lt Not matched Not matched Receive data Lp q gt SS Discarded Jayq9ed ania9a jo uoneJado uoge Z g xipueddy 020 0 4 pauljepalg JO siNjoNyS ejeg pue shew vonelado g xipuaddy 335 Appendix 8 3 Data examples of packet elements This section describes the procedures for the processing and practical data examples of each element placed in a packet 1 Length a Procedures The E71 processes a Length element as follows When sending Data flow Forward direction Connected device gt 3210 0123 30H Length calculating result Conversion ASCII D 0123 3210 hexadecimal i 3 33H a 2301 1032 When receiving Data flow Forward direction Length calculati
288. names are correct C1714 An error was returned from the DNS server l ue l l e Check with the network administrator if the DNS function of the server specified in the DNS setting is properly operating e Check if the IP address of the DNS server is correct e Check if the mail server names SMTP server names and POP server names are correct C1724 An error was returned from the DNS server l _ l l e Check with the network administrator if the DNS function of the server specified in the DNS setting is properly operating 284 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING Error code Error description Action e Check if the IP address of the DNS server is correct e Check if the mail server names SMTP server names and POP server names are correct C173y An error was returned from the DNS server l oa e Check with the network administrator if the DNS function of the server specified in the DNS setting is properly operating Check if the IP address of the DNS server is correct Check if the mail server names SMTP server names and POP server names are correct C174y An error was returned from the DNS server Check with the network administrator if the DNS function of the server specified in the DNS setting is properly operating Check if the IP address of the DNS server is correct Check if the mail server names SMTP server names and POP server names are correct C1754 An error was returned from the DNS server Check with
289. nauthorized access To have the programmable controller system fully secured against unauthorized access from the connected devices take additional measures Mitsubishi Electric Corporation does not hold any responsibility for any system problems caused by unauthorized access The following are examples of measures against unauthorized access e Install a firewall e Install a personal computer as a relay station and control the relay of communication data using an application program e Install the connected device that can control access rights Please consult with your network service provider or networking equipment manufacturer as a relay station 14 3 1 Application This function allows or prohibits access from connected devices to the CPU module through the following modules This prevents remote unauthorized access to the CPU module e E71 e Built in Ethernet port LCPU e C24 174 CHAPTER 14 OTHER FUNCTIONS 14 3 2 Remote password setting processes unlock and lock processes This section describes the processes that enable disable access from the connected devices to the programmable controller 1 Access permission process unlock process To access the specified CPU module the connected device performs a remote password unlock process for the remote password protected E71 on the station in direct connection own station The following are unlock process methods e Dedicated command of the MC protocol remote passwo
290. nd the connected device and confirm the normal completion of the open process of the connection number 1 Receive data from the destination e Fixed buffer reception status signal address 5005y b0 ON Execute the BUFRCV instruction to read the receive data length and receive data from the fixed buffer number 1 e Fixed buffer reception status signal address 50054 b0 OFF When the receive data length and the receive data are completely read out a response is sent to the destination End the receive process If the data receive process is abnormally ended execute the BUFRCV instruction again to repeat the receive process 124 CHAPTER 12 COMMUNICATIONS USING A FIXED BUFFER Point O The items configured in the open setting become enabled when Open completion signal of an E71 is started up O When the buffer memory area that stores Fixed buffer reception status signal is turned off and on execute the BUFRCV instruction O When abnormal data is received Fixed buffer reception status signal does not turn on In addition data is not stored in the fixed buffer number 1 area 91Np99014 Hulnisoey Ad tz l uonon41sul ADYS3N9 wesboid ulew y Buisn Huiao ged LYZ 125 2 No procedure The following is the receive process performed in the fixed buffer number 1 area for the connection number 1 Initial process Open process Receiving data Initial normal completion E signal X19 Open completion signal O
291. nd the receive process is performed Send data Receive data 1 Connected Not matched Header Data Receive packet device ted packet expected packet Discarded Receive data 2 Sixteen receive packets can be specified J Received The operation image of Send amp Receive is as follows a When the instruction ends normally ECPRTCL instruction Completion device Completion device 1 Waiting time to send Waiting time to receive Oe E71 The receive data matched the receive packet expected packet Connected device Send packet Receive data 090 0 1d Jo ad uonesiunuuuOo9 yoea jo BHew vonelado xipueddy 020 0 4 pauljepaJg JO siNjoNS ejeg pue shew vonelado g xipuaddy 333 A b When the instruction ends abnormally timeout error at sending h l ECPRTCL instruction ONE Anerorhas occurred Completion device The device turns on upon abnormal end Completion device 1 Waiting time to send t TCP ULP timer Send packet The packet cannot be sent or no response is received from the connected device Discarded c When the instruction ends abnormally timeout error of waiting time to receive Connected device An error has ECPRTCL instruction XK occurred Completion device x The device turns on upon Completion device 1 abnormal end Waiting time t waiting time to receive or the time to send specified by the des
292. ndeeerdecetaean ee iii 318 Appendix 6 Seli Diagnostic TeStS iii 26324 A RS cae ecw anes NARA 322 Appendix 6 1 Self loopback test oii bee e ee a deeded toate 322 Appendix 6 2 Hardware test H W Test 0 0 eee eens 323 Appendix 7 Differences from Ethernet Modules of Other SeriesS o ooooo o 324 Appendix 7 1 Differences from a built in Ethernet port LCPU 0005 324 Appendix 7 2 Differences from Q series modules 0 000 cc ee es 324 Appendix 7 3 Differences from QnA A series modules o ooocooocoooon nooo 324 Appendix 8 Operation Image and Data Structure of Predefined Protocol 329 Appendix 8 1 Operation image of each communication type of protocol 329 Appendix 8 2 Verification operation of receive packet 0 0 0 cc eee eee 335 Appendix 8 3 Data examples of packet elements oo ooocooocooonoo noe 336 Appendix 9 Sample Program on the Connected Device Side o o ooooooo o 340 Appendix 9 1 When Visual C NET is used ooo 342 Appendix 9 2 When Visual Basic NET is used 0 0 0 0 ccc cece eee eeeeeeeeeees 351 Appendix 10 Checking the Serial Number Function Version and MAC address 360 Appendix 11 External Dimension Diagram 0 0 000 cee ee ene 361 Appendix 12ASCII Code List 0 0 0 0 eee eee eens 362 INDEX 363 REVISION So e evi Ot Gea eee be ee ee SRE N
293. ndix 6 2 e Self loopback test gt Page 322 Appendix 6 1 241 wojduw s Aq BunooysajqnoJ 9 94 POWJOJJEd aq jouue9 GINS Buisn suonesiunWWOD g 991 16 6 7 The protocol setting data cannot be read or written The following table lists how to troubleshoot the problem when the protocol setting data cannot be read or written Check that GX Works2 and the CPU module are connectable on the Transfer Setup of GX Works2 before troubleshooting the problem 1 To read the protocol setting data Check item Action Are the values in Protocol setting data error information l l address 53244 to 53274 and Number of registered Write the protocol setting data to the E71 because they have not been written protocols address 53284 set to 0 2 To write the protocol setting data Check item Action Did the ERR LED turn on after writing the protocol setting Check the values in Protocol setting data error information address 53244 data to 53274 and correct the error Point When an error is detected in the edited protocol check that the conditions for element placement are satisfied in the Packet Setting Especially the following conditions must be satisfied e When a Non conversion Variable Variable length or Non verified Reception Variable number of characters is placed behind a Length and is not included in the Length calculating range place Static Data immediate after the Non conversion Variable or Non verified Recepti
294. nected device and the Ethernet address e Use the default value FFFFFFFFFFFF if the connected device has the ARP function If it does not have the function set the MAC address e Check the operation of the connected device There is no connected device with the IP address that has C0334 been set e Because there may be congestion of packets on the line send data after a certain period of time e Check if the cable is disconnected On the ARP table there is no connected device with the IP ae ee C0344 Decrease the number of communication destinations address that has been set e Check the operation of the connected device The existence of the connected device could not be C0354 e Correct the settings of the alive check checked within the response monitoring timer value e Check if the cable is disconnected 266 Error code Error description C0364 C0404 C0414 C0424 C0434 C044 C045 C046 C047 C048 C049 CO4Ayy C04B CO04Cy Because a cable is not connected or disconnected the send process cannot be executed e Not all the data could be received within the response monitoring timer value e Sufficient data for the data length could not be received e The remaining part of the message divided at the TCP IP level could not be received within the response monitoring timer value There is an error in the checksum of the receive data when TCP is used T
295. nection No 16 b15 20481 l ae Connection System area H status information Open request signal area e 0 No open request e 1 Open being requested Connection No 1 b0 20482 5002 Connection No 2 b1 to Connection No 16 b15 20483 and 20484 storage area mn 50034 and 5004p ystem area Fixed buffer reception status signal e 0 Data not received Fixed buffer 1 Data being received Connection status ai inf ti C tion No 1 bO x 5005 information onnec ion 0 1 b0 area Connection No 2 b1 to Connection No 16 b15 Remote password status Remote e 0 Unlock status no remote password setting 20486 Fa Lock ae si 50064 status onnec ion 0 1 b0 storage Connection No 2 b1 area to TTE Connection No 16 b15 gu Nw Remote password status mes Remote e 0 Unlock status no remote password setting 2 D assword e 1 Lock status S z 20487 P o D status e Auto open UDP port b0 x c 3 500714 Se i Ro storage e MELSOFT application transmission port UDP b1 D area e MELSOFT application transmission port TCP b2 2 e FTP transmission port b3 3 Svein port System port use prohibited designation lt information area e 0 Use allowed Q 20488 System port 4 Use prohibited lt n 50084 use Auto open UDP port b0 A n premblles e MELSOFT application transmission port UDP b1 designation MELSOFT application transmission port TCP b2 area 20489 to 20591 sue
296. nel specified by another station in communications using data link instructions is currently in e Execute the request from another station again use A message exceeding the receive message size was oe e Correct the send message size of the request source received There is an error in the IP address set in the Station No lt In the Station No lt gt IP information setting set the IP addresses for the CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H and MELSECNET 10 relay communication target devices gt IP information setting for CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 relay communications ott e Increase the request interval There is no insufficient space in the receive buffer of the e Decrease the number of request nodes relay station PC number for MELSOFT connection or data re ae oe e Wait for a response to the previous request before link instructions or the communication request destination sending the next request station Receive buffer full error e Correct the timeout value A request that cannot be processed was issued from the e Correct the request details programmable controller CPU e Correct the network number or PC number Data that cannot be processed by the programmable e Correct the request details controller CPU or Ethernet module was specified e Cancel the current request The channel number is outside the allowable range
297. net Module Configuration max AA AAA A E Fa Set network configuration setting in CC IE Field configuration window T AAA AS O id CN A tt SY AER D E EE INN a IN AE a IE AE ra A AN A A AAA A A A A Necessary Settina No Setting Already Set Set if itis nmeeded Mo Setting Already Set Start IJO No Valid Module During Other Station Access 1 v Please input 16 point unit HEX to start I O No in which module is mounted irme Routing Parameters Assignment Image roup 5e Check End Cancel pete Print Window Print Window Preview 4 Network Type Select Ethernet NN l l Within the number of I O points of the ao Start I O No Set the start I O number of the E71 in units of 16 points Nw CPU module w D DA Network No Set the network number of the E71 1 to 239 2 3 y Group No Set the group number of the E71 O to 32 e S Station No Set the station number of the E71 1 to 64 a 2 e Online gt e Offline a Mode Select the operation mode of the E71 Fo e Self Loopback Test H W Test S e O O 3 3 C gt O D n 65 7 1 3 Ethernet Operation Setting Configure the settings such as an IP address to connect the E71 to Ethernet O Project window gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt Ethernet CC IE Field gt Select Ethernet under Network Type gt button Ethernet Operation Setting Communication Data
298. ng MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 2 Handling precautions Do not drop or apply strong shock to the E71 case since it is made from resin 60 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6 2 Wiring This section describes Ethernet cable wiring and wiring precautions For a network configuration and cables and hubs used refer to SYSTEM CONFIGURATION gt Page 56 CHAPTER 5 1 Ethernet cable connection The following is how to connect and disconnect an Ethernet cable a Connecting the cable 1 Power off the E71 and the connected device 2 Push the Ethernet cable connector into the E71 until it clicks Pay attention to the connector s direction 3 Power on the E71 and the connected device 1 Power off the system 2 Press the latch down and unplug the Ethernet cable BULIM Z 9 61 62 2 Precautions This section describes wiring precautions a Handling Place the Ethernet cable in a duct or clamp them If not dangling cable may swing or inadvertently be pulled resulting in damage to the module or cables or malfunction due to poor contact Do not touch the core of the cable side or module side connector and protect it from dirt or dust If oil from your hand dirt or dust is attached to the core it can increase transmission loss arising a problem in data link Check the following e Is any Ethe
299. nnection No 5 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 OL 24 N D C 37 ao 251 Connection No 6 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 o gt H h 38 al 3 Connection No 7 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 D 3 26 a 39 S 2711 Connection No 8 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 2 H lt 40 2 Own station port No On O o 284 oD 0 41 to 42 Serr E 0 O i estination IP address 294 and 2A Connection i 43 No 1 o 2B1 Communica Destination Port No 0H O tion address 44 to 46 setting area inati FFFFFFFFFFFF 2Cy to 2E Destination MAC address x 47 to 53 2Fy to 35 Connection No 2 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 54 to 60 364 to 3Cy Connection No 3 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 3 Address Programming Decimal Application Initial value tool setting Hexadecimal applicability 61 to 67 ae i 3D to 434 Connection No 4 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 H 68 to 74 a l 44 to 4Ap Connection No 5 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 H 75 to 81 Communica 4B to 51 Communication tion address Connection No 6 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 H H parameter setting Setting area 82 to 88 hea A 524 to 58 Connection No 7 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 89 to 95 594 to 5Fy Connection N
300. not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Because there may be congestion of packets on the line send data from the connected device after a certain period of time e Check if the cable is disconnected If the actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Follow the procedure below 1 Check if the Ethernet module the power supply module and the CPU module are properly connected 2 Check if the operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the CPU module 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual for each module If the actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Follow the procedure below 1 Check if the Ethernet module the power supply module and the CPU module are properly connected 2 Check if the operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the CPU module 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual for each module If the actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Check the address of the DNS server e Check if communications with the DNS server can be performed using the PING command e Check if the IP addres
301. nsmission Port Qfyou enable the remote password the dedicated instructions and the CC IE Control NET 1 OH Mecessary Settinel Mo Setting AreadySet 3 relay transmission function can not be used HTTF Port ATTP Protocol Clear End Cancel Ifthe remote password ofthe port Klis enabled the existence confirmation function will be walid When the remote password is enabled write the parameter to the PLE and reset the PLE or turn off the power and turn on the power again Cancel Password Setting Enter a password set for the CPU module Select the module model that checks an Model Name entered remote password against the remote LJ71E71 100 Remote password set for the CPU module Password Password Active Module Setting Setting Start XY Set the start address of the module that checks 0000 to OFEO an entered remote password the R te P Detail Setting window User Connection No 13 Connection 1 to Connection 16 Auto Open UDP Port FTP Transmission Port TCP IP dle MELSOFT Application Transmission Port Specify a connection where an entered remote TCP IP Detail Setting System Connection 2 l password is checked MELSOFT Application Transmission Port UDP IP Dedicated Instruction CC Link IE NET 10 H Relay Transmission Port HTTP Port HTTP Protocol 4 The user connection is used to perform MC protocol communications and fixed buffer communications 2 The system connection is used in the system
302. numbers assigned to connected modules f Ex hen 1000 is specified in Start X Y to the slot where a 16 point module is connected the assignment range of an input module is changed to X1000 to X100F For details refer to the following ELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals Point Set the type of the connected module in Type Setting a different type results in SP UNIT LAY ERR E pa module the I O points must also be the same in addition to the I O assignment setting CLF Page 30 Section 4 2 2 When an intelligent module is connected 1 O assignment can be omitted by selecting connected modules from Intelligent Function Module in the Project window The chapter of the current page is shown The section of the current page is shown Point Pshows notes that requires attention Remark shows useful information 73 4 The mouse operation example for GX Works2 is provided below Menu bar XZ Online 2 gt Write to PLC Select Online on the menu bar and then select Write to PLC A window selected in the view selection area is displayed XO Project window 5 gt Parameter gt PLC Parameter Select Project from the view selection area to open the Project window In the Project window expand Parameter and select PLC Parameter View selection area TE MELSOFT Series GX Works2 Unset Project PRG MAIN
303. o 23668 5C49 to 5C74 23669 to 23712 5C75 to 5CAO y 23713 to 24575 24576 6000 24577 to 25599 6001 to 63FFy 25600 to 26623 64004 to 67FF y 26624 to 27647 6800 to 6BFFp 27648 to 28671 6C00 to GFFF yy 28672 to 29695 7000 to 73FF y 29696 to 30719 7400 to 77FFy 30720 to 31743 7800 to 7BFF yy 31744 to 32767 1 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Application Initial value Error code Command code Error log block 2 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 1 Send E mail status Error log block 3 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 storage area Error log block 4 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 5 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 6 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 7 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 8 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 memes O Data length OH Fixed buffer No 9 Fixed buffer data Oy Fixed buffer No 10 The bit configuration is the same as Fixed buffer No 9 Fixed buffer No 11 The bit configuration is the same as Fixed buffer No 9 Fixed buffer dat aden eens Fixed buffer No 12 The bit configuration is the same as Fixed buffer No 9 area Fixed buffer No 13 The bit configuration is the s
304. o 8 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 96 to 102 60 to 66 System area 103 and 104 sal _ 67 4 and 68 ystem area y Initial d 0 x nitial error code H 691 106 and 107 l 6A and 6B Own station IP address 0H x 108 to 110 6Cy to 6Ep Own station MAC address 0H x 111 to 115 GF to 734 Area for the System area initial 116 74 3 process Auto open UDP port number x H 117 75n System area H 118 Station number b0 to b7 a 76 Network number of the own station b8 to b15 119 Own station group number x 7TH Communication 120 status storage area 78 Own station port No 0H x H 121 and 122 REON 79 and 7Ay Destination IP address 0H x 123 ay Sigs 7B Destination Port No 0H x H 124 7Cy Open error code OH x H 125 ogon Connection information Fixed buffer sending error code Oy x 7D No 1 area 126 TE Connection end code 0H x H 127 Fixed buffer communication time 0 7 7F y Maximum value E 128 Fixed buffer communication time 0 e 804 Minimum value 129 Fixed buffer communication time 0 X 814 Current value e 38 Address Application Decimal Hexadecimal 130 to 139 82 to 8By 140 to 149 8Cy to 95y 150 to 159 96 to 9Fy Connection information 160 to 169 AOp to A9 area 170 to 179 AA y to B34 180 to 189 B44 to BD 190 to 199 BE to C7 y 200 C81 Communication status storage area Area for module sta
305. o by the CPU module Start I O number of the master local module of the own station 00 to FE Upper 2 digits of the I O number expressed in 3 digits Start device of the own station where control data is stored gt Page 157 Section 10 4 1 a Start device of the target station where data to be read is stored Page 159 Section 10 4 1 b Start device of othe wn station where read data is stored A continuous area for the read data length is required 7 Page 159 Section 10 4 1 b Device of the own station which is turned ON for 1 scan upon completion of the instruction D2 1 is turned ON as well when the instruction fails e Instructions can be executed under the following conditions Any time On the rising edge During off On the falling edge a e The following devices can be used Internal device Constant A File register X Y M L F VB T ST C D W KO HO 0 a For bit data a bit specified word device can be used For example Word device Bit No is used for the bit specification of a word device The bit number is specified in hexadecimal For example the bit 10 of DO is specified by DO A However bit specification cannot be used for timer T retentive timer ST and counter C 14 For details on each device refer to the following User s manual function explanation program fundamentals for the CPU module used The following data types can be used
306. occurred in the protocol setting data when the power supply is on or reset or at the data check after the data writing Protocol setting data error error code C402 occurs Predefined protocol ready X1D turns off and the COM ERR LED turns on at this time UOICOIUNWWLWOD O9OJOJH PSUNSPaJd JO UONIPUO UOI NDEeXy pL 109 11 5 Example of Predefined Protocol Communications This section describes an example of communications using the predefined protocol under the following system configuration 11 5 1 System configuration example 1 System configuration LCPU 1 LCPU 2 192 0 1 100 192 0 1 101 GX Works2 ARANA DA Yn Ethernet 110 CHAPTER 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING THE PREDEFINED PROTOCOL 11 5 2 Parameter Setting 1 Sending side LCPU 1 side The following is an example of the parameter settings of the sending side LCPU 1 side a Basic setting The following is an example of the basic setting Network Parameter MELSECNET CC IE Ethernet Module Configuration AAR Set network configuration setting in CC IE Field configuration window Module 4 Network No Operation Setting Sd Initial Setting E Open Setting FTP Parameters E mail Setting Interrupt Settings Router Relay Parameter A Station No lt gt 1P Infomation Necessary Setting Mo Setting Already Set Set if it is needed Mo Setting Already Set Start I O No Valid Module During Other Station Access fi
307. odule are properly connected e Check that the programmable controller CPU is not in the reset status An error was detected in the programmable controller CPU COE3y e Check if an error exists in the programmable controller CPU If an error exists take the action required to correct it e Replace the power supply module programmable SP SPOD 10113 2 94 controller CPU or intelligent function module e Check that the programmable controller CPU and each intelligent function module are properly connected e Check that the programmable controller CPU is not in the reset status An error was detected in the programmable controller COE4 i e Check if an error exists in the programmable controller CPU If an error exists take the action required to correct it e Replace the power supply module programmable AJOW SOW JONG y Ul P3J0 S SSPOd 10114 9L controller CPU or intelligent function module e Check that the programmable controller CPU and each intelligent function module are properly connected e Check that the programmable controller CPU is not in the reset status An error was detected in the programmable controller COE5 y ant e Check if an error exists in the programmable controller CPU If an error exists take the action required to correct it e Replace the power supply module programmable controller CPU or intelligent function module 275 Error code Error description COE6 y
308. of the E71 are X Y00 to X Y1F D2 Specify the open abnormal code of connection 1 D3 Specify the latest error information M1 M10 Execute the ERRRD instruction D100 Process upon completion Error information is read D101 Process upon abnormal end M1 a y N U m D T D O 225 15 13 ZPUINI This instruction changes the setting such as the Ethernet operation setting and re initializes the E71 Command zPuIN f Available device Seni Internal device a Link direct device Intelligent Index Conca i ile y system user a JO O function module register Others Bi Word Bit Word zn KH ALA AAA lA BETIS Tere o lelec gt 1 The file registers set for each local device and program cannot be used device UO GO 1 Setting data Setting data Description Set by Data type Drin Start I O number of the E71 00 to FEy The first two digits j BIN 16 bit character n Un ser of the three digit I O number string S1 Start number of the device that stores control data Device name The start number of the bit device in the own station that D1 turns on for one scan upon completion of the instruction System Bit D1 1 also turns on if the instruction ends abnormally 226 CHAPTER 15 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 2 Control data Device tem Setting data Setting range Set by sino syemaca Stores the status at completion S1 1 Completion status 00004 Nor
309. of unauthorized access through a remote password This function prevents unauthorized remote access to the CPU module The E71 checks an entered remote password in data communications from a connected device using remote password protected connection 2357 Page 174 Section 14 3 22 CHAPTER 1 FEATURES 7 E mail sending receiving e mail function This function sends and receives e mails to and from a connected device in a remote location via the Internet For details refer to the following MELSEC Q L Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Application a E mail sending receiving through the CPU module The following data can be sent and received using the MSEND MRECYV instructions e The CPU module can receive send up to 6K word data from to a personal computer or other E71 modules as an e mail attachment e The CPU module can send up to 960 word data to a personal computer or portable terminal as the main text of an e mail b E mail sending using the programmable controller CPU monitoring function Notification conditions CPU module status or device values that have been set using parameters are regularly monitored When the conditions are met up to 960 word data can be sent by either of the following data formats e Attachment e Main text Internet Sending receiving e mail Mail server Mail server AI emm emma manm AAA A DANNA DA E fl Mi ROARAR DRA 0 lt A Y Oooo ey ann Connected device 23
310. off even after the error cause is removed Turn it off using the following methods 1 Using an I O signal Turn off the COM ERR LED by turning on COM ERR LED OFF request Y 17 An off request continues to be issued while COM ERR LED OFF request Y 17 is on However this method does not clear the error information in the error log area in the buffer memory COM ERR LED OFF cut la signal Y17 COM ERR LED ON signal X1C A Zz hs 2 Using a dedicated instruction Turn off the COM ERR LED using the ERRCLR instruction gt Page 219 Section 15 11 This method can also clear the error information initial error code open error code or the error log 3 In the Ethernet Diagnostics window Turn off the COM ERR LED by clicking the com enr off button in the Ethernet Diagnostics window However this method does not clear the error information in the error log area in the buffer memory For the window refer to Ethernet Diagnostics 237 Page 290 Section 16 8 4 Using the MC protocol Turn off the COM ERR LED using the dedicated command for the MC protocol LED off Error code initialization 1617 For details refer to the following MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual G41 YHJ WOOD 24 HO UNL 0 MOH OL 9L 293 APPENDICES Appendix 1 Processing Time Communications using an ASCII code Communications using a binary code 0 0033 Calculate the minimum process
311. ogramming tool or to check the existence of a connected device such as a personal computer having a specified IP address Programming tool Executing the PING test SRE Specifying the IP address Esherne cr rr cr rr eee eeeeeeeee ee eee E lt a Applications The line status between the programming tool personal computer and the E71 can be checked 312 APPENDICES b Operating procedure Use the following procedure 1 Click the PING Test button in the Ethernet Diagnostics window DO Diagnostics gt Ethernet Diagnostics gt Target Module Setting under Module No 2 Configure the settings and click the button ecute Cancel 189 ONId G xipueddy 19949 sn e s aun G xIpueddy 3 Click the button MELSOFT Application 313 PING Test 314 Input Item Address Specification IP Address Input Form i IP Address 192 168 3 40 f pec HEX 7 IP Address Host Name Setting Options Display the host name Default Specify the data size Je Bytes Specify the time of the communication tine check 1 Seconds Specify the number of transmissions specify the number of times Times Execute Gancel Result inging 192 168 3 40 with 32 bytes of data Reply From 192 168 3 40 bytes 32 time lt 1ms TTL 250 Reply From 192 168 3 40 bytes 32 time lt 1ms TTL 250 Reply From 192 168 3 40 bytes 32 time lt 1ms TTL 250 Reply F
312. om another module Then cancel the operation to perform communications again e Correct the specified device e Do not access a device which does not exist Check if the CPU module of the station number set for the PC number has been disconnected Then remove the cause of the disconnection to perform communications again There is a hardware problem with the CPU module intelligent function module or the E71 Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 263 S1 SPOD 10113 91 3481 31 a qneduo9 y ue Buisn SUOI EOIUNLWWOD Buunp paUIn 31 SISPOI9 jewJouqy Z 9L 16 7 3 Error codes stored in the buffer memory The following table lists the error codes stored in each buffer memory area when an error occurs For the buffer memory areas where these error codes are stored refer to the descriptions of the corresponding buffer memory area 237 Page 35 Section 3 5 2 Error code Error description Action 00y 02H 00504 00514 00524 0054 The error details and how to troubleshoot the problem are the same as those for the end code returned to the connected H device in data communications _ gt Page 259 Section 16 7 1 0055 y 0056 y 0057 y 00584 00594 e The CPU module and the Ethernet module cannot 005B communicate e Check the error code appended to the end code and i e The programmable controller CPU cannot process the correct the error request from the connected device e The communication time
313. ompletion device 1 Abnormally ended Sending data e The ZP BUFSND instruction is executed on the rising edge OFF ON of the sending command Point Do not perform a send process using l O signals and using the dedicated instruction together for the same connection Doing so will result in malfunction 5 Errors If a dedicated instruction ends with an error Completion device D1 1 turns on and the error code is stored in Completion status S2 1 On 00 N y 05 E Tl 0 Z 0 211 6 Program example The following shows a sample program that sends data stored on the fixed buffer of the connection number 1 when the I O signals of the E71 are X Y00 to X Y1F M3000 X1 9 MO PLS M3001 M3001 MOV K3 D300 MOV K1000 D301 MOV K2000 D302 MOV K9999 D303 ZP BUFSND UO K1 D3000 D300 M300 Process upon completion M301 J Provess upon abnormal end upon abnormal end 212 CHAPTER 15 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 15 9 ZPBUFRCV This instruction reads data received from the connected device through communications using a fixed buffer used in the main program Command zeeurrev f o Available device 4 Internal device Link direct device Intelligent Index c Setting data File i onstant system user a JO O function module register Others register bit Word gt gt sit Word device umen KH s e a o_ TE MES Zn 1 The file registers set for ea
314. on The setting value of the subnet address for the router relay Correct the subnet address and perform the initial process function is incorrect again e The setting value of the router IP address for the router ae AA e Correct the router IP address and perform the initial relay function is incorrect process again e Change the IP address of the Ethernet module in the own station to the same address as the network address e The network address network address after the subnet mask of the router IP address is different from that of the IP address of the Ethernet module in the own station The send receive process has been executed while the IP Do not execute the send receive process while executing address in use detection function is being executed the IP address in use detection function e Set different IP addresses One IP address is used for two or more modules The MAC addresses of the Ethernet modules in the stations with the same IP address can be checked in IP address status storage area 52814 to 5286p The setting value of the Ethernet module port number for sn e Correct the port number the open process is incorrect The setting value of the port number of the connected Ai e Correct the port number device for the open process is incorrect The port number set is used in a connection already e Correct the port numbers of the Ethernet module and the opened in TCP IP connected device The
315. on e When multiple Length elements are set in one packet configure the setting so that each Length calculating range does not overlap the others 242 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16 6 8 Data cannot be sent with communications using a fixed buffer The following table lists how to troubleshoot the problem when an E71 cannot send data with communications using a fixed buffer Check item Has the connection with the connected device been opened Check the corresponding bit of 5000 y in the buffer memory Is the IP address setting of the connected device correct Does the communication protocol TCP IP or UDP IP match with that of the connected device Was the BUFSND instruction executed Was the BUFSND instruction completed normally Has the data length of the send data been set in the control data Is the communication status of the connected device normal Has an open or initial error occurred in the error log area Action e Open the connection with the connected device e Check if the open close processes for I O signals and the OPEN CLOSE instructions are not used together for the same connection If so correct the program e Read Open error code address 124 7C in the communication status storage area Then check the error details and correct the error Check and correct the IP address of the connected device Use the same communication protocol TCP IP or UDP IP as that of the connected dev
316. on button System Monitor Monitor Status gt Connection Channel List 7 MF Monitoring Serial Port PLC Module Connection USB System Image m Main Block m Operation to Selected Module Main block Main block 120 Adr 01000200 0000 Slot CPU Model Name L26CPU BT nation Diagnostics Error History Detail r Block Information List Bock Mode Block Name Power Number Of Total Spats Block Series ModelName Point eee IO Network No umbe 1 Supply Modules Occupations Slot e Point Addres Station No r Of Power a Power Overall 1Block 1 LIV1E71 100 32Point Intelli 32Point 0000 1 1 L6EC END Cover sn E E Legend Error Major Error A Moderate Error AX Minor Error Assignment Error Assignment Incorrect Stop Monitor Print Product Information List System Error History Close 3 The H W Information is displayed H W Information Module Monitoring Model LI71E71 100 Product 140920000000000 m Display Format HEX C DEC Monitor Status m Hew LED Information H W SW Information Item Value Stop Monitor JOHUO A WSIJS S OU UM 3 ay JO SNn 8 S ay Bunj9ayo 6 94 291 Item Description Display Format Switches the input format of H W LED Information and H W SW Information INIT OPEN Indicates the statuses of th
317. on D D SET M3000 M251 Process upon abnormal end 307 308 M3000 UO G31 F U0 G105 HO Process upon completion RST M3000 SET M3001 U0 lt gt G105 HO Process upon abnormal end M1000 M3001 X19 MO M20 MOVP HO D100 ZP OPEN U0 K1 D100 M100 Process upon completion Communications enabled Process upon abnormal end M100 M101 M101 d Writing directly to the buffer memory APPENDICES The following shows an example where the stored values in the TCP Maximum Segment Transmission setting area and Communication condition setting Ethernet Operation Setting area is changed when the I O signals of the E71 are X Y00 to X Y1F Create a program with a contact such as a flag for user indicating the status of the open completion signal storage area SM400 U0 H _ J mov 20480 M6500 M A p _ J SET MOVP H8000 M2500 X19 MO M1 SET SET SET SET SET SET SET K4MO M2500 U0 G30 U0 G31 1 U0 G31 4 U0 G31 5 U0 G31 6 U0 G31 8 U0 G31 F M2500 M3001 M3002 Set TCP segment transmission not to be performed Set ASCII Code Set Use the KeepAlive Set IEEE802 3 Set Enable Online Change Set Always wait for OPEN Request a reinitialization process 309 890 14 Jen y xipuaddy 8990 Jd UONEezIenuiay 2 y xipueddy M3002 U0 G31 F U0 G105 HO Process upon completion RST M3002 SE
318. on of EEPROM TCP Maximum Segment Size Option transmission Hub connection status monitor function IP address in use detection function Communications using SLMP Data communications using the predefined protocol Module error collection function E71 SOLO 0 OG OO POs Oe Oe 190 al 19071 et TO OO O Fixed 325 sa npoul sa119s y yUD WO S8OUBJOYIG XIpuaddy SOLOS JOUIO JO SANPON J9UISUYIJ WO SEQUAJSHIQ J XIPpuaddy 326 1 2 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 For the E71 the number of connections for the open process from the CPU module has increased to 16 connections Compatible with the I O signal and QE71 N buffer memory Data of up to 960 words can be read from written to an E71 and up to 480 words in a QE71 N Availability depends on the CPU module and programming tool version This applies to a module with the software version of Q or earlier No EEPROM is installed Items registered in the EEPROM of a QE71 N are set using the parameter settings of the programming tool This applies to a module with the software version of E or later Ifthe E71 cannot communicate data when combined with a certain connected device the setting can be changed in the buffer memory address 30 1Ey L gt Page 35 Section 3 5 2 After changing the setting execute the reinitialization process Availability depends on the E71 and a programming tool version _ Page 300 Appendix 3 APPENDICES Poin
319. on result Conversion from ASCII hexadecimal to binary 0123 123H Connected device 0123 3210 336 APPENDICES b Data flow Data Flow is used to specify the order of send data and receive data Forward Direction Upper Byte gt Lower Byte Reverse Direction Lower Byte gt Upper Byte and Byte Swap by Word can be used as the Data Flow e Forward Direction and Reverse Direction Available when the Data Length is 2 bytes or more e Byte Swap Available only when the Data Length is 4 bytes c Calculating range for the length The following shows the specification examples of calculating range for the length Packet Packet Packet Packet Packet Packet element 1 element 2 element 3 element 30 element 31 element 32 EEES RENA Static data Length ll Static data Static data Static data variable Calculating range for the length Example 1 Example 2 Calculating range for the length Calculating range for the length Example 3 Example 1 Calculating range when its start is 3 and end is 3 Example 2 Calculating range when its start is 3 and end is 30 Example 3 Calculating range when its start is 1 and end is 32 sjuawaj9 jayx9ed jo s jdwex ejeq g g xipuaddy 020 0 4 pauljepalg JO siNjonyS ejeg pue ewj vonelado g xipuaddy 337 2 Non conversion Variable a Procedures The E71 processes a Non conversion Variable element as follows When the setting for Unit of Stored Data is Lower Byte Upper B
320. on type of the protocol executed and fixed buffer setting of the connection No specified by n1 must be matched The following table lists the combination of the communication type and the connection No that can be specified by n1 Communication type Connection No that can be specified by n1 e A connection where Send is selected in the open setting When the communication type of all protocols executed up no paring open setting to eight protocols is Send Only ad e A connection where paring open is set me iss e A connection where Receive is selected in the open When the communication type of all protocols executed up setting no paring open setting to eight protocols is Receive Only e A connection where paring open is set me When the communication type of any protocol executed up to eight protocols is Send amp Receive dl gt A connection where paring open is set i When the communication types of protocols executed up to eight protocols are Send Only and Receive Only 4 To specify a connection where paring open is set either of pairing opened connections can be specified 2 When a pairing opened connection is specified an extra connection is used ge When the protocols executed include the communication type of Send amp Receive or Send Only and Receive Only pairing open setting is required CHAPTER 15 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS e Completion of the ECPRTCL instruction can be checked with Comple
321. onfiguration The following system configuration is used for explanation purpose LCPU 1 LCPU 2 10 97 85 222 10 97 85 223 le ll Ethernet 12 9 2 Parameter setting This section describes a parameter setting example 1 Sending side LCPU 1 side The following is an example of the parameter settings of the sending side LCPU 1 side a Basic setting The following is an example of the basic setting Network Parameter MELSECNET CC IE Ethernet Module Configuration ax A uoieIn uoo W S S 6Zl J9a4ng pexi4 e Buisn suoneoaiunwwog jo ajduex3 621 Set network configuration setting in CC IE Field configuration window AAA AAA ethernet AAN Operation Setting Initial Setting E Open Setting Necessary Setting No Setting Already Set Set if it is needed Mo Setting Already Set Start I O No Valid Module During Other Station Access 1 y Please input 16 point unit HEX to start I O No in which module is mounted Acknowledge xY A e pia Routing Parameters Assignment Image sroup Setting Check End Cancel A 3 Print Window Print Window retin 4 Inte 145 b Ethernet operation setting The following is an example of the Ethernet operation setting Ethernet Operation Setting ol c Open setting The following is an example of the open setting Network Parameter Ethernet Open Setting Module No 1 SE ec Active ww Send wv Proce
322. onitoring timer value the E71 performs the following processes e Sends the ABORT RST instruction to the connected device and closes the line e Notifies the CPU module that an open error has occurred by turning on Open abnormal detection signal X18 e Stores the error code in the open error code storage area The error code is not stored in the error log storage area AE SE SE EE SE BE ZE DE ZE ZE ZE ZE IE JE J JE S E I E o o o o o o o o o o o o D e D o eee E e E e E o o e e o e o o OCU o E E e E e a a UO CHAPTER 12 COMMUNICATIONS USING A FIXED BUFFER 2 No procedure In the application data for communications in the No Procedure control method the following data code is expressed in a binary code Communications are performed using a binary code regardless of the communication data code setting Text command De a A _0__ _ Maximum of 2046 bytes Point In communications in the No Procedure control method a subheader or data length setting is not added unlike the Procedure Exist control method therefore all data are handled as a valid text In addition the E71 turns on Fixed buffer reception status signal after storing the size of the received message packet in the data length storage area It is recommended to set a checking method For example include data length and a data type code in the application data of a message so that the number of bytes and data type of the application data can be identified on the r
323. ons are not available e MC protocol communications e Communications using a fixed buffer procedure exists e Communications using a fixed buffer no procedure e Communications using a random access buffer File transfer FTP server function e mail function Web function or MELSOFT connection which uses a dedicated connection can be executed while the ECPRTCL instruction is being executed When protocols which include Non conversion Variable are executed and the data length of the variable for one packet exceeds 1920 bytes the value of the CPU module device may not be acquired at one scan Do not change the value of the CPU module device specified in Non conversion Variable until the ECPRTCL instruction is completed Buffer memory is not affected by the sequence scan of the CPU module Assigning them in a variable enables more high speed process than assigning the CPU module device If the protocol setting data is written while the ECPRTCL instruction is being executed protocol execution is canceled upon the writing completion Protocol setting data writing during the ECPRTCL instruction execution error code C430 occurs and the ECPRTCL instruction ends abnormally When the open setting for the specified connection and the communication type of the protocol executed does not match Connection number setting error error code C4074 occurs and the ECPRTCL instruction ends abnormally When the waiting time is set to 0 wait in
324. ons of the CPU module 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual for each module Ifthe actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Follow the procedure below 1 Check if the Ethernet module the power supply module and the CPU module are properly connected 2 Check if the operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the CPU module 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual for each module Ifthe actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Correct the specified arrival monitoring time e Correct the specified channel number e Check the status of the send source station and relay station e Follow the procedure below 1 Check if the Ethernet module the power supply module and the CPU module are properly connected 2 Check if the operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the CPU module 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual for each module Ifthe actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING Error code Error description Action e Check that the progr
325. operates as a client Based on the request message received from the client the server the E71 automatically sends an appropriate response message Client Server Connected device Request message BARA A RAIA DAA SE ge eee ot Header Subheader SS Command destination Ethernet Response message Subheader Response data 89 BINJONIJS UONCOIUNWWOD Z OL 10 3 Data Communication Procedure The following is a data communication procedure for SLMP communications 1 Set the parameters gt Page 91 Section 10 4 2 Perform the open process and establish a connection between the E71 and the connected device C gt Page 71 Section 7 2 Page 78 Section 7 3 3 Once the connection is established the connected device sends an SLMP message 4 Theconnection is closed after the communications are completed Point In the cases described below an E71 performs a remote password check when the connected device accesses the programmable controller If communications cannot be performed unlock the remote password gt Page 175 Section 14 3 2 e When a remote password has been set in the CPU module e When the connection for data communications with the connected device is to be subjected to the remote password check 90 CHAPTER 10 SLMP COMMUNICATIONS 10 4 Parameter Setting Set the following parameters for SLMP communications e Basic setting gt Page 65 Section 7 1 2 e Ethern
326. or a protocol exists Connected device 207 e When the cancel request is performed before receiving when 3 Waiting for data reception is set in Protocol execution status address 54C0y ECPRTCL instruction Completion device The device turns on upon abnormal end Completion device 1 Connection No n Protocol cancellation specification 2 Cancel completion 54D3H when the value of n is 1 1 Cancellation A t waiting time to receive or the time specified by the destination alive check timer E71 l Cancel The E71 does not send a send packet to the connected device even when a receive data or a protocol exists Connected device e When the cancel request is performed during receiving when 4 Receiving is set in Protocol execution status address 54C0y ECPRTCL instruction Completion device ee ee The device turns on Completion device 1 upon abnormal end Connection No n Protocol cancellation specification 54D3H when the value of n is 1 N 1 Cancellation request 2 Cancel completed t waiting time to receive or the time specified by the destination alive check timer Cancel general data processing and forcibly Connected device terminates the dedicated instruction The E71 does not send a send packet to the connected device even when a receive E71 data or a protocol exists The E71 interrupts the verification and 208 CHAPTER 15 DEDIC
327. orrect the request from a connected device error e The communication time between the Increase the CPU CPU module and the E71 exceeded monitoring timer the CPU monitoring timer value value After unlocking the remote password using the MC protocol perform e In communications using a fixed communications buffer the remote password of the port using a fixed buffer for the destination E71 is in the lock Exclude ports used status for communications using a fixed buffer from the targets of the remote password check AO The error details and how to troubleshoot the problem are the same as those for the error code stored in the buffer memory to FFFF gt Page 264 Section 16 7 3 262 16 Error code 10H iiy 124 184 1Fn 204 214 7 2 compatible 1E frame CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING Abnormal codes returned during communications using an A The following table lists the error codes stored in the abnormal code appended to a response in the A compatible 1E frame in MC protocol communications An abnormal code is appended only when an end code is 5By Response format Subheader End code OOH If an abnormal code is stored 5BH is stored here PC number error Mode error Intelligent function module designation error Remote error Device error Invalid device specification Link error Intelligent function module bus error Error description The PC nu
328. otocol executed includes receiving the matched receive packet number is stored When the communication type is Send Only 0 is stored If an error occurs to the seventh protocol executed 0 is stored When the number of protocols which are executed is less than 7 0 is stored When the communication type of the eighth protocol executed includes receiving the matched receive packet number is stored When the communication type is Send Only 0 is stored If an error occurs to the eighth protocol executed 0 is stored When the number of protocols which are executed is less than 8 0 is stored O 7 7 o 201 On N y m O A O 202 3 Functions e The module specified by Un executes the protocol setting data written to the flash ROM The protocol is executed according to the control data of the device specified by S and the following devices The connection specified by n1 is used e Protocols are executed consecutively for the number of times specified by n2 up to eight protocols by one instruction e When two or more ECPRTCL instructions are executed simultaneously for the same connection the following instruction will be ignored until the first instruction is completed e The number of protocols is stored in S 0 e Protocol execution status can be checked in the predefined protocol support function execution status check area address 54C0y to 55FF e The communicati
329. ower CPU L L6DSPU Display Module L26CPU BT CPU 16Point Built in I O 16Point 0100 32Point Built in CC Link 32Point 0200 END Cover Legend Error O Major Error A Moderate Error Minor Error UD Assignment Error tz Assignment Incorrect Stop Monitor tin Product Information List System Error History lose 232 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 The Module s Detailed Information window is Module s Detailed Information Module displayed Clicking the update Error History button Model Name LJ71E71 100 I O Address 0000 Mount Position Main Block Slot 0 Product Information 140320000000000 displays the error details and corrective action Production Number E Monitoring Module Information Module Access Possible Status of External Power Supply Fuse Blown Status Status of I O Address Verify Agree I O Clear Hold Setting F Noise Filter Setting E Input Type L HIW Information Remote Password Setting Status Nothing Error Information Error and Solution Latest Error Code Update Error History Contents An external device side with the set IP address does not exist col 7 Clear Error History Error Clear i Error Code Display Format cosa C033 HEX C033 Solution Review and correct the external device s IP address and the 4 col Ethernet address 3 DEC Tf the external device has the ARP function set the default value If not set the
330. performing an open process again ssax0u1d UONESIUNWWOD zz SUONESIUNWWOD di ddL ZZ 13 7 2 3 Active open procedure Active open is a connection method that performs an active open process on a connected device in Passive open wait status The procedure that the E71 performs an Active open process is as follows For the OPEN CLOSE instructions refer to DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS gt Page 189 CHAPTER 15 Exc Open close processes for the connection number 1 Parameter communication Power on completed Open status Open allowed status closed Closed status Initial normal completion signal X19 OPEN instruction i 1 scan OPEN instruction Vo completion device OPEN instruction completion device 1 Open abnormal detection Abnormally ended signal X18 CLOSE instruction Ca a CLOSE instruction completion device t gt 1 scan TRS Abnormally CLOSE instruction ended completion device 1 Open completion signal Al address 5000H M Open request signal N address 50024 o t ACK FIN o Y SYN ACK FIN ACK 0 After parameter communications check that the initial process of the E71 is normally completed Initial normal completion signal X19 ON Start the open process using the OPEN instruction Open request signal address 5002 b0 ON The E71 performs the open process The E71 sends an open request SYN to the conne
331. performing communications using a fixed buffer select Send lt gt Page 119 CHAPTER 12 Fixed Buffer Select a communication method for communications using a fixed buffer 7 Communication Page 119 CHAPTER 12 Configure the pairing open setting for communications using a fixed buffer Pairing Open lt Page 138 Section 12 7 Existence Confirmation Select whether to use the alive check function _ gt Page 187 Section 14 6 Host Station Port No Set the E71 connection port numbers 68 Setting range e DEC e HEX TCP UDP e Active e Unpassive e Fullpassive e MELSOFT Connection e Send e Receive e Predefined protocol e Procedure Exist e No Procedure Disable Enable e No Confirm e Confirm e DEC 1025 to 4999 5003 to 65534 2 HEX 4014 to 13874 138By to FFFEy 7 CHAPTER 7 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE e DEC 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 e HEX 00 00 00 00 to FF FF FF FF e DEC 1 to 65535 3 Destination Port No Set port numbers for connections of connected devices lt HEX Destination IP Address Set the IP address of the connected device 14 to FFFFy gt 4 An E71 is always waiting for an open request from a connected device communications can be performed during STOP regardless of the initial timing setting in the Ethernet operation setting lt _ gt Page 66 Section 7 1 3 2 Do not enter 5000 1388 to 5002 138Ay g
332. port number used in a connection already opened is l e Correct the port number of the Ethernet module set for the open process in UDP IP The initial process or open process of the Ethernet module a e Perform the initial process or open process is not completed The setting value of the IP address of the connected e Correct the IP address Set the class to A B C AJOW SOW JONG y Ul P3J0 S SSPOd 10114 9L device for the open process is incorrect The open process of the connection or the next e Check that none of the connections targeted for pairing connection specified for pairing open has been already open has been opened completed e Correct the combination of modules set for pairing open e Check the operation of the connected device e Check the open process of the connected device e Correct the open setting of the communication A connection could not be established in the open process parameters of the TCP connection e Correct the port number of the Ethernet module the IP address and port number of the connected device and the open setting e Check if the cable is disconnected The setting value of the IP address of the connected ier e Correct the IP address device is incorrect e Correct the data length The data length exceeds the allowable range e When the amount of data to be sent exceeds the limit divide the data into smaller chunks to send it An abnormal end response was received for e
333. printf AJ_ test Start n socketno socket AF_INET SOCK_STREAM 0 if socketno INVALID_ SOCKET Sockerro ERROR_SOCKET retunm SOCK NG 346 Create socket for TCP IP Error handling APPENDICES hostdata sin_family AF_INET hostdata sin_port sc my_port hostdata sin_addr s addr sc my_addr s_addr if bind socketno LPSOCKADDR amp hostdata sizeof hostdata SOCK_OK Bind sockerror ERROR_BIND Error handling return SOCK_NG aj 1e71 sin_family AF_INET aj 1e71 sin_port sc aj port aj 1e71 sin_addr s addr sc aj addr s adar if connect socketno LPSOCKADDR amp aj 1e71 sizeof aj71e71 SOCK_OK Connection Active open sockerror ERROR_CONNECT Error handling return SOCK_NG Closeflag FLAG_ON I Connection completion flag ON Set to non blocking mode ulCmdArg 1 ioctlsocket socketno FIONBIO amp ulCmdArg Set to non blocking mode strepy char s_ buf O3FFOO0A44200000000005001 12233445566778899AA DO to D4 batch write request 1E frame strcpy char s buf 500000FFO3FFO00002C000A14010000D gt gt 0000000005112233445566778899AA 33 DO to D4 batch write request 3E frame o o co o length strlen char s_buf D oo if send socketno char s_buf length 0 SOCKET ERROR E y Data sending 58 sockerror ERROR_SEND Error handling Q H return SOCK_NG I printf n send data n s n s_buf pesn SI LAN y OPIS
334. problem check the following e Is the e mail parameter setting of the E71 correct e Is the mail server system down e Is there any error in the communication path 2 When sending an e mail with the programmable controller CPU monitoring function Check item Action Are the monitoring conditions satisfied Check the notification setting with the programming tool Was the first sending performed using the programmable Check if there is any device outside the range of the device settings among controller CPU monitoring function the condition devices and correct the condition device Correct the following so that the monitoring condition disable time becomes longer than the value set in PLC Inquiry Interval e PLC Inquiry Interval Were the second and subsequent sendings performed using Leal Correct the following so that the sending time of the SMTP server and the E71 becomes shorter than the value set in PLC Inquiry Interval e Reduce the load on the SMTP server e When the SMTP server and the E71 are connected via routers or other devices connect the E71 to the same main line as the SMTP server the programmable controller CPU monitoring function If the action above does not solve the problem check the following e Is the e mail parameter setting of the E71 correct e Is the mail server system down e Is there any error in the communication path 246 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16 6 1 2 An e mail cannot be received The fol
335. rd unlock 1630 e When the file transfer FTP server function is in use Dedicated FTP command password unlock e Programming tool Input of the remote password in the window e When the Web function is in use Input of a remote password in the window displayed on the Web browser When the unlock process is not performed the remote password set E71 that has accepted a communication request checks an entered remote password and disables access to the specified station All data received prior to the unlock process is treated as an error 2 Access process Access to the specified station is enabled when the remote password unlock process is completed normally Specify the station to be accessed and access the station 3 Access prohibition process lock process To terminate the access to the specified station the connected device performs the remote password lock process to disable subsequent access The following are lock process methods e Dedicated command of the MC protocol remote password lock 1631 e When the file transfer FTP server function is in use Dedicated FTP command password lock e Programming tool Automatically executes the lock process e When the Web function is in use Automatically performs a lock process when the Web browser is closed PJIOMSSE Y S OWSY Ep sessax0 d 190 pue y90 un sessa0 d Buas puomssed ajouway ZEY 175 14 3 3 Remote password check procedure This section describes t
336. re of fixed a binary code Number of words Send data a S3 0 buffer communications Procedure exists communications using User length 1 to 508 the data length is the an ASCII code Number of words number of words or the No procedure communications using a 4 to 2046 number of bytes binary code Number of bytes S3 1 to Send data Specify the send data User S3 n 4 Functions e This instruction sends the data specified by S3 to the connected device of the connection specified by S1 for the module specified by Un CPU module Send data length Fixed buffer data area BUFSND Connected device Send data 210 CHAPTER 15 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS e Completion of the BUFSND instruction can be checked with Completion device D1 0 and D1 1 Item Description Turns on at the END process of the scan where the BUFSND instruction is completed and Completion device D1 0 turns off at the next END process Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the BUFSND instruction e Normal completion Stays off and does not change Completion device D1 1 j i E e Abnormal end Turns on at the END process of the scan where the BUFSND instruction is completed and turns off at the next END process Operation while the BUFSND instruction is being executed END END END Program Scan process Scan I process Sean process BUFSND instruction Executed Completion device y C
337. red 1 Detailed header sizes a TCP IP Ethernet IP TCP 14 bytes 20 bytes 20 bytes b UDP IP Ethernet IP UDP 14 bytes 20 bytes 8 bytes 12 6 2 Application data This section describes the application data configuration 1 Procedure exists In the application data for communications with the Procedure Exist control method the following data code is expressed in a binary code or an ASCII code To switch between a binary code and an ASCII code use the Ethernet operation setting TT Project window gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt Ethernet CC IE Field gt Select Ethernet under Network Type gt button 132 CHAPTER 12 COMMUNICATIONS USING A FIXED BUFFER a Format e Communications using a binary code Application data area command message a J Maximum of 2 bytes 2 bytes 1017 words A A ne Communication Subheader Data length Text request source setting command L H L H Communication Subheader End code request destination A a J 1 byte 1 byte Application data area Response e Communications using an ASCII code Application data area command message wk Maximum of 4 bytes 4 bytes 1016 words Xr XA C Y Y N Text command Subheader Data length setting Communication request source End code Subheader Communication request destination
338. rnet cable disconnected e Is any Ethernet cable shorted e Are the connectors securely connected b Broken cable latch Do not use Ethernet cables with broken latches Doing so may cause the cable to unplug or malfunction c Connecting and disconnecting the Ethernet cable Hold the connector part when connecting and disconnecting the Ethernet cable Pulling a cable connected to the module may damage the module or cable or result in malfunction due to poor contact d Maximum station to station distance maximum cable length The maximum station to station distance is 100m However the distance may be shorter depending on the operating environment of the cable For details contact your cable manufacturer e Bend radius The bend radius of the Ethernet cable is limited For details see the specifications of the Ethernet cable to be used CHAPTER 7 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE CHAPTER 7 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE This chapter describes the procedure for communicating with connected devices after the E71 is connected to Ethernet For the procedure for connecting the E71 to Ethernet refer to PROCEDURES BEFORE OPERATION Continued from PROCEDURES BEFORE OPERATION Page 54 CHAPTER 4 y Parameter settings Page 64 Section 7 1 Set the parameters excluding the basic setting and Ethernet operation Parameter setting of each function setting if necessary Starting the CPU module MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual
339. rom 192 168 3 40 bytes 32 time lt 1ms TTL 250 Packets transmitted 4 Received 4 Lost 0 Round trip fms Min 0 Max 0 4vg 0 Success Transmissions c Action for abnormal end 4 The test results are displayed If the test fails check the following and perform the test again e Whether the E71 is properly connected e Connection to the Ethernet network e Parameter settings written in the CPU module e Operating status of the CPU module whether or not an error has occurred e IP addresses set in the programming tool and the PING test target station e Whether the connected device has been reset after the E71 was replaced APPENDICES 2 Performing a test with direct connection to the CPU module This test is to check the existence of an E7112 that has completed the initial process on the same Ethernet network where a station connected to the programming tool exists or to check the existence of a connected device such as a personal computer having a specified IP address by directly connecting the programming tool and the CPU module Programming tool CPU module a i i ee a Y 10 Le E Specifying the station executing the test using the network No and station No PING test executing station Specifying the target station using the IP address Ethernet E71 PING test target station 4 This also applies to Q QnA A series modules However for an AJ71E71
340. rom that of the connected device set the network address of the connected device 2 If the class network address of the E71 on the own station is the same as that of the connected device set the subnet address of the connected device Own station E71 Class B IP address 81052F01H 129 5 47 1 Subnet mask FFFFFCOOH 255 255 252 0 Ethernet 4 Setting example 1 Setting example 2 Setting example 3 Connected device 1 Connected device 2 Connected device 3 Class B Class A Class B IP address 81044001H IP address 71044001H IP address 81052902H 129 4 64 1 113 4 64 1 129 5 41 2 170 CHAPTER 14 OTHER FUNCTIONS When the network addresses differ between the E71 on the own station and the connected device Network address Own station E71 IP address Class B 1 JofoJoJoJoJo 1jojojojolol fol folol fol1 1j1j1JoJofofofofofo Connected device 1 IP address Class B 1 oJofofoJojo 1Jofofofolo 1jolojo folojojojojofofolojojolojo r Set the network address of the connected device 1 Network address Subnet address setting value ex When the classes differ between the E71 on the own station and the connected device Network address Own station E71 IP address Class B 1 JofoJojojoJol jojojoJofoj1joj1Pofoj1rjol1 i I1rjofofojolojoJfo Connected device 2 IP address Class A o 1 1 1JofoJol1JoJojojojoj1rfojofo fojofojofojolojojojojofojof1 Set the network address of the connected devi
341. ror description Action e Enable the router relay function and perform the initial process e A send request was issued to the connected device with Set the correct data in the router relay parameter COC5 the class network address different from those of the e Correct the IP address of the connected device and own station when the router relay function is not used perform the open process e The setting of the router relay parameter is incorrect e Check if the network address is correct e After changing the network address perform the initial process again e Follow the procedure below 1 Check if the Ethernet module the power supply module and the CPU module are properly connected 2 Check if the operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the COC6y System error The OS detected an error CPU module 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual for each module If the actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Take action such as separating networks or decreasing the number of data sending to reduce the load on the Ethernet line e Consult the network administrator and reduce the load on COC7y An Ethernet module system error has occurred the Ethernet line e Perform the self diagnostics test to check for an error in the Ethernet module If the actions above
342. ror has been detected is stored e O No errors e 1 to 128 Protocol No 65535 Unidentified When an error is detected in the Packet Setting or Element Setting 0 is stored When an error is detected in the Protocol Detailed Setting 1 is stored Valid when the Protocol No value is 1 to 128 e O Packet setting or element setting e 1 Protocol detailed setting e 65535 Unidentified When an error is detected in the protocol setting data the packet No where an error has been detected is stored The send packet is checked first then receive packet expected packet is checked from the lowest packet No and the first packet No where an error has been detected is stored Valid when the Setting type value is 0 e 0 Send packet e 1 to 16 Receive packet e 65535 Unidentified When an error is detected in the protocol setting data the element No where an error has been detected is stored The elements are checked from the lowest element No and the first element No where an error has been detected is stored Valid when the Setting type value is 0 e 1 to 32 Element No e 65535 Unidentified Number of registered protocols in the protocol setting data is stored When the check results include any error 0 is stored e 0 No registration e 1 to 128 Number of registrations CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING Buffer memory name Description The information about whether protocol setting data has been registere
343. rotocol setting toro data to the flash ROM Please save in the protocol setting file epc because the data to be written to module does not include the following information Mon written Data Manufacturer Packet Name Protocol Detailed Setting Type Version Explanation Packet Setting Element Name 1 When the initial process is not completed the protocol setting data cannot be written to the flash ROM Before writing the data set the network parameters and check that the initial process is completed The initial process completion can be checked using Initial normal completion signal X19 Point O The following data cannot be read out because they are not written to the E71 However when the protocols are selected from the Predefined Protocol Library the followings can be displayed e Manufacturer e Packet Name e Protocol Detailed Setting Type Version Explanation e Packet Setting Element Name O Module Selection using the Predefined Protocol Support Function is available only when Not Specification is set in the Transfer Setup of GX Works2 When other station is specified the E71 specified in the Transfer Setup of GX Works2 becomes the target module 6 Execute the protocol by using a dedicated instruction Execute the protocol written to the flash ROM by using the dedicated instruction ECPRTCL instruction Point Protocols can be executed only when the target connection is in the following status e
344. rt Calculating Range End This element is used when an element indicating the data length is included in a packet e When sending The data length of the specified range is calculated and the result is added to a send packet e When receiving The data setting value corresponds to the Length in the receive data is verified as the data length of the specified range Length elements can be placed anywhere in the data part The following table lists the items Element Name Set name of the element Select a format of the data length Code Type ASCII Hexadecimal HEX Select the data length on the line Data Length The range is 1 to 4 When sending The calculated Length is sent from the Forward Direction upper byte Upper Byte gt Lower Byte o When receiving The data is received from the upper byte When sending The calculated Length is sent from the lower byte Not settable when Data Reverse Direction Data Flow Lower Byte gt Upper Byte o s When receiving The data is received from the lower byte Length is 1 byte When sending The calculated Length is sent swapping the upper byte and lower byte by word Byte Swap by Word When receiving The data is received swapping the upper byte and lower byte by word Start Select the start element number of the calculating range Calculating The range is 1 to 32 Range End Select the end element number of the calculating range n The range
345. rt the CPU module 2 Target connections Set a remote password check only for the connections used for data communications with the connected devices that can perform unlock and lock processes In communications using a fixed buffer do not set the remote password check for the connections through which the connected device receives data sent from the CPU module 3 Connections where No Procedure communications using a fixed buffer are performed Do not set a remote password check for connections where No Procedure communications using a fixed buffer are performed The remote password check is not performed for such connections 4 Access to the programmable controller on another station When the connected device accesses the programmable controller on another station through the E71 it may fail to access the remote password protected CPU modules on the relay station or the station to be accessed 5 For UDP IP communications a Connected device for data communications suonnesald S pl DJOMSSEd S IOWSY pl Do not perform data communications with unspecified connected device Set the destination device b Alive check function Use the alive check function of the E71 Also when terminating data communications perform the remote password lock process If the process is not performed data communications from other devices are enabled until a timeout occurs by the alive check function of the E71 For this rea
346. s Point O For the method to turn off the COM ERR LED refer to the method using the Ethernet diagnostics gt Page 293 Section 16 10 The accumulated counts of unlock lock process abnormal end for Connection Nos 1 to 16 stored in the buffer memory can be cleared e Accumulated count of unlock process abnormal end address of Connection No 1 20595 5073 e Accumulated count of lock process abnormal end address of Connection No 1 20597 5075 182 CHAPTER 14 OTHER FUNCTIONS 14 3 6 Parameter settings The remote password setting of the E71 is described O Project window gt Parameter gt Remote Password Remote Password Settine Remote Password Detail Setting Password Setting chee micrs heh een ha mee User Connection Mo Password eee A a 0 aa jw Connection 1 Connection 2 Connection 3 Connection 4 a z Special characters Connection 5 Connection 6 Connection 7 Connection E Password Active Module Setting Connection Y Connection 10 Connection 11 Connection 12 Model Name Stark Connection 13 Connection 14 Connection 15 Connection 16 Mote Please enable the existence confirmation function LITE 1 100 x ooog in case ofusing the UDPYIP protocol System Connection FTP Transmission Port TCP IP MELSOFT Application Transmission Port TCP IP CE Ez MELSOFT Application Transmission Port UUDPYSIPI CK Dedicated Instruction CO IE Control NET 1 00H Relay Tra
347. s selected for the Ethernet operation setting As the E71 is set to always wait for open a connection is established when an Active open is requested from the connected device This eliminates the need for open close processing programs on the E71 side Parameter communication Power on completed lt gt 1 Open status Open allowed status closed i Active open acceptance enabled i Closed status Initial normal completion signal X19 Open completion signal A address 5000H E Open request signal address 50024 SYN ACK FIN ACK le le f SYN ACK FIN ACK O After parameter communications check that the initial process of the E71 is normally completed Initial normal completion signal X19 ON After the initial process is normally completed the connection enters open enable status and the E71 waits for an open request from the connected device The E71 starts the open process upon receiving the open request SYN from the connected device When the open process is normally completed Open completion signal address 5000y b0 turns on and data communications are enabled The E71 starts the close process upon receiving the close request FIN from the connected device When the close process is completed Open completion signal address 5000H b0 turns off and data communications are disabled After the internal process of the E71 is completed the connection returns to the OPEN request wait s
348. s the E71 cannot decode commands normally The E71 returns an error response according to the communication data code setting L gt Page 136 Section 12 6 2 1 e Remark If the LG and FG terminals of the power supply module on the E71 connected station are not connected the communication line may be closed disconnected due to noise therefore communications with the connected device may not be performed If the action above does not solve the problem check for an error in each communication process and take corrective action 238 C gt Page 240 Section 16 6 4 to Page 248 Section 16 6 13 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16 6 2 The E71 frequently fails to receive a message sent from the connected device The following table lists how to troubleshoot the problem when the E71 frequently fails to receive a message sent from the connected device Check item Action There may be a heavy load on the Ethernet line due to data sending and Has the error code COC7 been stored in Error code end C VIN9 between connected devices e Taking action such as separating networks or decreasing the number of data code address E5y in the error log block sending reduces the load on the Ethernet line e Consult the network administrator and reduce the load on the Ethernet line e Taking action such as separating networks or decreasing the number of data sending reduces the load on the Ethernet line e When communications
349. s Error log block 1 Error log block 11 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 12 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 13 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 14 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 15 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 16 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Disconnection detection count Receive buffer full detection signal 0 Receive buffer not full 1 Receive buffer full Same IP address detection flag e 0 Unique IP addresses e 1 Same IP address for multiple stations The MAC address of the station that has been already connected to the network The address is stored in the station with the same IP address The MAC address of the station with the IP address used for another station The address is stored in the station that has been already connected to the network semasa O Initial value OH FFFFFFFFFFFF y FFFFFFFFFFFF y Programming tool setting applicability x CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Address Programming Decimal Application Initial value tool setting Hexadecimal applicability 21280 to 21283 System area un 53204 to 5323 21284 San 532414 rotocol No F 21285 5325 Setting type On x l H Protocol setting data error 21286 information Packet No O
350. s received from the DNS server after e Check if the network is heavily loaded timeout e Check the status of the DNS server e Check if the network is heavily loaded C161 A response from the DNS server could not be received e Check the status of the DNS server e Follow the procedure below C1544 1 Check if the Ethernet module the power supply module and the CPU module are properly connected 2 Check if the operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the C162y System error The OS detected an error CPU module 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual for each module Ifthe actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Follow the procedure below 1 Check if the Ethernet module the power supply module and the CPU module are properly connected 2 Check if the operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the C1634 System error The OS detected an error CPU module 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check ifthe hardware is normal according to the manual for each module If the actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Check if the IP address of the DNS server is correct e Check if the mail server names SMTP server names and POP server
351. s that for the method using direct connection to the E71 gt Page 312 Appendix 5 1 1 316 APPENDICES 3 Performing a test with the PING command The PING test can be also executed using the PING command The following shows an example of checking whether the initial process has been completed by issuing a PING command to the E71 of the own station from a connected device in the same Ethernet network Specification method ping IP Address When the IP address of an E71 is 192 168 3 40 Window upon normal completion Window upon abnormal end cx Command Prompt cx Command Prompt CiN gt ping 192 168 3 46 CiN gt ping 192 168 3 46 Pinging 192 168 3 46 with 32 bytes of data Pinging 192 168 3 48 with 32 bytes of data Reply from 192 168 3 468 bytes 32 time lt ims TTL 128 Reply from 192 168 3 4B bytes 32 time lt ims TTL 128 Reply from 192 168 3 4 bytes 32 time lt ims 128 Reply from 192 168 3 48 bytes 32 time lt ims TTL 128 Request timed out Request timed out Request timed out Request timed out Ping statistics for 192 168 3 46 Pack t i Ping statistics for 192 168 3 4M Packets Sent 4 Received Lost 4 168 loss ackets Sen 4 Received 4 Lost M By loss Approximate round trip times in milli seconds Minimum Bms Maximum ms Average Gms s gt a Action for abnormal end If the test fails check the following and perform the test again e Whether the E71 is properly
352. se e Check for an error in the SMTP server C1244 A response from the SMTP server timed out l e Check if the network is heavily loaded Check for an error in the SMTP server C1254 Forcefully disconnected from the SMTP server e Check if the network is heavily loaded Check for an error in the SMTP server C1264 The SMTP server could not be closed e Check if the network is heavily loaded i e Check for an error in the SMTP server C1274 Closing the SMTP server gave an error response i e Check if the network is heavily loaded The communication channel is closed because the service C1304 e Check the status of the SMTP server is not available e Check that a user name not registered in the server has The SMTP server is in process and an error response was io C1314 not been specified received l f e Send the e mail again after a certain period of time The SMTP server is in process and an error response was C1324 l e Check the status of the SMTP server received Local error The SMTP server is in process and an error response was C1334 i K e Check the status of the SMTP server received Insufficient memory area e Follow the procedure below 1 Check if the Ethernet module the power supply module and the CPU module are properly connected 2 Check if the operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the C1341 System error The
353. sed the remote password C2024 password on the relay station or access station or do not could not be unlocked execute the remote password check on them Follow the procedure below 1 Check if the Ethernet module the power supply module and the CPU module are properly connected 2 Check if the operating environment of the Ethernet SI BPO 10114 2 91 module conforms to the general specifications of the C203 System error The OS detected an error CPU module 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual for each module If the actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Request the lock process of the remote password from the AJOW SW JONG y Ul P3J0 S SIPOI 10114 9L The device is different from the one requesting the remote C2044 connected device that requested the unlock process of the password unlock remote password e When accessing another station do not set the remote When another station was accessed the remote password i C2054 password on the relay station or access station or do not could not be unlocked execute the remote password check on them 281 Error code Error description Action e Follow the procedure below 1 Check if the Ethernet module the power supply module and the CPU module are properly connected 2 Check if the operating environment of the
354. ses of the own station and the DNS server belong to the same class If they belong to different classes check the router setting CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING Error code Error description Action e Check if the SMTP server name has been registered in the DNS e Delete the SMTP server name and change the setting to C1024 A response from the SMTP layer could not be received l the IP address setting Then check the operation e Check if communications with the SMTP server can be performed using the PING command e Follow the procedure below 1 Check if the Ethernet module the power supply module and the CPU module are properly connected 2 Check if the operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the C103y System error The OS detected an error CPU module 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual for each module Ifthe actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Follow the procedure below 1 Check if the Ethernet module the power supply module and the CPU module are properly connected 2 Check if the operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the C104 System error The OS detected an error CPU module 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the m
355. setting b8 0 Do not wait for OPEN Communications impossible at STOP time e 1 Always wait for OPEN Communication possible at STOP time Reinitialization specification b15 e 0 Reinitialization process complete reset by the system e 1 Reinitialization process request set by the user Bits other than those described above are reserved for system use 36 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Address Programming Decimal Application Initial value tool setting Hexadecimal applicability Connection No 1 Usage of fixed buffer b0 e 0 For sending or communications using a fixed buffer are not performed e 1 For receiving Destination existence confirmation b1 e 0 No confirm e 1 Confirm Pairing open b7 e 0 Disable e 1 Enable 39 Communication method protocol b8 20 e 0 TCP IP Op O H 1 UDP IP Fixed buffer communication procedure b10 b9 e 00 Procedure exists e 01 No procedure e 10 Predefined protocol Open system b15 b14 l e 00 Active open or UDP IP Connection 40 Unpassive open usage 11 Fullpassive open setting area Bits other than those described above are reserved for system use 33 2115 Connection No 2 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 H Communication 34 parameter setting Connection No 3 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 221 area 35 231 Connection No 4 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 H 36 w w Co
356. so that the mail server for this module does not receive harmful e mails To maintain the safety of the programmable controller system against unauthorized access from external devices via the network take appropriate measures To maintain the safety against unauthorized access via the Internet take measures such as installing a firewall When connecting a peripheral with the CPU module or connecting an external device such as a personal computer with an intelligent function module to modify data of a running programmable controller configure an interlock circuit in the program to ensure that the entire system will always operate safely For other forms of control such as program modification or operating status change of a running programmable controller read the relevant manuals carefully and ensure that the operation is safe before proceeding Especially when a remote programmable controller is controlled by an external device immediate action cannot be taken if a problem occurs in the programmable controller due to a communication failure To prevent this configure an interlock circuit in the program and determine corrective actions to be taken between the external device and CPU module in case of a communication failure Do not write any data to the system area and write protect area R of the buffer memory in the intelligent function module Also do not use any use prohibited signals as an output signal from the CPU module to th
357. son when setting a connection with the connected device using a programming tool set the parameters as follows e When configuring the initial setting set the start interval timer value and the interval timer value for the alive check function as small as possible e When configuring the open setting select Confirm under Existence Confirmation 4 The alive check is automatically performed when the connection for data communications through the auto open UDP port is set as the target for the remote password check 6 Communications from the programming tool in the Ethernet connection For communications from a programming tool in the Ethernet connection using TCP IP communications is recommended 181 7 When the unlock process or lock process fails If the remote password unlock lock process fails check the remote password of the CPU module then perform the unlock lock process again a E71 operation in case of a process failure If the number of process failures exceeds the notification accumulated count set in the buffer memory area the E71 performs the following operations e The E71 turns on the COM ERR LED e The E71 stores C200y in the error code and end code storage area in the buffer memory area Error log storage area address 227 E3y to 372 1741 1 This is the number of times stored in Remote password mismatch notification accumulated count designation address 20592 50704 and 20593 5071 by the C
358. specified this manual describes the program examples in which the I O numbers of X Y00 to X Y1F are assigned for an E71 For I O number assignment refer to the following MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals EE SE SE SE ZE ZE ZE JE ZE ZE JE ZE Z JE J JE JE IE I E o o o o o o o o o o o o D o e e D e e e e e e E o o e e a e e D D COC E E e E E o e a G COMPLIANCE WITH EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES 1 Method of ensuring compliance To ensure that Mitsubishi programmable controllers maintain EMC and Low Voltage Directives when incorporated into other machinery or equipment certain measures may be necessary Please refer to one of the following manuals e MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection e Safety Guidelines This manual is included with the CPU module The CE mark on the side of the programmable controller indicates compliance with EMC and Low Voltage Directives 2 Additional measures To ensure that this product maintains EMC and Low Voltage Directives please refer to one of the manuals listed under 1 RELEVANT MANUALS The manuals related to this product are listed below Please place an order as needed 1 E71 relevant manual Manual name lt manual number model code gt MELSEC Q L Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Application lt SH 080010 13JL89 gt MELSEC Q L Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Web f
359. ssword can be locked unlocked from a connected device Access to a programmable controller in other stations over other networks In a system containing CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 and Ethernet access to a programmable controller in other stations can be performed over each network from a connected device CHAPTER 9 MC PROTOCOL COMMUNICATIONS 9 2 Communication Structure When a connected device sends a message to an E71 in the MC protocol message format the E71 performs the process according to the message During communications a CPU module including the E71 operates as a server and the connected device a personal computer or other terminals operates as a client Based on the command message received from the client the server the E71 automatically sends an appropriate response message Client Server Connected device Command message Application data Subheader Text command Ethernet Response message Application data Header Subheader Text command The frames that can be used with an E71 are as follows e 4E frame e QnA compatible 3E frame e A compatible 1E frame 3 n 9N1I3 UOB91Unuuwoo 26 85 9 3 Data Communication Procedure 86 The following is a data communication procedure for MC protocol communications 1 Setthe parameters gt Page 87 Section 9 4 2 Perform the open process and establish a connection between the E71 and
360. st OFF lt TT Open completed for connection No E ay Y10 hibit ON Open completion signal OFF VS HO ales Open completed for connection No 2 ON Open completion signal OFF Open completed for connection No ON Open completion signal OFF Open completed for connection No ON Open completion signal OFF Open completed for connection No ON Open completion signal OFF Open completed for connection No i ON Open completion signal OFF Open completed for connection No ON Open completion signal OFF Open completed for connection No 7 ON Open completion signal OFF Open abnormal detection ON At off request OFF Use prohibited Use prohibited Use prohibited Use prohibited Use prohibited Use prohibited COM ERR LED Off request ON At off request OFF Use prohibited CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Device y Device Signal name Signal name number number x19 Open abnormal detection signal Y19 Initial request signal ON Normal completion OFF ON At request OFF Open abnormal detection signal MES X1A ya u hibited ON Abnormal end OFF oa dd X1B Use prohibited Use prohibited COM ERR LED lit confirmation X1 Y1 hibit ON lit OFF off pee pronibited Predefined protocol ready ae X1D Y1D hibit ON Ready OFF pee proniblica X1E Use prohibited Use prohibited X1F Watchdog timer error detection Y1F hibit ON Watchdo
361. st of Dedicated Instructions 1 Dedicated instructions for using basic functions The following table lists dedicated instructions for using the functions explained in this manual Instruction Description Reference Establishes opens a connection with the connected device to perform data OPEN o Page 192 Section 15 5 communications Disconnects closes a connection with the connected device performing data CLOSE a j i Page 196 Section 15 6 communications Executes the protocols registered in the flash ROM of the E71 using the ECPRTCL Page 199 Section 15 7 Predefined Protocol Support Function of GX Works2 Sends data to the connected device through communications using a fixed BUFSND Page 209 Section 15 8 buffer Reads data received from the connected device through communications using BUFRCV Page 213 Section 15 9 a fixed buffer used in the main program Reads data received from the connected device through communications using BUFRCVS Page 217 Section 15 10 a fixed buffer used in an interrupt program Turns off LEDs of the E71 or clears error information stored in the buffer ERRCLR Page 219 Section 15 11 memory ERRRD Reads error information stored in the buffer memory of the E71 Page 223 Section 15 12 UINI Re initializes the E71 Page 226 Section 15 13 2 Dedicated instructions for using special functions The following table lists dedicated instructions for using special functions For deta
362. stem is powered off 2 Special functions The following special functions are also available For the functions refer to the following MELSEC Q L Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Application Function Description Data are sent received using an e mail e Data sent received by a CPU module E mail function See e Data sent using the programmable controller CPU monitoring function automatic notification function CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 relay communications Data are communicated over multiple network systems where Ethernet and other networks exist together or network systems that relay multiple Ethernet networks e l es Data of a CPU module in other stations can be read written over Ethernet using Communications using data link instructions o data link instructions Data can be read written in files from connected devices using an exclusive FTP File transfer FTP server function d command 3 Web function This function allows data to be read written from to a remote CPU module over the Internet using a Web browser For the function refer to the following MELSEC Q L Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Web function 30 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 3 2 Use with other functions The following table lists the relationships between functions that can be used together O Available X Not available or this function does not correspond to the func
363. system before mounting or removing a module Failure to do so may result in electric shock or cause the module to fail or malfunction O Do not directly touch any conductive parts and electronic components of the module Doing so can cause malfunction or failure of the module Wiring Precautions CAUTION O Securely connect the connector to the module Poor contact may cause malfunction Place the cables in a duct or clamp them If not dangling cable may swing or inadvertently be pulled resulting in damage to the module or cables or malfunction due to poor contact When disconnecting the communication and power cables from the module do not pull the cables by hand For the cable with connector hold the connector part of the cable Pulling the cable connected to the module may result in malfunction or damage to the module or cable O Prevent foreign matter such as dust or wire chips from entering the module Such foreign matter can cause a fire failure or malfunction O A protective film is attached to the top of the module to prevent foreign matter such as wire chips from entering the module during wiring Do not remove the film during wiring Remove it for heat dissipation before system operation Startup and Maintenance Precautions NWARNING O Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before cleaning the module Failure to do so may result in electric shock Startup and Maintenance Pre
364. t The response performance of the E71 to connected devices is faster than that of the A QnA series modules When the E71 is used the compatibility with the A QnA series modules cannot be precisely maintained If there is a problem due to the performance of the connected device create a timing similar to that of the existing system using the CPU module constant scan setting 2 Precautions for using the same program The QnA A series modules used for data communications between a CPU module and the connected device on the Ethernet network can be replaced by an E71 This section describes precautions for using the same program used in QnA A series modules a AJ71E71 S3 and AJ71E71N e Program of connected devices The following communication function programs of connected devices for an AJ71E71 S3 and AJ71E71N can be used for communications with an E71 However because the response speed of the AJ71E71 S3 and AJ71E71N is different from that of the E71 the program may not be used as is Before using the same program check the operation Connected E71 gt AJ71E71 S3 E71 gt AJ71E71 S3 Function device gt connected AJ71E71N gt E71 AJ71E71N device Communications using a fixed buffer lt O Procedure Exist Communications using a random r access buffer Daa read in the CPU moau O o o O Communications allowed by using the program for an AJ71E71 S3 and AJ71E71N on the connected device side Not
365. t Page 299 Appendix 2 9 The range of 1 14 to 1024 400p is available only in the E71 with the serial number first five digits of 15042 or later 69 Bulnes uado yl Z SUOI EDIUNWWOY JO palinbay sjajaweleg Bumnes 70 Point O Note the following points when setting port numbers Connection status Comnected device Can be set X Cannot be set Description When connecting multiple connected devices set multiple own station port numbers When connecting multiple connected devices set a single own station port number However connections need to be opened by the number of connections This setting cannot be configured when the own station is Unpassive When connecting multiple ports on a connected device set multiple port numbers of the E71 When connecting multiple ports on a connected device set a single port number of the E71 However connections need to be opened by the number of connections This setting cannot be configured when the own station is Unpassive When connecting the same port on a connected device set multiple port numbers of the E71 However connections need to be opened by the number of connections Multiple ports can be set for the same port on a connected device and on the E71 only when paring open has been set Communication protocol TCP IP UDP IP gt gt pe l A pe l e l O Consult with the network administrator for setting
366. t in_addr aj_addr unsigned short aj_ port sck_inf pesn SI LAN y OPIS 39593 Paj9auuoy OU UO We 345 int nErrorStatus int Dmykeyin int Closeflag int socketno int main WORD wWersionRequested MAKEWORD 1 1 WSADATA wsaData int length unsigned char s buf BUF_ SIZE unsigned char r_buf BUF_ SIZE int rouf idx int recv_ size struct sck_inf sc struct sockaddr_in hostdata struct sockaddr_in aj71e71 void Sockerror int unsigned long ulCmdArg sc my_addr s addr htonl INADDR_ANY sc my port htons 0 sc aj_addr s_addr inet_addr 192 0 1 253 sc aj port htons 0x2000 Closeflag FLAG_OFF nErrorStatus WSAStartup wVersionRequested amp wsaData if nErrorStatus SOCK_OK Sockerror ERROR_INITIAL retunm SOCK NG Error information storage variable Dummy key input I Connection completion flag Winsock Ver 1 1 request Communication data length Send buffer Receive buffer Receive data storage head index Number of receive data External device side data E71 side data Error handling function Non blocking mode setting flag External device side IP address External device side port number E71 side IP address C00001FDH E71 side port number I Connection completion flag off Winsock Initial processing Error handling printf Winsock Version is ld ld n HIBY TE wsaData wVersion LOBYTE wsaData wVersion
367. t mask pattern 169 A Sp cee carne tan hah parca aes ages dea 189 System configuration o oooooo o 56 TCP existence confirmation setting 66 TCP IP communications ooo 71 WORMS AE cs adas 16 Transmission method ooooooooo 21 Transmission specifications 21 Troubleshooting o ooooooooo o 232 Troubleshooting by SyMptOM 238 U UDP IP communications lt 78 A A AN E EE 189 UnlOCIProcesS ti dune sees eS eee 175 UNDASSIVE ici counties eae ee Rae ales 76 Unshielded twisted pair cable UTP 58 Use with other functions 31 W Web function soda aa 30 When using data link instructions 190 WIRING A ae ek oo 61 NUI ens a aa Se ae edn aad a ace 189 Z LBUFROVO 5 papada aaa a 217 ZNRD a a a 189 EN ad da 189 ZP BUFROV ii taco a a iaa 213 ZP BUFSND tia ri ca 209 LR OUEN a o ia 196 ZP ERROL la into cda NG e aiii E 219 ZPR ERRRD paa rd dia ba ds Ma 223 LLORENTE A AA 192 DIN Ii a a add as Wma 226 365 REVISIONS The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Japanese Manual Version SH 081104 E This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may
368. t match data cannot be sent or received because the connected device cannot normally decode commands Set the same data code as that of the connected device in Communication Data Code of the Ethernet operation setting L gt Page 66 Section 7 1 3 e If Initial normal completion signal X19 is off perform the initial process Has the initial process been completed normally Is Initial Fz Page 301 Appendix 4 normal completion signal X19 on e If the initial setting of the programming tool is same as that of the initial process program delete the initial process program Was a device on the line such as an E71 connected device hub and router replaced by the one with the same Restart all the devices on the line 1 IP address 1 2 3 Devices on an Ethernet network contain the IP to Mac address mapping called an ARP cache If a device on a line is replaced by another device with the same IP address the MAC address contained in the ARP cache and the MAC address of the replaced device do not match therefore communications may not be performed normally The ARP cache is updated when the device is reset or after a certain period of time The time varies depending on the devices If the communication data code setting is different between the E71 and the connected device error codes that are not found in the error code list may be returned to the connected device When receiving data with different data code
369. t output l i l ara e When starting the open by input output signals correct the signals E connection usage setting area of the buffer memory e Check that connection cable with the engineering tool is l P es not disconnected and read write verify the predefined An error has occurred when reading writing verifying the C0264 protocol setting data again predefined protocol setting data a e Do not write data simultaneously when writing protocol setting data from multiple engineering tools e Because there may be congestion of packets on the line send data after a certain period of time C030 A sending error has occurred e Check if the cable is disconnected e Perform the self diagnostics test to check for an error in the Ethernet module e Because there may be congestion of packets on the line send data after a certain period of time C031 A sending error has occurred e Check if the cable is disconnected e Perform the self diagnostics test to check for an error in the Ethernet module e Check the operation of the connected device e Correct the TCP ULP timeout value and perform the initial process again A TCP ULP timeout error has occurred in the TCP IP C032 communication The connected device does not send an l l e Because there may be congestion of packets on the line ACK response i l send data after a certain period of time e Check if the cable is disconnected e Correct the IP address of the con
370. ta transfer method Subject Does not decode When receiving decode Main text Cannot be received Attached file Base64 7 bits 8 bits Quoted Printable 4 Encryption None Communications with a mail oo SMTP sending server Port number 25 POP3 receiving server Port number 110 server Operation check mailer Microsoft Corporation Microsoft Office Outlook 2003 1 For the maximum segment length a length between hubs consult with the manufacturer of the switching hub used 2 This applies when a repeater hub is used For the number of levels that can be constructed when a switching hub is used consult with the manufacturer of the switching hub used 3 If divided files are received only the first file is received and the remaining files are discarded 4 If an e mail is sent from a connected device to the programmable controller side specify the encoding method Base64 7 bits 8 bits Quoted Printable of the attachment 28 3 3 Function List This section lists the E71 functions 3 3 1 Function list CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS The following table lists the functions of the E71 1 Basic functions The following table lists the basic E71 functions explained in this manual Function Connecting with MELSOFT products and a GOT MC protocol communications Communications using SLMP Data communications using the predefined protocol Procedure exists No procedure oa Pairing open Communications
371. ta type Start I O number of the E71 00 to FEy The first two digits BIN 16 bit character Un Un User of the three digit I O number string S1 Start number of the device that stores control data Device name The start number of the bit device in the own station that D1 turns on for one scan upon completion of the instruction System Bit D1 1 also turns on if the instruction ends abnormally a N Y m T JD O E T 219 2 Control data Device Hem Setting data Setting range Set by so sema E Stores the status at completion S1 1 Completion e 0000 Normal completion BER status e Values other than 0000 Abnormal end error code Specify error information to be cleared e 0000p Initial error code e 0001 y to 0010y Open error code for a connection with the connected device e 0100y Error log block area Clear target e 0101 y Communication status status for each l l S1 2 Dan As listed in the left User specification protocol e 01024 Communication status e mail receiving status e 01034 Communication status e mail sending status e FFFFy Clears all of the above l Specify the function to be cleared 0000 S1 3 SAF UnNcHEN e 00004 COM ERR LED off error code clear i User specification FFFFy e FEFFFy Error log clear S1 4 to System area S1 7 3 Functions e This instruction turns off the COM ERR LED and clears error information listed below for the module specified by Un
372. tatus 1 An open request SYN received after the normal completion of an initial process and before the E71 is in the OPEN request wait status will cause an error and the E71 sends a connection forced close RST Point When the open close processes are performed from the E71 side using a dedicated instruction even if Always wait for OPEN has been selected for the Ethernet operation setting the connection will not return to the open acceptance enable status after the close process is completed 76 CHAPTER 7 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE 2 When Do not wait for OPEN Communications impossible at STOP time is selected for the Ethernet operation setting Executing the OPEN CLOSE instructions is required on the E71 to make the E71 enter open close wait status before receiving an open close request from the connected device When the open process is normally completed data sending and receiving are enabled For the OPEN CLOSE instructions refer to DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 2 Page 189 CHAPTER 15 Open close processes for the connection number 1 Parameter communication Power on completed I Open status Open allowed status closed Active open acceptance enabled Closed status I I I Ld Initial normal completion Ei l I I signal X19 Oo OPEN instruction AS gt 1 scan OPEN instruction completion device r Abnormally OPEN instruction ended completion devic
373. telemento 1W4HEWReverseldBwtel 9 NMon conversionYariable Monitoring timer D4 D J Fised Lenath 2Byte Lower Upper Eyte hlo Swap Static Data Command OAM 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 11 Static Data Subcommand oo00t2Bte 22 3 3 3 3 3 Bulyjas Jaweed ZG SUONCOIUNWWOD O00 0Jq Pauljepalg JO ajduex3 S Change Type Add Hew Copy Paste Delete 113 e Receive Packet Normal response Packet Setting oaot Read Nomalresponse pee a 14 StaticData Fixed data D400 2Byte Non conversion Variable D10 D10l Fixed Lenath 2Byte LowerUpper Byte No Swap 3 StaticData Fixed data 0000 2Byte Non conversion Variable Network No D11 D11 Fixed Lenath 1 Byte Lower Upper Byte No Swap 4 Non conversion Variable D12 D12 Fixed Lenath 1 Byte Lower Upper Byte No Swap Variable ree module VO No TN D13 Fixed Length 2Byte Lower Upper Byte No Swa 7 StaticData For future expansion O0 BYte Cid Ba Length ee data length Object TT 1 O HEX Reverse 2 Byte 9 Static Data POODO 2B e we Non conversion Variable Response data D1000 01001 D1960 Variable Lenath 1920Byte LowerUpper Byte No Swap 1 Static Data Fixed data te el 2 Non conversion Variable SerialNo D20 D20 Fixed Lenath 2BwtelLowerlUpper Byte No Swap 3 Static Data Fikeddata 000002Bvte S 4 Nor conversion Variable NetworkNo 1D 21 D 21 Fixed Lenath 1Byte Lower Upper Byte No Swap 5 Nor conversion Variable StationNo 1 22 221 Fixed Len
374. the C11Ay The received mail failed to be converted encoding decoding style and file format on the sending side are the same as those for the Ethernet module e Check if the sending side has not divided the file AJOW SOW JONG y Ul P3J0 S SIPOI 10114 9L e Receive an e mail with an unknown destination and unknown destination server from the SMTP server The received mail is stored in the mail buffer An e mail was sent and an error mail was received from C11By e Check if the portion before is correct in the mail the mail server of the destination E address setting in the parameter settings e Check if the portion before has been registered on the destination mail server e Check if the attachment size is 6K words or less C11Dy The attachment size exceeded the allowable size e Check that the sending side has not divided the attachment e Check that the port number of the SMTP server is 25 C120 The SMTP server could not be opened e Check if communications with the SMTP server can be performed using the PING command Communications cannot be performed with the SMTP s C1214 e Check if the SMTP server is busy server Error response 281 Error code Error description Action Communications cannot be performed with the SMTP C1224 e Check if the SMTP server is busy server Abort Communications cannot be performed with the SMTP C1234 e Check if the SMTP server is busy server Reset respon
375. the E71 cannot decode commands normally The E71 returns an error response according to the communication data code setting 237 Page 136 Section 12 6 2 1 e Remarks If the action above does not solve the problem perform the following tests on the E71 to check for hardware error e Hardware test lt gt Page 323 Appendix 6 2 e Self loopback test 2 gt Page 322 Appendix 6 1 240 16 6 5 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING Communications using SLMP cannot be performed If communications cannot be performed with a connected device using SLMP refer to the troubleshooting in the following and take corrective action SLMP Reference Manual 16 6 6 performed Communications using the predefined protocol cannot be The following table lists how to troubleshoot the problem when the E71 cannot perform communications using the predefined protocol Check item Has the connection with the connected device been opened Check the corresponding bit of 5000 in the buffer memory Is the IP address setting of the connected device correct Does the Protocol in the open setting match with that of the connected device TCP IP or UDP IP Is Predefined protocol set to Fixed Buffer Communication in the open setting Is Predefined protocol ready X1D on Was the ECPRTCL instruction executed Was the ECPRTCL instruction completed normally Is the execution protocol number set to the control data of the ECPRTCL ins
376. the connected device C gt Page 71 Section 7 2 Page 78 Section 7 3 3 Once the connection is established the connected device sends an MC protocol message 4 Theconnection is closed after the communications are completed Point In the cases described below an E71 performs a remote password check when the connected device accesses the programmable controller If communications cannot be performed unlock the remote password gt Page 175 Section 14 3 2 e When a remote password has been set in the CPU module e When the connection for data communications with the connected device is to be subjected to the remote password check CHAPTER 9 MC PROTOCOL COMMUNICATIONS 9 4 Parameter Setting Set the following parameters for MC protocol communications e Basic setting gt Page 65 Section 7 1 2 e Ethernet operation setting 2 gt Page 66 Section 7 1 3 e Open setting gt Page 68 Section 7 1 4 Network Parameter Ethernet Open Setting Module No 1 max IP Address Port No Input Format Dec y ee Buffer Pairing Existence Host Station Destination Destination Send DTO Exist w Disable v 2000 10 97 85 223 4 IP Address and Port No will be displayed by the selected Format Please enter the value according to the selected number Cancel Fixed Buffer Select the communication method for communications using a fixed buffer For ce Procedure Exist Communication MC protocol communi
377. the data j range to the Ethernet module again C054 The number of read write points is outside the allowable e Correct the number of read write points and send the data A range to the Ethernet module again C055 The number of file data read write points is outside the e Correct the number of read write points or the number of allowable range bytes and send the data to the Ethernet module again e Correct the start address or the number of read write C056 e The read write request exceeds the largest address points and send the data to the Ethernet module again i e The address is 0 Make sure that the request does not exceed the largest address e Check and correct the text or requested data length of the The request data length does not match with the number of C0571 l Qn header Then send the data to the Ethernet module data in the character a part of text i again The request data length after the ASCII binary conversion e Check and correct the text or requested data length of the C058 does not match with the number of data in the character a Qn header Then send the data to the Ethernet module part of text again C0591 Incorrect designation of the command and subcommand e Correct the request details The Ethernet module cannot read write data from to the COSA A e Check the device for read write specified device The Ethernet module cannot read write data from to the CO5By ey e Check the device for read write specified de
378. the following setting items using the UINI instruction e Ethernet operation setting e Transmission speed and communication mode OO Eo no nonococacancnnonananananononos The following are sample programs for communications using connection numbers 1 and 2 When using other connections specify the corresponding signals and bits for each connection 000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 The UINI instruction is also used in the program for a reinitialization process When performing a reinitialization process using the UINI instruction refer to the program for a reinitialization process 2 gt Page 305 Appendix 4 2 ININ dZ Eb SL 229 230 a Changing the Ethernet operation setting The following page provides a sample program that changes the Ethernet operation setting enables writing during RUN when the I O signals of the E71 are X Y00 to X Y1F Communications enabled SM400 U0 k_M G20480 K4MO M6500 NY SET M2500 M2500 X19 MO M1 MOV K2 D252 Specify the change in the operation setting U0 Mov G203 D255 Read the current operation setting SET D255 6 Set Enable Online Change ZP UINI UO D250 M250 RST M2500 RST M3001 M250 M251 Process upon completion SET M3000 M251 Process upon abnormal end M3000 U0 G31 F U0 G105 HO Process upon completion RST M3000 SET M3001 U0 lt gt G105 HO Process upon abnormal end da if Communications enabled CHAPTER 15 DE
379. the pairing open method C1A7 y e Correct the specified network number C1A8y e Correct the specified station number C1A9y e Correct the specified device number C1AAW e Correct the specified device name C1ACy The specified number of resends is incorrect e Correct the number of resends C1ADy The specified data length is incorrect e Correct the specified data length e Correct the specified send receive data length and header C1AE The send receive data length and header length are length to values within the allowable ranges y incorrect e The send receive data length needs to be equal to or longer than the header length C1AFy The specified port number is incorrect e Correct the specified port number The open process of the specified connection has been C1B0y e Perform the close process before the open process already completed The open process of the specified connection has not been C1B1y e Perform the open process completed 286 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING Error code Error description Action C1B2 The OPEN or CLOSE instruction is being executed in the e Try again after the OPEN or CLOSE instruction is A specified connection completed e Change the channel number Another send or receive instruction is being executed in C1B3y e Try again after the send or receive instruction is the specified channel completed A Sn a e Set the arrival monitoring time to a value within the C1B4 The specified arriv
380. the port numbers of the E71 and the connected device and the IP address of the connected device CHAPTER 7 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE 1 2 TCP IP Communications This section describes TCP IP communications 1 2 1 Establishing a connection TCP IP communications require establishing connections between communication devices When the server side device is in standby status after performing a Passive open process a connection is established after the client side device issues an open request Active open process to the server and a response is received In TCP IP communications the system establishes a connection and checks whether each data has arrived at the recipient normally thereby ensuring data reliability Compared to UDP IP communications however TCP IP places a greater load on the line Ex When the E71 is in Passive open status Client Server Connected device Passive open Active open passive active Connection 11 suo esIunumoS dl dOl cL uo o uuo e Bulysi qe183 p Z Z 1 2 2 Communication process 12 This section describes the process from establishing a connection to terminating communications Client After the server performs Passive open it will wait for an open request from the client When the client sends O Active open request and pen request Active open the server accepts it Ape the connection is established between Response the client and the server Conne
381. the programmable controller CPU and each intelligent function module are properly connected e Check that the programmable controller CPU is not in the E reset status An error was detected in the programmable controller COEC any e Check if an error exists in the programmable controller CPU If an error exists take the action required to correct it e Replace the power supply module programmable controller CPU or intelligent function module e Check that the programmable controller CPU and each intelligent function module are properly connected e Check that the programmable controller CPU is not in the reset status An error was detected in the programmable controller CPU COED e Check if an error exists in the programmable controller CPU If an error exists take the action required to correct it e Replace the power supply module programmable controller CPU or intelligent function module e Check that the programmable controller CPU and each intelligent function module are properly connected e Check that the programmable controller CPU is not in the reset status An error was detected in the programmable controller COEE yy ae e Check if an error exists in the programmable controller CPU If an error exists take the action required to correct it e Replace the power supply module programmable controller CPU or intelligent function module e Check that the programmable controller CPU and each intell
382. tination alive check timer E71 Send packet Connected device The receive data did not match the receive packet expected packet 1 When the receive packet expected packet is not matched to the data by the waiting time to receive or when the existence of a connected device cannot be checked within the time specified by the destination alive check timer the time calculated based on the destination existence confirmation starting interval timer value destination existence confirmation interval timer value and Destination existence confirmation resending time the instruction ends abnormally Point For the error occurred when the communication ends abnormally refer to the error code stored in the buffer memory lt gt Page 264 Section 16 7 3 334 APPENDICES Appendix 8 2 verification operation of receive packet This section describes the verification operation for a receive packet expected packet when the E71 communicates with a connected device with protocols whose communication type includes receiving 1 When received data are matched to a receive packet expected packet The receive process is completed when the receive data are compared with the receive packet expected packet and they are matched Receive packet expected packet Matched Receive data gt Received 2 When multiple receive packets expected packets are specified The predefined protocol support function e
383. ting data BS setting data X1D turns on when the protocol setting data has been X1D turns on when the set correctly before data write check result is normal Check result normal Predefined protocol ready 21D HO X1D turns off if no protocol setting data has been set or an error has occurred in the protocol setting data before data write Protocol setting data A J The number of registered protocols and check area information about whether protocols have address 5320H to 533FH been registered are stored 108 CHAPTER 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING THE PREDEFINED PROTOCOL b If an error has occurred in the protocol setting data Start to write the protocol setting data Writing the protocol Checking the protocol _ E71 setting data ES setting data X1D turns on when the protocol setting data has been set correctly before data write Check result error Predefined protocol ready X1D X1D turns off if no protocol setting data has been set or an error has occurred in the protocol setting data before data write Protocol setting data INN check area address 5320H to 533FH The error details are stored 3 When the UINI instruction is being executed The E71 does not check the protocol setting data when the UINI instruction is being executed Predefined protocol ready X1D keeps its status even when the instruction is executed 4 The operations of X1D and COM ERR LED If an error has
384. ting was prohibited while the CPU was running data has been written to the remote I O station using the MC protocol with a QnA compatible 3E frame or 4E frame The device memory cannot be extended for the target station The number of device points for data read write set for modules other than a Q QnACPU is too large Incorrect request For example a request for data read write in bit units has been issued to a word device The Ethernet module cannot issue this request to the target programmable controller CPU For example the number of double word access points cannot be specified for modules other than a Q QnACPU This request cannot be executed to the target programmable controller CPU The destination IP address could not be obtained during CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 relay communications or communications using data link instructions The termination process for the Ethernet module is in process and whether communications using data link instructions have reached cannot be checked The communication process was abnormally ended in the following communications e Communications with a programming tool UDP IP e CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 relay communications The communication process was abnormally ended in communications using data link instructions CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING Action
385. tion device D and D1 1 Item Description Turns on at the END process of the scan where the ECPRTCL instruction is completed Completion device D1 0 and turns off at the next END process Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the ECPRTCL instruction e Normal completion Stays off and does not change Completion device D1 1 e Abnormal end Turns on at the END process of the scan where the ECPRTCL instruction is completed and turns off at the next END process Operation while the ECPRTCL instruction is being executed Program END END END END END PFOCess process Process Process Process ECPRTCL instruction Instruction executed i i i i Completion device Completion device 1 Protocol execution status address 54C0 1 4 Address of the connection 1 Protocol executed I NN i Execution status 5 Completed gt 2 Protocols are consecutively executed by the number of protocols specified in n2 of the setting data in the order specified with the control data up to eight protocols with one ECPRTCL instruction Point When multiple protocols are executed and an error has occurred in one protocol the following protocols are not executed and the dedicated instruction ends abnormally For the connection where the ECPRTCL instruction can be executed Predefined protocol is set in Fixed Buffer Communication Thus the following communicati
386. tion line is closed e Correct the target connection number CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING Error code Error description Action COBD Requests have been accepted successively and cannot be Check if requests have been sent successively without z sent waiting for a response e Follow the procedure below 1 Check if the Ethernet module the power supply module and the CPU module are properly connected 2 Check if the operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the COBEy System error The OS detected an error CPU module 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual for each module Ifthe actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Follow the procedure below 1 Check if the Ethernet module the power supply module and the CPU module are properly connected 2 Check if the operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the COBFy System error The OS detected an error CPU module 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual for each module Ifthe actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Coco The open process of the UDP connection has not been e Perform the open process y completed e Check the operation o
387. tions in the Communication function column CC Link IE Controller Communication Network CC Link IE method oars i Router Alive Communications Communication Field Network ia heck Pairing T O Remote Broadcast function MELSECNET H cae eee open ene a gt password communications MELSECNET 10 relay p TCP IP UDP IP communications MC protocol communications O Communications using a fixed buffer Communications using SLMP Data communications using the predefined protocol Communications using a random access buffer E mail function Communications using data link instructions File transfer FTP server function Web function E E 4 These functions cannot be used with an A compatible 1E frame 2 The auto open UDP port is excluded 3 These functions can be used only for UDP IP communication 4 These functions cannot be used for communications using a fixed buffer in the Procedure Exist control method S17 UOHOUNY SUO OUNJ JOY O YUM SN ZE 31 3 4 The following table lists the I O signals for an E71 List of I O Signals 0000 is listed below Device number X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 X9 XA XB XC XD XE XF X10 X11 X12 X13 X14 X15 X16 X17 X18 32 Signal name For fixed buffer communication of connection No 1 ON Sending normal completion or reception completion OFF For fixed buffer communication of connection No 1 ON Dete
388. to 4735 E80 to 127F Fixed buffer No 3 The bit configuration is the same as Fixed buffer No 1 4736 to 5759 Fixed buffer data 12804 to 167F area Fixed buffer No 4 The bit configuration is the same as Fixed buffer No 1 5760 to 6783 16804 to 1A7Fy Fixed buffer No 5 The bit configuration is the same as Fixed buffer No 1 6784 to 7807 1A80 to 1E7F y Fixed buffer No 6 The bit configuration is the same as Fixed buffer No 1 7808 to 8831 Fixed b No 7 The bit confi dni Fixed b EA 1E80 to 227F y ixed buffer No 7 The bit configuration is the same as Fixed buffer No 1 8832 to 9855 ESA No 8 The bit confi inisi Fixed b No 4 22804 to 267F y ixed buffer No 8 The bit configuration is the same as Fixed buffer No 1 9856 to 16383 Shared area for 2680 to 3FFF4 random access 16384 to 18431 buffers and e mail 40004 to 47FF y buffers System area Shared area for random access buffers and e mail buffers Send receive area 18432 to 20479 for predefined 4800 to 4FFFy protocol support function Send receive area for predefined protocol support function 44 Programming tool setting applicability O O x x O CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Address Decimal Application Initial value tool setting applicability Programming Hexadecimal Open completion signal e 0 Open incomplete e 1 Open completed Connection No 1 b0 20480 5000p Connection No 2 b1 to Con
389. to the LCPU Note the following when not using the parameters of an E71 set on the programming tool e Because a QE71 N operates with all of its communication condition setting switches off set the communication conditions using the reinitialization process e When MELSOFT products such as a programming tool are directly connected to an E71 the MELSOFT products such as a programming tool cannot access an LCPU To set the parameters of an E71 using the programming tool delete the programs for the initial process and the termination process Programs for the QE71 N in the own station can be used for communications with an E71 except for the following programs e Program to access the data link system e Program related to the EEPROM e Connection number 8 pairing open setting e Parameter setting program using the EPRSET instruction However because the response speed of an E71 is different from that of a QE71 N the program may not be used as is Before using the same program check the operation Program using an I O signal Programs cannot be used together with parameter settings on the programming tool Point O Foran E71 set the operation mode and communication conditions using the programming tool Settings cannot be configured using a switch unlike QnA A series modules There is no switch for settings O For an E71 after the Passive open process is executed the open request cannot be cancelled before open completion After the ope
390. transmission speed 100Mbps 10Mbps Full duplex Half duplex Half duplex PaE an Transmission method Base band z specifications gt Maximum segment length 100m length between a hub and a node l Maximum number of cascade Cascade connection maximum of 2 Cascade connection maximum of 4 af connections levels levels Y 9 Number of simultaneous S 16 connections Connections usable on a program O open connections rate O Sending recelving Fixed buffer 1k word x 16 D data storage Random access buffer 6k words x 1 memory Attachment 6k words x 1 E mail Number of occupied l O points 32 points I O assignment Intelligent 32 points Internal current consumption 5VDC 0 60A External dimensions 90 H x 28 5 W x 95 D mm Weight 0 18kg 21 Specifications Item LJ71E71 100 100BASE TX 10BASE T Data Attachment 6k words X 1 When sending Send either a file as attachment or main text select one When receiving Receive a file as attachment Subject Us ASCII format or ISO 2022 JP Base64 Attachment format MIME format MIME Version 1 0 Can be selected from binary ASCII and CSV Data of attachment format File name XXXX bin binary XXXX asc ASCII XXXX csv CSV T oe CSV Comma Separated Value ransmission specifications Division of attachment Cannot be divided Only one file can be sent received sending receiving Subject Base64 7 bits data When sending encode Main text 7 bits Attachment Base64 Da
391. truction Is the communication status of the connected device normal Has an open or initial error occurred in the error log area Action e Open the connection with the connected device e Check if the open close processes for I O signals and the OPEN CLOSE instructions are not used together for the same connection If so correct the program e Read Open error code address 124 7C in the communication status storage area Then check the error details and correct the error Check and correct the IP address of the connected device Check and correct the settings if they are unmatched e Set Predefined protocol to Fixed Buffer Communication in the open setting e Configure the setting so that the fixed buffer setting Send or Receive in the open setting matches the communication type of the protocol Send Only Receive Only or Send amp Receive 1 Write the protocol setting data to the E71 Correct the execution conditions of the ECPRTCL instruction Check the error code in the ECPRTCL instruction completion status area and correct the error Set the execution protocol number to the control data of the ECPRTCL instruction Correct the error in the connected device Check and correct the error 4 For details on the settings refer to Page 202 Section 15 7 3 If the action above does not solve the problem perform the following tests on the E71 to check for hardware error e Hardware test gt Page 323 Appe
392. ts Sends a send packet then receives a packet if it matches any of up to 16 defined Send amp Receive S 090 0Jd JO Sd UOIWeDIUNWWWOD Z receive packets 99 11 3 Packet Elements A packet consists of packet elements Up to 32 elements can be placed in a packet and the maximum data length is 2046 bytes per packet The following shows the details of the packet elements For examples of packet element data refer to Page 336 Appendix 8 3 1 Static Data Element Setting Static Data Send Element Name D Code Type las CII String v Setting Value os 0 byte Setting Range 1 to 50 Cancel This element is used when a specific code or character string such as a command exists in a packet e When sending The specified code and character string are sent e When receiving Receive data are verified Multiple Static Data elements can be placed anywhere in the data part The following table lists the items ASCII String ASCII Control Code HEX Set data within 1 to 50 bytes Code type and setting range are as follows Ex Setting Value e ASCII String 20y to 7F y ASCII String ABC e ASCII Control Code Control code of 00y to 1F and 7F y ASCII Control Code STX e HEX Hexadecimal data of 00 to FFy HEX FFFF 100 CHAPTER 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING THE PREDEFINED PROTOCOL 2 Length Element Setting Length Send Element Name Code Type Data Lenath Data Flow Calculating Range Sta
393. turn SOCK_NG printf n send data n s n s_buf 348 APPENDICES Perform receiving size check and receiving processing simultaneously rbuf_idx 0 recv_size 0 Initialize the number of receive data while 1 Receive data storage head index initialization length recv socketno char amp r_buf rouf_idx BUF_SIZE rbuf_idx 0 if length 0 Sockerro ERROR_RECEIVE return SOCK_NG if length SOCKET ERROR nErrorStatus WSAGetLastError if nErrorStatus WSAEWOULDBLOCK Sockerro ERROR_RECEIVE return SOCK_NG else continue else rbuf_idx length recv_ size length if recv_size gt RECV_ANS 2 break r_buf rbuf_idx M0 printf receive data n s n r_buf if shutdown socketno 2 SOCK_OK Sockerror ERROR_SHUTDOWN return SOCK_NG if closesocket socketno SOCK_OK Sockerror ERROR_CLOSE return SOCK_NG Closeflag FLAG_OFF WSACleanup printf nAJ_test End n n Normally completed n printf Press any key to exit the program n Dmykeyin getchar Wait for key input return SOCK_ Ok Response data receiving ls connection cut off Error handling Error handling Repeat until messages are received Update the receive data storage position Update the number of receive data Have all response messages been received Stop repeating as messages
394. tus 201 C9y 202 CAy CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Programming tool setting applicability Initial value Connection No 2 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 Connection No 3 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 Connection No 4 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 Connection No 5 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 Connection No 6 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 Connection No 7 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 Connection No 8 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 OH E LED on off status Stores the on off status of the LEDs on the front of the Ethernet module INIT LED b0 e 0 OFF e 1 ON initial process completed OPEN LED b1 e 0 OFF e 1 ON connection open processing completed ERR LED b3 e 0 OFF e 1 ON hardware failure COM ERR LED b4 e 0 OFF e 1 ON communication error Bits other than those described above are reserved for system use Hub connection status area Communication mode b9 e 0 Half duplex e 1 Full duplex Hub connection status b10 e 0 Hub not connected disconnected e 1 Hub connected Data transmission speed b15 b14 e 00 Operating at 10BASE T e 01 Operating at 100BASE TX Bits other than those described above are reserved for system use Switch status operational mode setting Communication d
395. ual Application 302 APPENDICES 1 Precautions for settings e Specify the setting value of each timer on the E71 side so that the following formula is met Response TCP ULP TCP end Tor a monitoring la resend gt assembly timer value timer value timer value timer value timer value TCP TCP zero window resend timer value timer value When connecting Mitsubishi products to the line configure the same settings for both modules e Specify the setting value of each timer on the connected device side so that the following formula is met The frequency of a communication error such as a transmission timeout may be higher if the timer values do not meet the formula TCP ULP TCP resend timer value timer value on gt on the E71 the connected device Monitoring timer value of l the application software on gt bi ULP timer value xn the connected device on the E71 1 n is the number of TCP segment transmission and is calculated by the following formula Message size sent by the E71 n A value that Maximum Segment Size is rounded up to the nearest integer The number of TCP segment transmission when communications are performed on the same line The Maximum Segment Size is 1460 bytes on the same line without a router and the number of TCP Segment transmission is as follows e n 1 when the size of the message sent by the E71 is 1460 bytes or less e n 2 when th
396. uction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notifie
397. ue j 22568 Fixed buffer communication time 0 58284 communicado Connection Minimum value j information 22569 Stalls Storage alee lapas Fixed buffer communication time 58294 Current value 22570 to 22579 582A to 5833 Connection No 10 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 9 H H 22580 to 22589 ai i onnection No e bit configuration is the same as Connection No 9 5834 to 583D C tion No 11 The bit confi t th C tion No 9 H H 22590 to 22599 l E 583E to 5847 Connection No 12 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 9 22600 to 22609 CO 5848 to 5851 Connection No 13 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 9 22610 to 22619 l vd 58524 to 585B Connection No 14 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 9 22620 to 22629 i Roach 585C to 58654 Connection No 15 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 9 22630 to 22639 MENA 5866 to 586F Connection No 16 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 9 90 Programming tool setting applicability CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Address Programming Decimal Application Initial value tool setting Hexadecimal applicability 22640 5870 Number of mails remaining on the server ES H 22641 f 58714 Dedicated instruction normal completion count H x 22642 58724 Dedicated instruction abnormal end count x H 22643 58734 Normal receiving count x H 2264
398. uffer reception status signal address 5005 Point O Do not perform a receive process using I O signals and using the dedicated instruction together for the same connection Doing so will result in malfunction When receive data is read from the same connection the BUFRCVS instruction for an interrupt program cannot be used together 5 Errors If a dedicated instruction ends with an error Completion device D2 1 turns on and the error code is stored in a N U UJ C TI D O lt Completion status S2 1 215 216 6 Program example The following shows a sample program that reads the receive data from the fixed buffer of connection number 1 when the I O signals of the E71 are X Y00 to X Y1F SM400 UO MOV G20480 K4MO UO MOV G20482 K4M20 UA MOV G20485 K4M40 M5000 X19 MO M40 M500 HL HE py es MOON M5001 WJ ZP BUFROV UO K1 D5000 D500 M500 M500 M501 Process upon completion M501 Process upon abnormal end CHAPTER 15 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 15 10 z BUFRCVS This instruction reads data received from the connected device through communications using a fixed buffer used in an interrupt program Command zsurrovs L Available device 7 nternal device ink direct device Intelligent Index l Int devi Link direct devi g Setting data File Constant system user JODO function module register Others register l a e AAA CALA op o Ass po pa sa The file r
399. ule BFFF y Manual and take corrective action e The IP address setting value of the E71 for the initial C001 process is incorrect e Correct the IP address Set the class to A B C H e The setting value of the subnet mask field for the router e Correct the subnet mask relay function is incorrect C002 Some of the various timer setting values for the initial e Check and correct each timer setting value for the initial n process are outside the allowable range process The setting value of the auto open UDP port number for C003 the initial process is outside the allowable range e Check and correct the auto open UDP port number 264 Error code C004 C005 C006 C0074 CO0E y COOF C0104 C0114 C0124 C0134 C0144 C0154 C0164 C0174 C0184 C020 C021 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING Error description Action eee e Correct the subnet mask and perform the initial process The setting value of the subnet mask field is incorrect assi in e The setting value of the default router IP address for the router relay function is incorrect e Correct the default router IP address and perform the e The network address network address after the subnet initial process again mask of the default router IP address is different from e Set the same network address as that of the IP address of that of the IP address of the Ethernet module in the own the Ethernet module in the own station stati
400. unction window DO Tool gt Predefined Protocol Support Function gt Ethernet Module Create a new file File gt New gt Add Select Predefined Protocol Library or Add New in the Add Protocol window When Predefined Protocol Library is selected select the protocol from Predefined Protocol Library registered in GX Works2 If User Protocol Library is selected in the Add Protocol window protocols saved by user can be read For details on the User Protocol Library refer to the following GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Intelligent Function Module 96 CHAPTER 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING THE PREDEFINED PROTOCOL 4 Set the items required for the data communications Protocol Detailed Setting Connected Device Information Set communication parameters in the Protocol Detailed Manufacturer FO Type CO Setting window Model FC O Version a OOOO to FFF KO Protocol Detailed Setting window gt Select a Explenalcn o protocol gt Edit gt Protocol Detailed Setting Protocol Setting Infomation Protocol No fi Protocol Name Communication Type Send amp Receive y Receive Setting Clear OS area receive data area before protocol execution Enable C Disable Receive Wait Time jo x 100ms Setting Range O to 30000 0 Infinite Wait Send Setting Number of Retries Times Setting Range Oto 10 Retry Interval 10ms Setting R
401. unction lt SH 080180 13JR40 gt MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual lt SH 080008 13JF89 gt 2 CPU module user s manual Manual name lt manual number model code gt MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection lt SH 080890ENG 13JZ36 gt MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals lt SH 080889ENG 13JZ35 gt 3 Operating manual Manual name lt manual number model code gt GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common lt SH 080779ENG 13JU63 gt GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Intelligent Function Module lt SH 080921 13JU69 gt Description E mail function communication function communications via CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H or MELSECNET 10 and communications by using the data link instructions and file transfer FTP server function of the E71 Web function of the E71 Details of MELSEC communication protocol MC protocol that is used for data communication between a target device and a CPU module Description Specifications of the CPU modules power supply modules display unit branch module extension module SD memory cards and batteries information on how to establish a system maintenance and inspection and troubleshooting Functions and devices of the CPU module and programming Description System configuration parameter settings and online operat
402. unications the following methods can be selected in the Ethernet operation setting gt Page 66 Section 7 1 3 2 Alive check method The following alive check methods are available a Check using the PING command This method is used for a connection opened using TCP IP or UDP IP The E71 performs an alive check by sending the PING command ICMP echo request response function to the connected device with which communications have not been performed for a certain period of time and waiting to see whether the response is received 4 The E71 automatically sends an echo response packet when it receives a PING echo request It sends a response to the received PING command even if the connection used in the data communications with the connected device is closed b Check using the KeepAlive function This method is used for a connection opened using TCP IP The E71 performs an alive check by sending a KeepAlive ACK message to the connected device with which communications have not been performed for a certain period of time and waiting to see whether the response is received 4 The connection may be disconnected if the connected device does not support the TCP KeepAlive function response to a KeepAlive ACK message 187 UONOUN YIOYD SAIIV 9 yL 3 If a response message cannot be received from the connected device If a response message cannot be received from the connected device or if an error has been detected
403. ure oooooocconoooo eee eee eens 124 12 4 1 Data receiving using the main program BUFRCV instruction 124 12 4 2 Data receiving using an interrupt program BUFRCVS instruction 127 120 Parameter Seung secs seie oe bn lt os arta Sees ad 129 12 5 1 Parameter setting when using an interrupt program 000 cee eee 130 12 67 DatasPOnmal ac aros besas mba ad ia ida ok e a o e dl ae ee ca a 132 A Meade A ON ARAN 132 12 6 2 APpplica lO dataset PA ARDE ERE 132 Ta AAA eq aye ae dee ane oral ae wakes EU eet as wate ats 138 12 21 SADDIGAUONS 24 caos Berd oer ae a bee SO RE nee She Ee ee a al 138 TrA Parameter Seling aran yr a AAA aed Rae raed ie id wa a 139 12 8 Broadcast Communications n a aaa es oe whieh eR aces Gots eh A Hid we BS Gee 140 12 8 1 Sending receiving procedures 0 0 cc eee eee eee een nes 140 12 8 2 Parameter setting alicante cea Sea 142 128 3 PIGCAUNIONS us eats oa eae Geka ee ey ete ao ee ted 144 12 9 Example of Communications Using a Fixed Buffer aaa aaae 145 129 1 System COMMGOULAUON avr a ds E Reale ada A eas Aaa 145 129 2 Ratameter Selina asa AAA AAA A Aaa 145 LID PO SM is dl da A a non AE AAA 149 CHAPTER 13 COMMUNICATIONS USING A RANDOM ACCESS BUFFER 153 1921 APplicallOAS suis ass e el a dd is ed ld e il 153 13 2 COMMUNICANON STUCIS 0d ir AA aaa 154 13 2 1 How data is read from a connected device 0
404. v Please input 16 point unit HEX to start I O No in which module is mounted precia Routing Parameters Assignment Image E tt Check End Cancel 3 A Print Window Print Window O b Ethernet operation setting The following is an example of the Ethernet operation setting Ethernet Operation Setting gt Communication Data Code y Initial Timing ye Bo not wait For OPEN Communications impossible at STOP time ASCII Code C Always wait For OPEN Communication possible at STOP time IPF Address Setting Send Frame Setting Input Format DEC i Ethernetiv2 0 IP Address 192 0 1 100 1 TEEESOZ 3 i Binary Code Buijes Jajaweled ZG LL SUONCOIUNLWWOD O00 0Jq Pauljepalg JO ajduex3 S Enable Online Change TCP Existence Confirmation Setting i Use the Keepalive Use the Ping End Cancel 111 c Open setting The following is an example of the open setting n Network Parameter Ethernet Open Setting Module No 1 SEE ec Predefined protocol __ Enable v No Confirm v 8192 m KREMER lefa lelefe le lalola efe lalo Lala lefefe le lefe le lalola lafelo o UDP g g g g g g g E g E E E AAAI KREMER KREMER KRKKR lalola lafelo ale lelafelelefelel
405. vice COSC Incorrect request For example a request for data e Correct the request details and send it to the Ethernet 3 read write in bit units has been issued to a word device module again For example change the subcommand CO5Dy The monitor registration is not performed e Register the monitoring data and perform monitoring e Increase the CPU monitoring timer value e Check that the programmable controller CPU is operating normally The communication time between the Ethernet module y e Correct the network number or PC number COSE and the programmable controller CPU exceeded the CPU en l e If the destination is a station with a different network monitoring timer value number correct the routing parameter setting If the destination is a station with a different network number check if the network number is not in use CO5F This request cannot be executed to the target e Correct the network number or PC number programmable controller e Correct the read write request details Incorrect request For example incorrect data was e Correct the request details and send it to the Ethernet C060 a es specified for bit devices module again For example correct the data 268 Error code Error description C0614 C0624 C070 C0714 C0724 C0734 C0744 C0804 C0814 C0824 C0834 The request data length does not match with the number of data in the character a part of text When wri
406. wing describes how communications are processed on the sending side LCPU 1 side 1 Seteach parameter on a programming tool and write the set parameters to the CPU module Then reset the CPU module and check that the initial process is completed 2 Perform the open process Active open of the connection number 1 3 Perform communications using a fixed buffer from the CPU module using the BUFSND instruction 4 After the data is sent perform the close process of the connection number 1 b Receiving side LCPU 2 side The following describes how communications are processed on the receiving side LCPU 2 side 1 Set each parameter on a programming tool and write the set parameters to the CPU module Then reset the CPU module and check that the initial process is completed When the initial process is normally completed the connection number 1 waits for an Active open request from the connected device N Perform communications using a fixed buffer from the connected device 3 Use the BUFRCV instruction to read the data that have been received by the corresponding fixed buffer data area of the E71 into the CPU module WweiBOld 6 Z JONG pexij e Buisn SUOIJEOSIUNWIWOD jo a duexy 6ZL 149 2 Sample program a Program on the sending side LCPU 1 side The following is a program on the sending side LCPU 1 side lt lt Open process program gt gt SM400 U0 MOV G20480 U0 MOV G20482 M1000 J
407. xecuted Completion device a Ty Completion device 1 Abnormally ended ee a ak Clearing the error I e The ZP ERRCLR instruction is executed on the rising edge OFF ON of the clear command 4 Errors If a dedicated instruction ends with an error Completion device D1 1 turns on and the error code is stored in Completion status S1 1 a N Y m py JD O z py 221 5 Program example The following shows a sample program that clears the open error code of the connection number 1 when the l O signals of the E71 are X Y00 to X Y1F MO M1 M1 HZ P ERRO LR 222 MOVP MOVP UO SET DO D2 D3 M1 M10 D100 D100 M1 END Specify the open abnormal code of connection 1 Specify the error code clear Execute the ERRCLR instruction Process upon completion Error information is cleared Process upon abnormal end CHAPTER 15 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 15 12 ZPERRRD This instruction reads error information stored in the buffer memory of the E71 Command zPeRRRD O H Available device Er Internal device E Link direct device Intelligent Index a ile j system user 4 JOO function module register Others register bit woa gt Bit Word devieumeo zn KH ey o A pa CN SN SN A A AA E A 1 The file registers set for each local device and program cannot be used 1 Setting data Sett
408. xecuted in an interrupt program and the process is completed within one BUFRCVS instruction Receiving data scan Point O To read receive data using an interrupt program configure both the interrupt settings and interrupt pointer setting parameters of the programming tool gt Page 130 Section 12 5 1 O When receive data is read from the same connection the BUFRCV instruction for the main program cannot be used together 4 Errors If a dedicated instruction ends with an error Diagnostic errors SMO turns on and the error code is stored in SDO 5 Program example The following shows a sample program that reads the receive data from the fixed buffer of connection number 2 when the I O signals of the E71 are X Y00 to X Y1F Enable the interrupt EI program FEND SM400 __ Z BUFRCVS D700 Execute the BUFRCVS instruction IRET 218 CHAPTER 15 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 15 11 ZPERRCLR This instruction turns off LEDs of the E71 or clears error information stored in the buffer memory Command a Available device TE Internal device En Link direct device Intelligent Index er i ile a system user t JO O function module register Others register ei Word C gt Bt word deviceurco zn KH AAA pap E 8 ef SCO 1 The file registers set for each local device and program cannot be used 1 Setting data Setting data Description Set by Da
409. xipuaddy Appendix 7 Differences from Ethernet Modules of Other Series This section describes the differences between an E71 and Ethernet modules of other series Appendix 7 1 Differences from a built in Ethernet port LCPU For comparison of the specifications and functions between an LJ71E71 100 and a Built in Ethernet port LCPU refer to the following MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Built In Ethernet Function Appendix 7 2 Differences from Q series modules The functions of LJ71E71 100 are the same as those of QJ71E71 100 except for those listed below A program of QJ71E71 100 can be also used Supported X Not supported Item LJ71E71 100 QJ71E71 100 AUTO MDI MDI X compatibility automatic detection of a straight gt cable and a cross cable File password 32 x Redundant system supporting function O Appendix 7 3 Differences from QnA A series modules This section provides the functional comparison between an E71 and QnA A series modules and precautions for using the same program The QnA A series modules are the following products Series Model name Product name AJ71E71 AJ71E71 A1SJ71E71 B2 A1SJ71E71 B5 AJ71E71 S3 AJ71E71 S3 A1SJ71E71 B2 S3 A1SJ71E71 B5 S3 AJ71E71N3 T AJ71E71N B5 AJ71E71N B2 AJ71E71N T AJ71E71N B5T A1SJ71E71N3 T A1SJ71E71N B5 A1SJ71E71N B2 A1SJ71E71N T A1SJ71E71 B5T AJ71QE71 AJ71QE71 B5 A1SJ71QE71 B2 A1SJ71QE71 B5 AJ71QE71N3 T AJ71QE71N B5 QnA series QE71 N AJ71QE71N B2 A
410. yte e When the data length of a send packet is an odd number the upper byte lower byte for Byte Swap of the last device is not sent e When the data length of a receive packet is an odd number the last data is stored with one byte of 004 Ex When sending data whose length is an odd number Send dai Connected Word Specified device No byte swap ined er device al 5905 oa 0 02 Tom 0 1 2 3 Data length storage area 1 Data are not sent Spa 060 osr oa om 020 tt Data storage area A NS Byte swap xx When receiving data whose length is an odd number Word Specified device No byte swap Data length storage area 0 Data storage area 1 2 Connected 4 Send data device 3 Resina om om 039 06 os Word Specified device Byte swap Data length storage area 0 1 2 3 Data storage area When the setting for Unit of Stored Data is Lower Bytes Only e Twice the size of the data length is occupied For the upper data the E71 ignores the data at sending and adds 00 to the data at receiving 330 APPENDICES 3 Non verified Reception The following shows the usage example for a Non verified Reception element Example of a packet format of the connected device Necessary information for users Variable number of 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes 5 bytes 5 bytes gt characters 1 byte d Identification Country Manufacturer Product m code

MELSEC-L Ethernet Interface Module User`s Manual (Basic)

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents